Blog

  • Understanding Debt Instruments: Types, and Examples

    Understanding Debt Instruments – For those who have been involved in the business and financial world for a long time will certainly understand more about the various terms in it. One of them is debt instruments. However, for those who are new, of course there are still many who do not understand the meaning of debt instruments.

    Therefore, in this article we will discuss the terms of debt instruments along with examples of these terms in full.

    What Are Debt Instruments?

    A debt instrument is an asset that requires regular payments to all its holders, generally using interest. In addition, a debt instrument is also a documented and binding obligation that provides funds to entities in return for the entity’s promise to make repayments to lenders in accordance with the contract or agreement that has been made.

    The debt instrument contract contains all the detailed provisions regarding the agreement, namely the collateral involved, the interest rate, the interest payment schedule, as well as the period until maturity if applicable. This debt instrument also provides capital to entities that promise to pay back the capital from time to time. Credit cards, lines of credit, loans, and even bonds can all be used as types of debt instruments.

    The term debt instrument primarily has a focus on debt capital collected by institutional entities. Because this institutional entity can include the government, private companies, and also the public. Credit cards and lines of credit are types of debt instruments that can be used by institutions to obtain capital. This revolving line of credit generally has a simple arrangement and only with one lender.

    Debt security instruments are sophisticated and structured debt instruments to be issued to various investors. More complex debt instruments will certainly require the creation of extended contracts as well as the involvement of many lenders who generally invest through the organized market.

    Who uses debt instruments?

    Generally, the term debt instrument has a focus on debt capital issued by an institutional entity. Institutional entities can include the government, private and public companies.

    Debt instruments provide capital to entities that promise to repay the capital from time to time. Because the issuance structure allows capital to be obtained from many investors, the entity issues these debt securities instruments. Debt securities can be arranged with long or short term.

    Long-term debt securities require payments to investors within a period of up to more than one year. As for short-term debt securities paid back to investors and closed within a period of one year. Entities generally organize debt security offers for payments ranging from one month to 30 years.

    These revolving credit lines generally have a simple structure and only one lender. They also generally have no connection with the primary or secondary market for securitization.

    More complex debt instruments will involve contract structures as well as the involvement of many investors or lenders who generally invest through an organized market.

    Types of Debt Instruments

    Based on the repayment period, the types of debt instruments are divided into two types, namely:

    1. Short-term debt

    Short-term debt generally has a short repayment period of less than 1 year.

    2. Long-term debt

    Long-term debt has a relatively longer maturity period. Generally up to more than one accounting period of 1 year. It can even be longer than that.

    Examples of Debt Instruments in Indonesia

    According to the type of debt, the issuance market for institutionalized entities varies greatly. The types of debt instruments that can be used by institutions to obtain capital are credit cards and lines of credit. In addition, there are loans and obligations. Everything can be a type of debt instrument.

    Some things that are usually used as debt instruments are:

    1. National Bonds

    National Debt is a valuable document in the form of a letter of acknowledgment of debt in Rupiah currency or foreign currency that is guaranteed payment of principal and interest by the Republic of Indonesia, in accordance with the validity period.

    The management of this National Debt Bond has been regulated in Law Number 24 of 2002 on National Debt Bonds, which provides certainty that:

    • SUN publications are only for a specific purpose.
    • The government is obliged to pay the interest and principal of the SUN that has fallen due.
    • The amount of SUN that will be published each budget year must obtain the approval of the DPR and be consulted in advance with Bank Indonesia.
    • SUN trading is regulated and supervised by the authorities.
    • Provide heavy and clear legal sanctions against publication by parties who do not have authority and or forgery of SUN.

    Purpose of Issuance of National Bonds

    SUN is not simply published, but with specific purposes, including the following:

    • Financing the APBN deficit.
    • Cover short-term cash shortages.
    • Manage the national debt portfolio.

    The central government has the authority to issue SUN after obtaining the approval of the DPR which is confirmed within the framework of the approval of the APBN and after consulting with Bank Indonesia.

    Terms in SUN

    Different investment instruments, different terms that exist and are related in it. When talking about SUN, there will generally be 2 terms that are often used, namely maturity and interest or coupon.

    Reader need to know that SUN certainly has a period of validity. That is, the government will return the investor’s principal funds after the due date or the time is up. As for the maturity itself, it actually has various variations, starting from 3 months and some even reaching up to 30 years.

    Meanwhile, interest and coupons are rewards given to investors or buyers of SUN. This coupon is calculated as a percentage of the principal amount and time per year. However, the payment can be made at a discount or every three months.

    Types of SUN

    In accordance with Law Number 24 of 2002, SUN has 2 types, namely:

    1. National Treasury Letter (SPN)

    National Treasury Bill (SPN) is a SUN that has a maximum term of 12 months and interest payments are made at a discount. In some countries SPN is better known as Treasury Bills or T-Bills. SUN with this type is generally intended for large investors.

    2. National Obligations (ON)

    National Obligations are SUNs that have a term of more than 12 months with coupons or interest payments made at a discount. Government Bonds with coupons have a periodic coupon payment schedule (one, three months or six months).

    While ON without coupons does not have a coupon payment schedule. In Indonesia itself there are 3 types of national bonds that are sold in a retail way, among others:

    1. ORI (Indonesian Retail Bonds)

    ORI is the oldest retail bond ever issued by the Indonesian government. The first ORI with series ORI001 was issued in July 2006. In general, 1-2 ORI are issued each year. In October 2022, the government plans to issue ORI011.

    According to analysts’ estimates, retail bonds with a tenor of three years will offer a coupon with a percentage between 7%-8.75%. This yield is slightly different when compared to deposit interest, which according to the Money Market Information Center averages 7.11% (1 month) and 6.8% (12 months).

    The government itself has a target to be able to absorb up to Rp20 trillion from the publication of ORI011, which is relatively the same as ORI010 which amounts to Rp20.21 trillion.

    2. SBR (Retail Savings Bond)

    SBR is a National Obligation that is sold to individuals or individuals Indonesian Citizens through Distribution Partners in the domestic Primary Market that cannot be traded in the secondary market.

    The characteristics of SBR are the floating minimum rate and the early redemption facility .

    3. Retail Sukuk (SR)

    SR is a national obligation that is sold to individuals or individuals Indonesian Citizens through Distribution Partners in the domestic Prime Market that has a sharia basis. When Reader is looking for an investment product that is truly in accordance with sharia, maybe SR is the right answer because it has been guaranteed by MUI.

    SR is almost the same as ORI in its characteristics, where there is a fixed rate every year and there is a secondary market.

    2. Mortgage

    Mortgage in the Big Indonesian Dictionary has the meaning “credit given on the basis of collateral in the form of immovable property.”

    Guarantees in the form of assets or immovable things such as land, buildings, houses, and apartments.

    Meanwhile, quoted from the Financial Services Authority, a mortgage is a debt instrument with the granting of a lien from the property as well as the borrower to the lender as a guarantee for its obligations; in this case the borrower can still benefit or use the property; The lien on the property expires after the obligation is paid off ( mortgage ).

    Borrowers can have a house by paying off the mortgage debt, which is the value of the house along with the interest. If the borrower fails to repay the mortgage debt, then the object of the guarantee becomes the property of the creditor (lender).

    3. Obligations

    Obligations is a term in the capital market that means a debt statement to bondholders. Facilities from bond issuers where the party with the debt and the bond holder are the debtors. When a person has an obligation, it will usually be written when the debt is due, along with the coupon (interest) that is the responsibility of the obligation holders.

    In Indonesia, generally the period that applies to this obligation is from 1 to 10 years. Then, the issuance of this bond has the purpose of collecting funds from the community which is used as a source of funding.

    One of the reasons why bonds are in demand until now is because bonds can be traded and the level of security from bonds can be said to be quite good. This fairly good security is because the obligation has a connection with the government so that the process is safer and more accurate.

    •  
  • Understanding Insomnia: Types, Symptoms, and Driving Factors

    Definition of Insomnia – Are you here suffering from difficulty sleeping or what is commonly referred to as insomnia? This term must be very familiar to you, right? Well, surely most of you think the meaning or definition of insomnia is only limited to difficulty sleeping.

    In fact, there is a more complex and complete definition of insomnia. In full, the meaning and definition of insomnia itself is a disorder of difficulty sleeping in a person that causes the person not to get good quality sleep and conform to the sleep standards for humans.

    Well, if you don’t get good quality sleep, you will definitely get many side effects that may be fatal.

    A health specialist named Lusiana Winata told some of the consequences of this sleep disorder. According to him, a person who has trouble sleeping will experience several disturbances in various general functions.

    The functions in question are aspects of life, such as social functions, work disorders, disorders in educational functions both academic and non-academic, and disorders of other important functions.

    Difficulty sleeping at night will make the sufferer tend to feel sleepy during the day. Alias ​​the sufferer will feel the urge to sleep while the sufferer is carrying out their daily activities. This is what Doctor Lusiana Winata meant by disrupting the functions of life.

    When sufferers feel sleepy when they are doing activities, whether it is work or study, it will definitely affect their performance and work results. There are also sufferers who do not even feel sleepy at all, even so the sufferers still have to sleep just to rest their eyes.

    In addition, there are several other minor consequences caused by sleep disorders. Sufferers of sleep disorders will easily feel suffocated due to lack of energy, sufferers will tend to easily feel upset and end up with anger, besides that it will have a fatal impact on mental health and end up with overthinking and ending up with depression. Terrible isn’t it? Well, this time we will invite you to know more about this sleep disorder.

    A. Meaning of Insomnia

    Insomnia is one of the health disorders that attack the sufferer which causes the sufferer to experience difficulty or trouble sleeping. In this case, difficulty sleeping makes the sufferer have an obstacle to begin to sleep or even continue sleeping.

    Insomnia in another sense can also be defined as a condition or disorder that can make the sufferer not have good sleep quality and will get various disturbances during the day. Insomnia has a kind of clinical diagnosis that is generally given regularly at least three times a week.

    One of the institutions called the National Institute of Health conducted research and obtained the results that there are about 30% of the total human population having symptoms or signs of this sleep disorder. The results show that the population that suffers the most from the symptoms of insomnia are women, this can be caused by the hormonal changes that occur in women.

    Another population that has the most symptoms of insomnia are the elderly (aged) with a vulnerable age between 60 years. It is caused by a change in the cycle or sleep schedule and some are also caused by the development of other diseases due to increasing age.

    In addition to being caused by the things above, insomnia can also attack people of various ages. Insomnia usually occurs without any cause, so the trouble sleeping will come on its own for no reason. There are several conditions that can affect the onset of difficulty sleeping or insomnia, among others due to psychological stress, chronic pain in the body, heart disease or heart failure, an overactive thyroid (hyperthyroidism), restless legs syndrome, menopause in the elderly, due to certain drugs, etc.

    There are also other factors that can affect insomnia, this factor can affect because it is done on a long-term basis, such as when there is a night shift at work. The diagnosis can be based on the habits when you sleep and some tests used to detect the underlying cause.

    Insomnia caused by a psychological illness should be dealt with by a specialist. One of the treatments is psychological therapy. Psychological therapy that is considered effective in treating insomnia is cognitive therapy. The therapy is done in a way that insomnia patients are required to be able to improve their sleeping habits, by doing several ways to feel sleepy. In addition, patients are also trained to be able to reduce or even eliminate various pro and contra assumptions about sleep.

    There are some sufferers of sleep disorders who prefer to rely on the way drugs work instead of treating them naturally. Even though you know yourself that we shouldn’t depend on medicine. Drugs that are often used by sufferers of sleep disorders are usually sedatives and sleeping pills.

    Both are known to have effects that can make the user feel dependent on the drugs. sufferers will feel unable to sleep if they do not swallow both substances and drugs. If you consume one or both of these drugs continuously, it will definitely have a bad effect on your body, right?

    B. Types of General Insomnia

    After getting to know the meaning and some short facts of sleep disorders. It’s time for us to tell you what types of insomnia you have. Here are the common types of insomnia that you need to know.

     

    1. Acute insomnia

    Acute insomnia or what is also known as short-term insomnia is a condition when you experience difficulty sleeping for a relatively short period of time. Acute insomnia usually comes when you have things that make you feel stressed and depressed. Some examples of the reasons why you suffer from this type of sleep disorder are missal due to the loss of a precious person, receiving a sentence of a serious or deadly disease, and many more.

    2. Chronic insomnia

    Chronic insomnia is the opposite of acute insomnia. What does it mean? The meaning is, chronic insomnia is a disorder of difficulty sleeping that occurs over a relatively long or long period of time. Well, are you the one who might suffer from this type of insomnia? This type of sleep disorder can cause difficulty sleeping soundly for more than three times a week or may even last for more than three months.

    If you feel that you have this type of chronic insomnia, you must have felt the difficulty of sleeping for a long time, right? If you choose to ignore this, then you must be prepared to accept the risk. This condition may have a great influence on your health. That is because your body does not get enough rest time to recharge your body. The cause is due to stress, the formation of sleep patterns, too often bad dreams, being affected by mental disorders, and so on.

    3. Insomnia sleep onset

    Insomnia sleep onset is a disorder of difficulty sleeping despite already feeling sleepy. Sufferers of this type of insomnia will find it very difficult to sleep even though they already feel very sleepy and have even tried to make their body fall asleep. Sufferers will struggle to sleep even after being on the mattress for approximately 20-30 minutes. Sufferers find it difficult to fall asleep despite closing their eyes repeatedly.

    What are the consequences if you have this type of sleep disorder? The result is that you will only look at the ceiling of your room all night without feeling any rest. This type of insomnia is very, very harmful, because if you think about it, it will waste your time to rest. Its prolonged effects can cause Grads to feel tired and sleepy when the dawn has risen.

    The cause of this type of insomnia is none other than mental disorders, such as receiving heavy stress, suffering from anxiety disorders, to the point of depression.

    4. Children’s insomnia

    There is an institution called the American Academy of Sleep Medicine that conducted a study. From the results of their research and monitoring, some facts were obtained that there are two types of sleep disorders that often occur in children or humans at an early age.

    The first type of sleep disorder is sleep onset insomnia, which is an insomnia disorder that you may often see. This disturbance of sleep difficulties is caused by the habit of children who are usually held or given milk, and are in the same bed as their parents. Because children are used to it like that, making children won’t be able to sleep if they don’t do those habits.

    Not only that, if your child is not used to having a fixed sleeping time, it will also increase the possibility of sleep disorders. If parents or caregivers force the child to have a fixed sleeping time, it will actually reduce the possibility of having difficulty sleeping in the child.

    This type of insomnia can be overcome by getting your child used to going to bed earlier, or you can also make a sleep schedule so that they sleep more regularly. Force the child if he refuses to sleep. Don’t let your baby stay awake overnight and even fall asleep at the wrong time.

    5. Insomnia due to certain drugs or substances

    Insomnia or difficulty sleeping this type of disorder can occur due to the presence of stimulants that come from consuming drugs that can inhibit sleepiness. Certain drugs or substances include alcohol, coffee containing high caffeine, and certain other foods or drinks.

    An example of food that can make it difficult for you to sleep is spicy food. Come on! Who among you likes spicy food? Our advice is better not to eat spicy food before bedtime! Because spicy food can give a feeling of heat in the stomach which may disturb your sleepiness and sleep.

    The solution to this type of sleep disturbance problem is to stop the use and consumption of the substance or drug.

    You already know right? That means you should reduce or even stop its use or consumption if you want to get an ideal sleep pattern and good sleep quality.

    6. Insomnia due to medical conditions

    Insomnia or difficulty sleeping with this type can be caused by various things related to the disturbance caused by the meditative condition of the sufferer. One simple example is insomnia caused by a mental disorder in the sufferer. Other problems are medical conditions due to mental disorders, such as depression, anxiety disorders, bipolar disorders, and so on.

    The range of severity of this type of sleep disturbance is directly proportional to the severity of the disorder or medical condition experienced or suffered by the patient. Patients who suffer from this type of insomnia must undergo two treatments, the first to treat medical conditions (mental disorders, etc.), and the second is to treat sleep disorders. Patients who suffer from this type of sleep disorder must inform the doctor about any medication which is consumed.

    7. Mixed insomnia

    The last type of sleep difficulty disorder is the mixed type. The name of this type is not yet formal. However, the name of this mixture is very descriptive of this type of sleep disorder. Because mixed insomnia itself occurs due to a combination of sleep onset type insomnia coupled with the lack of ability to maintain sleep quality, as well as the habit of waking up early.

    C. Symptoms of Sleep Disorders

    Patients or sufferers who experience trouble falling asleep or what is commonly known as insomnia will begin with very simple symptoms, which is always waking up every night and when they wake up in the morning their body will feel tired.

     

    For sleep disorders caused by mental disorders, usually patients will feel tense, anxious, worried, always worrying about the problems they are facing. It was caused by the patient lying on the mattress for too long and not closing his eyes to fall asleep immediately. Cause the patient to think about all the things in his life and even dissolve in it.

    For acute type insomnia caused by trauma it will be very difficult to close the eyes. If this trauma happens continuously, then over time the patient will get used to sleeping late and end up with insomnia.

    D. Driving Factors for Insomnia Disorder

    It cannot be denied that insomnia can occur at all ages. But for the gender range, it is a fact that insomnia occurs more in women than in men. Here we will display some other factors that can trigger the occurrence of sleep disorders.

    1. Having a mental disorder or problem (depressed, post-traumatic disorder, violent disorder, and many more)

    2. Working with the night shift, work involving the shift method is judged to be able to change the biological clock or the natural clock in the body.

    3. Gender differences, for women who are menstruating or menstruating will naturally experience unpredictable hormonal changes. As a result, women will easily produce sweat at night.

    4. the elderly (elderly) because they are old, it will be very easy to be affected by old diseases. One of the disorders that occurs is the presence of difficulty sleeping.

    5. Sleeping too long during the day

    If you like to sleep during the day, then don’t fall asleep for too long. Why is that? Because napping for too long can make it difficult for you to feel sleepy at night. As a result, you will have insomnia and difficulty sleeping at night.

    Well, that’s a variety of information about sleep disorders or insomnia that may add insight and help if there are those of you who want to overcome sleep disorders or insomnia.

  • Meaning of Innovation: Benefits, Forms and Examples

    Meaning of Innovation – In life, of course we want something that develops. Because a stagnant life and that’s all will be boring. Therefore, there are times when we need something new and challenging. Something new can be called innovation. In life, there are many innovations that can be applied.

    Either in terms of education, business, community, or in other fields. Innovation will be greatly needed in order to obtain something new and better. If you want to learn the meaning of innovation more, then in this article it will be explained about it. So, read the article to the end to get an insight into what innovation is.

    The Meaning of Innovation According to Some Figures

    1. According to Nurdin (2016)

    According to Nurdin, the definition of innovation is something new, which is introduced and carried out by a new practice or process (either goods or services) or it can also be something new but the result of adoption from other organizations.

    2. According to Sa’ud (2014)

    Then according to Sa’ud, innovation is a creative choice, arrangement, as well as a set of people with new material resources, and also using unique ways to produce improvements on achievements that have been the previous goal.

    3. According to Kuniyoshi Urabe

    According to Kuniyoshi Urabe, innovation is not meant as a one-time phenomenon, but something that requires a long and cumulative process. Among them is the decision-making process by the members of the organization, starting from the discovery of ideas or ideas up to the marketing target.

    4. Van de ven, Andrew H

    According to Van de ven, Andrew H, innovation is the development as well as the implementation of new ideas carried out by a person in a certain period of time with various specific transaction activities in the organization.

    5. Stephen Robbins

    Further, according to Stephen, innovation is a new idea or idea which is applied in order to initiate and renew a product, process, or service that has existed before.

    6. Everett M Rogers

    Then according to Rogers, the meaning of innovation is ideas, objects, ideas, and practices that are based on and accepted as something new, either by a person or a group to be applied or adopted.

    What Are the Characteristics of Innovation?

    1. New

    The first characteristic of innovation is newness. Because everything that is created because of this innovation is something that has not existed before, or is perfecting something that already exists. This new concept was created from a hard thought towards the maximum utilization of existing SDA without reducing its function and role.

    The new innovation also means that the pure idea has never been used by anyone. Although it has been there before, it means that it was adopted because it was suitable as a solution.

    2. Planned

    An innovation will be planned according to the desired conditions. This is important because it will affect the future. Because it is done on purpose, innovation is done with mature, clear, and carefully planned processes and preparations, so that the process is not rushed. Without planning, of course everything can cause disappointment.

    3. Special

    The third characteristic of innovation is special. As something new, innovation will have its own characteristics. Even though it is the result of adoption, there must be a peculiarity that emerges. With application in a new place, innovation will create its own uniqueness, even if it starts with adoption.

    4. Have a clear purpose

    Finally, the characteristic of innovation is the existence of a clear purpose. Based on clear knowledge, there will be certain objects that are studied and want to be developed. That way, the direction and purpose of the innovation was clear beforehand. Without a clear object, innovation can be mistargeted and not implemented well. It may even fail to be implemented.

    Benefits of Innovation

    1. Provide solutions to solve problems

    One of the benefits of innovation is being able to solve problems. Something new can replace the old thing that feels full of problems. The presence of new ideas and ideas makes every problem that exists can be solved well. Especially for product problems, if there is an old product that can no longer be marketed, innovation must be done in order to re-engage the public’s interest in the product in the market.

    2. Increase a person’s productivity

    By thinking of new ideas and ideas, it means that a person will take the time to use his brilliant mind. Not only thoughts, but innovation will also grow when someone conducts experiments or research. So that by innovating, it means that the person has also taken advantage of the time to remain productive in working and creating. And this can also be done by many people, be it the boss, his employees, students or lecturers.

    3. Increase toughness

    Someone who innovates tends to have the ability to take advantage of their intelligence. That is, it is also tough, because in order to produce an innovation, the person must adapt to new problems and think about the solution to the problem.

    4. Can produce something unique

    Innovation can produce or even create unique and quality things. Especially people who have innovation belong to qualified people. What’s more, when the innovation he makes is successfully realized, it means he can produce something new and different from what already exists.

    That is the benefit of innovation. Of course, innovating will also be beneficial for someone in improving his quality. Because innovation is born from ideas and brilliant ideas from the results of one’s thoughts and experiments.

    Purpose of Innovation

    1. Improve quality

    The main purpose of innovation is to improve the quality of something, both products and services. Innovation that comes with new ideas and ideas is expected to be able to make a product or service much more valuable and quality than before.

    2. Widen the network

    With its novelty, it is hoped that a product or service can reach more markets. Innovation is also expected to be able to expand the business wings of an enterprise. Like the e-commerce businesses that are growing widely these days. The reach of innovative products will certainly also be wider, because the public likes something new.

    3. Can create new markets

    Innovation on the results of a product or service, will be able to give an opportunity to open a new market. The opportunity for unique and interesting things, especially those that have never existed before, is certainly wide open.

    4. Be a replacement for the previous product

    With innovation, then existing products can be replaced with new ones. Especially if the previous product or service was not effective and efficient, innovation can be born to make the product or service even better than before.

    Forms of Innovation and Examples

    1. Technological Innovation

    The first form of innovation is innovation in the field of technology. Where this innovation was born to provide convenience for humans in doing various daily activities. The fastest growing innovation in technology is social media. In the past, social media could be enjoyed in a very limited way, but now its development is very rapid.

    With the rapid globalization and the discoveries of experts, social media comes with features that greatly facilitate communication between people. Like Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, Whatsapp, YouTube and other social media. Now everyone can communicate both through audio and audio visual with various people from far away places.

    2. Transportation Innovation

    Second, there is innovation in the field of transportation. Where means of transportation are now increasingly easy to find. In addition to product innovation, such as the presence of electric cars and motorcycles, as well as environmentally friendly ones because they do not require gasoline, there are still many other innovations. Transportation services have also undergone changes for the better.

    If people used to find it difficult to travel quickly because they had to wait for other passengers, now there are online taxis that can be ordered in person. In fact, the development of online ojek is also very rapid, reaching the point of ordering a grab car which is much easier to do. This online ojek and grab car is an example of innovation that is present as a solution in the middle of the transportation problems experienced by the community. So it is not surprising when the community welcomes it with enthusiasm.

    3. Educational Innovation

    In the world of education, innovation also plays a role. One of them can be seen from the introduction of anti-corruption curriculum in schools. This is certainly started by the rampant corruption practices in Indonesia. With massive education through anti-corruption learning in schools, it is hoped that the corruption that occurs can be reduced. The new curriculum is the result of collaboration between the Ministry of Education and Culture and the KPK.

    4. Public Service Innovation

    Further there is innovation in the field of public service. There are many public services that are now easier to do since there are innovations in various fields. Like services that used to only be done manually, can now be done online.

    The emergence of technology provides opportunities for various public services to be done easily. Various services that require transactions can also be done without coming directly to the public service office. This changes the public’s view of bureaucracy which has been considered a scary specter.

    5. Health Innovation

    Further there is innovation in the field of health. In this field there are many things that can be done. Many new discoveries can improve public health. One of them is when the corona virus becomes a pandemic. He created the Peduli Lindungi application which aims to detect a person’s journey so that when there is an indication of covid, his whereabouts can be immediately known.

    6. Crowdfunding Innovation

    Innovation in the field of Crowdfunding is one of the innovations that moves in the social field. This innovation provides services in the form of appeals for funds directly to the community. An example is when someone is involved in a charity organization, such as an organization that rescues stray cats.

    In building an organization, of course, a lot of funds are needed. Especially to keep wild cats which are not small in number. So the organization can open donations or charities through various platforms such as Kitabisa.com, NUcare, and other digital platforms in order to get fundraising from donors out there. Well, this part of fundraising that can be done online has become a new innovation that is very beneficial for many people.

    7. Governance Innovation

    At number seven there is innovation in the field of government. There are many new ideas and ideas that have emerged in running the government. Especially innovations that emerge from various societal problems. The government certainly faces many challenges to solve the thousands of complaints and problems experienced by its people.

    Therefore, new thinking is needed to overcome these things. But of course there will be loopholes for the community to disagree with new innovations from the government. For example in the policy of making NPWP and SIM extension which can be done online.

    It turned out that it actually gave birth to very complicated rules and procedures. So when you want to apply an innovation in the field of government, it must be done carefully and requires a long enough process.

    8. Entrepreneurial Innovation

    Further there is innovation in the field of entrepreneurship. Well, in this field there are many types of innovation. Starting from the innovation of food products, clothing, boards, and various other products. In the field of entrepreneurship, the community has a wide opportunity to be able to produce more interesting and unique innovations than existing products.

    In the culinary or food business, for example, the types of snacks from the past, if they are made again with the innovation of a much better taste, will certainly sell well in the market. Especially now that there are a lot of foods from the past that are sold on the side of the road.

    This will certainly make the community want to return to nostalgia with old-time snacks that are now rare. For example, such as egg rolls, puthu cake, leker, and so on. In addition to old-time snacks, there are also many innovations in food products with instant packaging.

    Where people can make it themselves at home when they want without having to queue to buy it. Examples are instant meatballs, instant noodles, and various types of frozen food that are very easy to store. The food is also long-lasting and can be stored back in the fridge or freezer to be cooked again at another time.

     

  • Understanding Infrastructure: Types, Functions, Benefits, and Roles

    Understanding Infrastructure – To achieve success, of course we need a solid and strong infrastructure. Often times, we hear the term in our daily life. If you hear the term infrastructure, of course the first thing that comes to mind is buildings, facilities, and things related to development. \

    But, you need to know that in a business, infrastructure is also one of the important things that must be there. So, what is the role of infrastructure in running a business? What does infrastructure have to do with the business we will run?

    The question may appear in our minds when we hear the term infrastructure in a business. Because, we often think that infrastructure and business are two different things. But apparently, there is an understanding of business infrastructure. Well, to understand that, let’s discuss one by one about the two areas. The first step we will do is to know the meaning of infrastructure.

    Definition of Infrastructure

    What is the meaning of infrastructure in general? So, if viewed from the general understanding of infrastructure, the meaning is all basic structures and facilities, both physical and social, for example buildings, electricity supply, roads, and others that are needed for the operation of community and company activities.

    As for other opinions that reveal that infrastructure is all kinds of facilities needed by the general public in order to support various community activities in their daily lives. In other words, infrastructure is all facilities, whether physical or non-physical that are built by the government or individuals to meet the basic needs of society in the economic and social spheres.

    Generally, infrastructure refers to the physical development of public facilities, such as roads, ports, schools, hospitals, waste treatment, clean water, airports, and many more. In addition, infrastructure can also refer to technical matters such as supporting economic activities by providing modes of transportation, distribution of goods and services, etc.

    Understanding Infrastructure According to Experts

    In order to better understand the meaning of infrastructure, here are some opinions from experts about what infrastructure is.

    1. N. Gregory Mankiw

    The definition of infrastructure according to N. Gregory Mankiw in economics, which is a form of public capital or public capital consisting of bridges, public roads, sewer systems, and others as one of the investments made by the government.

    2. Neil S. Grigg

    The definition of infrastructure according to Neil S. Grigg is a physical system that provides means of irrigation, drainage, transportation, buildings, and physical facilities that are needed to be able to meet various basic human needs, both economic and social needs.

    3. Robert J. Kodoatie

    The understanding of infrastructure according to Robert J. Kodoatie is a system that supports the economic and social system which at the same time becomes an intermediary for the environmental system. Where the system can be used as one of the bases in making policies.

    Types of Infrastructure

    After understanding what infrastructure is reviewed from the definitions and opinions of experts. Now we will discuss the types of infrastructure to be able to have a more comprehensive discussion. Understanding any type of infrastructure can give us a more detailed explanation in understanding what infrastructure really is.

    If referring to the understanding of infrastructure as an asset in the form of physical or non-physical and can support the life of the community in general in social and economic terms. You also need to understand that infrastructure is also divided into several types. Here are some types of infrastructure that you need to understand:

    1. Hard Infrastructure

    The type of hard infrastructure is infrastructure that we can see in terms of its physical form in real form. Usually this type of infrastructure includes roads, ports, airports, irrigation canals, and other types of public facilities.

    2. Non-Physical Hard Infrastructure

    If according to the type of non-physical hard infrastructure, it includes various efforts made to support facilities and infrastructure in general that are useful to support various social and economic activities of the general public. For example, related to the procurement of clean water, telecommunication networks, and the provision of electricity supply, as well as efforts related to the procurement of energy supply sources.

    3. Software Infrastructure

    The type of soft infrastructure is all things that play a role in supporting the smooth running of various social and economic activities of the wider community. Where it is not visible in physical form and its existence is visible to the naked eye. Generally, it moves within a rule, system, and also norms provided by the government and other NGOs. For example, the application of good and correct work ethics, public services, regulations made by the government include laws that contain rules on commercial law and others.

    Infrastructure Components

    You need to understand that infrastructure also has several types of components in it. What is meant by the component in this case is included in the infrastructure itself. So, what kind of components are there in the infrastructure? The following is a complete explanation.

    When referring to the American Public Works Associations, the infrastructure component actually includes all types of public facilities that developed societies need in their daily lives. For example, the provision of clean water and its management or water treatment, the provision of flood control, waste water management systems, the provision of cross-water navigation facilities.

    In addition, there is also the development of transportation progress that includes public facilities in the form of water, air, and sea transportation. Then also various other supporting components for the advancement of the economic and social life of the community in general.

    If viewed from the policy regulations, infrastructure components are divided into three types of groups, namely:

    a. Infrastructure Components That Have Inputs

    The characteristics of this type of component focus on the type of infrastructure that can provide results or input for the economic and social conditions of the community. For example, the supply of clean water sources and electricity sources in the daily life of the community in general.

    b. Infrastructure Characteristics Components That Take Output

    The characteristics of this type of component focus on taking the output obtained from the activities of the general public. For example, garbage and waste disposal systems, drainage support systems or water channels, etc.

    c. Combined Infrastructure Components of Both

    The characteristics of this type of component usually focus on a combination of the two types of components above. Where this one component focuses on the process of giving and also taking something from the daily life of the community. For example, the use of telecommunication networks and others.

    Here the community will provide an input to be able to access infrastructure components that support the community’s social and economic activities. For example, community activities in paying a telephone bill. That way, the community will obtain output in the form of telecommunication network access as a support for their social and economic activities.

    Infrastructure Functions

    In fact, infrastructure functions as a support for the activities of the general public. Where infrastructure functions to facilitate and support the smooth running of social and economic activities of the community, such as the distribution of goods and services.

    The following are some examples of infrastructure along with its functions:

    a. A bridge serves as a link between one place and another. The place can be a region or a city.
    b. According to the function, the road is divided into several groups. Starting from local roads, arterial roads, collector roads, and neighborhood roads. For long-distance travel with a high average speed, usually use arterial roads. As for infrequent medium trips with medium average speed, usually use the collector road. Then for short distance travel with a low average speed usually use the surrounding road.
    c. The house functions as a place to live and a place to shelter and do various activities.

    Infrastructure Benefits

    Infrastructure turns out to have many benefits for us. Among them are benefits in the economic, social, and cultural fields. For benefits in the social field, infrastructure acts as a means of communication. If there is no infrastructure, then a region will be isolated and unable to communicate or socialize with other regions. Where the region is isolated, the network will be disconnected from the outer region. So that the life of the community in the area will be disrupted.

    Then the benefits of infrastructure in the economic field, namely as a means to carry out various buying and selling transactions. Not only that, the infrastructure also functions as a means of connection in the distribution of production and services. When the infrastructure runs smoothly, then all economic activities will also go smoothly. So that the community can live in peace and the economy of the community will also increase.

    Lastly, the benefits of infrastructure in the field of culture are beneficial to be one of the cultures themselves. For example, traditional houses. In that case, the infrastructure in the form of traditional houses is built in accordance with the culture that exists in that place.

    Impact of Infrastructure Development

    The impact of infrastructure development is that it can be a driving force for the economic growth of the community in general. On the other hand, economic growth can also be one of the pressures on infrastructure. So that positive economic growth can encourage an increase in the community’s need for various types of infrastructure. The role of infrastructure here is as a driving force in the economic sector and can be a driver for the development of related sectors as a multiplier. In the end, it will create a new business field and provide output derived from production as input for consumption.

    In an economic development will have an impact on the economic growth of the community and also the quality of life. Economic growth itself will influence investment. While improving the quality of life will influence the well-being of the community in general. Because, with the development of infrastructure can reduce poverty and unemployment in a country.

    As one of the supporters of community well-being in general and development investment, we do need various types of infrastructure. Starting from road network infrastructure, telecommunications network, electricity network, clean water, and others. There is an increase in the electricity sub-sector, the transportation sub-sector, the road sub-sector, and the communication sub-sector due to the increase in demand from each sub-sector. In addition, the increase in the sub-sector is balanced by the amount of infrastructure development investment in each of the sub-sectors.

    An example is the community’s need for electricity. Indonesia itself is experiencing problems in terms of electricity supply. Where the electricity supply cannot meet the needs of the community. Then it resulted in blackouts in various regions alternately. In fact, electricity is not only needed by private homes, but is also very needed in the industrial sector which will have an impact on the community’s economy as well. Therefore, the electricity network infrastructure is one of the components that is quite important in supporting community activities and is very influential on economic problems.

    The same goes for road network infrastructure development. Where road development is no less important than other infrastructure development. Because it is also needed as a connecting tool between one place and another. With road access that is easier to reach, it will influence the strategic elements of a place and the ease of access will influence many private parties who want to invest.

    With the presence of private parties that want to invest, it will affect the economic growth quite rapidly. Not only that, with the development of infrastructure such as the road network, it will provide benefits for the well-being of the community. Because, they are freed from the difficulties of communication networks and get various access facilities for the community itself.

    The telecommunications network also has an influence on the well-being of the community. One of the proofs is the existence of various types of private television stations until now. This proves that there is quite a lot of private investment in Indonesia, especially in the field of telecommunications. Especially in the era of globalization like now. Where telecommunication is very needed as one of the supporting tools for the success of a country. As we can see that the demand for telecommunication facilities is also increasing.

    Not only that, clean water facilities also have a very important and strategic role to improve the standard of living and also the level of society. In addition, the facility is also a driving factor for the well-being of the community in general. However, in its preparation both in terms of quality, quantity, and continuity, it has not been running continuously. On the other hand, the demand for clean water that is used as a health standard also continues to increase without being balanced by efforts to improve the quality of services.

    The Role of Infrastructure

    Infrastructure plays a very important role as one of the driving wheels for economic growth and development. The presence of adequate infrastructure is very necessary. Facilities and infrastructure in physical form or often referred to as infrastructure is a very important part of the community service system.

    Physical facilities are very vital to support various economic activities, government, industry, as well as social and economic activities of the community. Starting from road transportation, energy systems, school and office buildings, to telecommunication networks, clean water service networks, houses of worship, and others. All of that requires adequate infrastructure support.

    Based on the Medium Term Development Plan of Pacitan District from 2011 to 2016, district infrastructure becomes a strategic issue that is prioritized in development planning in the districts. The long-term development policy is a continuous improvement effort towards:

    1. Poverty alleviation
    2. Natural resource management
    3. Quality and accessibility of education and health
    4. Community access to facilities and public services
    5. Improvement of basic infrastructure development
    6. Community access to clean water
    7. Dealing with disaster prone areas

     

  • Meaning of Information Along with its Functions and Types

    Meaning of Information – Dear Reader, information technology makes it very easy for people to communicate and support their daily needs. With the development of information technology, it will be easier for a person to know information. In fact, the information obtained can only be obtained in a matter of minutes.

    Therefore, it is no longer strange that someone will know information that is far away or even information that comes from abroad. Information that can be obtained can be obtained through any media. As for the media that are commonly used to obtain information, such as social media, online news portals, and also video streaming.

    When talking about information technology or information itself, it cannot be separated from what is called data or data technology. In fact, it can be said that information technology and data are inseparable from each other. Even so, do you already know the meaning of information and data?

    Therefore, before discussing further the meaning of information, we will discuss the meaning of data according to the experts first.

    After that, we will discuss the meaning of information to the types of information. So, keep reading this article until it’s finished, Reader.

    Understanding Data For Members

    As explained before, we will discuss the meaning of data according to experts. The following are some members who explain the meaning of data.

    1. Data Interpretation For Azhar Susanto

    Data interpretation is the result of information processing. The information obtained shares the purpose and purpose of use specifically for the person who receives it.

    2. Data Interpretation For Barry E. Cushing

    Data interpretation is something that proves the result of a way of processing information. The result of working on the information is organized and useful or useful for the recipient.

    3. Data Interpretation For Burch & Strater

    According to Burch & Strater, data is a way of collecting and processing information aimed at sharing specific explanations or insights about something.

    4. Data Interpretation For Davis

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed. The work is tried so that the information becomes meaningful and useful for the recipient, good for the collection of decisions in this era or in the next era.

    5. Data Interpretation For Abdul Kadir, McFadden, et al

    Data is information that has been processed. The processing of the information is tried in such a way that the information that has been processed can increase the insight of the people who receive and use it.

    6. Interpretation of Data for Firmanzah

    According to Firmanzah, data interpretation is information and values ​​that have been given meaning and numbers.

    7. Data Interpretation For George R. Terry, D

    Data interpretation is meaningful information that can share useful or useful insights for the recipient.

    8. Data Interpretation For George H. Bodnar

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed, as a result the information can be used as a bottom or estimation material for quoting a decision that is appropriate for a certain matter.

    9. Data Interpretation For Gelinas and Dull

    Data interpretation is information presented in blank form. The information has benefits in making or collecting decisions.

    10. Data Interpretation For Jogiyanto HM

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed into a form that is more meaningful, beneficial or useful for the person who receives it. The result of the information processing describes a clear event ( fact ) that can be used to make or quote a decision.

    11. Data Interpretation For Robert N. Anthony & John Dearden

    Data interpretation is something that has a clear character, in the form of information or items that can be used to increase the insight and knowledge of the person who receives it.

    12. Data Interpretation For Raymond Mc. leod

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed, as a result it has a meaningful, useful, or beneficial existence for the person who receives it in the collection of decisions in this time or in the future.

    13. Data Interpretation For Romney and Steinbart

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed and organized, as a result it can share meaning or use for people who use it.

    14. Data Interpretation For Stephen A. Moscove & Mark Gram. Simkin

    Data interpretation is a clear entity, which has a useful number, as a result it can be used to quote decisions.

    15. Data Interpretation For Sutabri Rules, S. Kom.

    Data interpretation is information that has been classified, processed and interpreted with a mission so that it can be used in the collection of decisions.

    16. Data Interpretation For Drs. The Gie Hole

    Data interpretation is an explanation, arrangement of conversations, words, drawings, or other recorded features that have interpretations, thoughts, insights or the like. As a result, superiors of a group can use it to make appropriate decisions based on the available reality.

    17. Data Interpretation For Joner Hasugian

    Data interpretation is a plan, which is general in nature and on a large amount of baggage. This plan includes many details on each related scope, as well as recorded on several devices.

    18. Data Interpretation For Kenneth C. Laudon

    The interpretation of data is as energy that has been developed into a useful entity that can be used by people.

    19. Data Interpretation For Kusrini

    Data interpretation is information that has been processed into a meaningful entity for the person who uses it. The result of working on the information is useful for gathering accuracy or for supporting the database.

    20. Data Interpretation For Lani Sidharta

    Data interpretation is information that is presented in a more useful form, with the mission of making a decision.

    21. Data Interpretation For Mc Leod

    Data interpretation is information as information that has been processed into information that has meaning for the recipient.

    22. Data Interpretation For Robert Gram. Murdick

    Data interpretation consists of information that has been obtained after it has been processed or processed so that it can be used to explain, explain, explain, or be under estimation in making treachery or collecting decisions.

    23. Data Interpretation For Anggraeni and Irviani

    Data interpretation is a group of information or statements that are organized or processed with special methods, so that they have meaning for the acceptor.

    This management information system is very extensive, and every religious education will usually have a management information system. Likewise with Islamic education. Well, for those of you who want to find out more about management information systems, then you can read the Islamic Religious Education Management Information System book.

    Meaning of Information

    Etymologically, the interpretation of information originates from the Latin word ” informationem ” which means inspiration, outline or signal. Data can be presented in various forms ranging from notes, drawings, charts, charts, audio, films and others. In the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), information is the entire meaning that supports the mandate that is seen in the parts of the mandate.

    Information is a group of information or statements processed with a special method, so that it has or has meaning for the recipient of the information. Information that has been processed into something useful for the acceptor means that they can share explanations or insights.

    That way, the database is information. In addition, data can also be said to be an insight gained from teaching and learning activities, experience, or instruction. It can also be shown that the meaning of data is a group of information or statements that have been processed and arranged in such a way that it can become something that is easy to understand and share the benefits for the recipient.

    Observed from the meaning of the information, we can recognize that the meaning of data is different from the meaning of information. Information is a statement whose truth is not known for certain and has not been processed, then after being processed in a way, or processing so that it can become a useful data.

    However, not all information or statements can be processed into data by the recipient. In other words, not everyone receives well-processed information.

    Every information and electronic transaction that exists in Indonesia must have been given protection in the Law. For those of you who want to know more about the Law of Information and Electronic Transactions, then you can read the Law of Information and Electronic Transactions.

    Illustration and Identity of Information

    Data illustration is a document in Microsoft Excel, in the form of a spreadsheet and is often used to create a data from the information contained in it, such as profit information, and the balance sheet is a form of data and the value contained in it is information. Identity Information. The identity of quality data for Mcleod is:

    • Careful, meaning that the data can reflect the real conditions.
    • Relevant, meaning that the submitted data must match what is required.
    • Duration pass, meaning that the data must be available when needed.
    • Complete, which means that the data must be intact and non-responsible.

    Information function

    To understand more about information, then we also need to know the function of information. The following are some of the functions of information.

    1. To Add New Insights

    The valid information that a person gets can be the latest insight that can increase knowledge on specific aspects. For example, data on methods to deal with health problems obtained from content found on the internet. The data may be something that is common and has been understood by many. However, it could be that there is a person who does not know about the data.

    Therefore, the data is processed so that everyone can understand the information well. That way, misunderstandings in understanding information do not occur.

    2. As a News Base

    Information about a specific matter can be used as a base of information that is informed to the audience. The second function of information is that it can be used as a source of news. This is not without reason because the news itself contains a collection of information that has been processed and turned into a fact.

    3. Can Eliminate Uncertainty

    A lack of information can lead to uncertainty. As a result, to eliminate uncertainty, valid and complete data from a trusted base is needed.

    4. For Entertainment Devices

    Information can also act as an entertainment tool for the recipient. In this function, the recipient of the information can see it at tourist attractions or in museums.

    5. Influence the Audience

    In general, the delivery of information through mass media is attempted for the mission of influencing the audience. The purpose is for people to understand the product and be enticed to use the product.

    6. Make Penalization Policy

    Information is a significant part in carrying out communication with other parties. One of them is to deliver a wisdom from the ruler to the people who are tried with the method of carrying out imprisonment.

    7. Make a Mix of Opinions

    Nowadays, there are many people who use social media, so it is very easy to convey an opinion to the audience. That way, information can make other people’s opinions be well combined.

    Types of Information

    As already explained in the initial discussion if we will discuss about the types of information. The types of information itself can be further grouped into 4. Here is a complete explanation.

    1. Data Type Sourced on Its Nature

    Based on the character, the data types are divided into 3:

    a. Current

    Actual is data made based on reality and its truth can be proven.

    b. Plan

    Plans or views are data made based on one’s opinion about something.

    c. Story

    A story is data made in the form of a detailed description of something.

    2. Data Types Based on Functions and Uses

    The type of data is based on its function or benefits, among others.

    • Data that increases insight is data whose content can increase the latest insight for a person.
    • Sourced data in its presentation is data that is informed or served in some form, for example, posts, drawings, audio, films and others.

    3. Types of Data Sourced on Aspects of Life

    This type of data is made of several types, for example such as education data, health data, sports data, business data and others.

    4. Data Type Sourced at Event Position

    The interpretation of data sourced from the position of the incident is that the data is sourced from the position of an incident. This type of data is divided into 2 different types, which are national and domestic data as well as foreign data.

    From the discussion above it can be said that information and data are two things that cannot be separated even though they are different. So, when you want to make information, you should also pay attention to the data that will be taken.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of data and also the meaning of Information. Hopefully Reader when reading this article to the end, so it will be easier to determine good information and also information that does not provide benefits.

    1.  
  • Understanding Infiltration: Processes, Influencing Factors, and Benefits

    Infiltration Is – Do Reader often wonder why the rainwater that reaches the surface of the ground does not all flow to other places, but some is also absorbed into the ground? Yes, it turns out that simple things are very influential in maintaining the stability of the environment around us That is why, every region needs the existence of a suitable rainwater catchment area. The process of rainwater seeping into the soil surface is called infiltration, which turns out to be an important part of the hydrological process or water recycling on the face of the earth.

    This process of infiltration is often associated with the management of river basins (DAS) for several regions, especially in determining which areas should be used as seepage areas or built-up areas. So what exactly is infiltration? Is it just the process of seeping rainwater into the ground? How does this infiltration process happen? What about the relationship between infiltration and land use? Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following comments!

    Definition of Infiltration

    If you look at KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), the term “infiltration” is related to matters in the field of Soil Science which has a definition of ‘ inflow of water downwards into the soil ‘. In other words, infiltration is a process of rainwater entering the soil as a result of the capillary force as well as the gravitational force so that the water can enter the deeper soil. This infiltration can also be referred to as the way water moves into the soil through the cracks and pores of the soil and rocks to the surface of the ground water.

    This rainwater can move into the ground because of capillary action that has vertical or horizontal movement under the surface of the ground until finally the water successfully re-enters the surface water system. Meanwhile, with the influence of gravity, the rainwater will naturally enter the soil through the pores of the soil. The continuation of this process of infiltration is percolation.

    The infiltration rate will usually be expressed in the same units as the rainfall intensity units, namely millimeters per hour (mm/hour). The rate of water percolation is also influenced by several factors, namely:

    • Soil texture
    • Soil organic matter
    • Soil density
    • Type and amount of land

    As this infiltration is still an important part of the hydrological process, the infiltration water that cannot return to the atmosphere through the evapotranspiration process, will become groundwater to flow into the surrounding rivers. This infiltration process is also highly determined by time. In this case, there is also a term about “infiltration capacity”, which is the maximum infiltration rate for a certain type of soil. In the quantity of infiltration, this usually occurs when the intensity of rainwater exceeds the soil’s ability to absorb soil moisture. On the other hand, if the rainwater intensity is smaller than the infiltration capacity, then the infiltration rate will be the same as the rainfall rate.

    The rate of infiltration can of course be used in human daily life, starting from liquid waste disposal studies, evaluating the potential of septic tank land, washing and drainage efficiency, irrigation needs, water distribution and groundwater recharge, to anticipating channel or dam leaks.

    Well, so that Reader better understand the terms of this infiltration process, here is a brief description.

    1. Infiltration Capacity : That is the maximum infiltration speed, which depends on the nature of the soil surface.
    2. Infiltration Rate : That is, the actual infiltration rate, influenced by several factors ranging from the nature of the soil surface as well as the nature of the soil layer at the bottom.
    3. Percolation ( Percolation ): The speed of percolation determined by the nature of the existing soil.
    4. Field Capacity : The amount of maximum water content that can be held by the soil against the force of gravity.
    5. Soil Moisture Deficiency : The amount of water content that is still needed to bring the soil to Field Capacity .
    6. Initial Abstraction: The amount of interception and basin storage that must be filled first, before there is an overflow of rainwater.

    Process of Infiltration

    The process of infiltration begins when the rainwater has touched the soil surface, where some or all of the rainwater will definitely enter the soil through the pores of the soil surface. The process of rainwater entering the soil is caused by the pull of gravity and soil capillaries. The speed of the infiltration process will usually be influenced by the force of gravity and limited by the size of the diameter of the soil pores.

    On the other hand, the existence of a capillary style that drains the water will later make the water go vertically upwards, downwards, and horizontally. This soil capillary style works on soil that has small pores. Meanwhile, if on soil with large pores, the capillary force tends to have negligible influence so that water “prefers” to go inside with the influence of gravity. In the course of the water, it will later spread towards the edge as a result of being affected by the capillary force of the soil, especially towards the soil that has smaller pores.

    Well, this infiltration process will at least involve three processes that are not interdependent but still interrelated, namely in the form of:

    1. The process of rainwater entering through the pores of the soil surface.
    2. The storage of the rainwater in the ground.
    3. The process of water flowing to another place, either downwards, sideways, or upwards.

    Factors Affecting Infiltration

    Basically, the percolation of rainwater to the soil surface both vertically and horizontally is called infiltration. Meanwhile, the amount of water that goes through the infiltration process in a unit of time is called the infiltration rate.

    It should be known , Reader , that this infiltration process can change according to the intensity of rainfall. However, if the intensity of rainwater has reached its limit, then the amount of infiltration will continue according to the speed of absorption in each soil. Remembering that each soil has a different infiltration capacity, depending on the condition of the soil surface, soil structure, vegetation, and others. In addition to the intensity of rainfall, the infiltration process can also change due to the influence of air humidity and the air in the soil.

    Well, here are some internal and external factors that affect infiltration:

    1. The height of the water puddle above the soil surface and the thickness of the saturated soil layer.
    2. Water level or soil moisture.
    3. Soil compaction by rainfall.
    4. Clogging of soil pores by fine soil particles, for example sediments from clay particles.
    5. Soil compaction done by humans, animals, or a machine.
    6. Soil structure.
    7. The condition of plant roots, both active and dead roots.
    8. The proportion of air in the soil.
    9. Topography or land slope.
    10. Rainwater intensity.
    11. Roughness on the ground surface.
    12. The quality of the water that will go through the infiltration process.
    13. The temperature of the ground air and the surrounding air.
    14. Soil properties.

    Well, from those factors it can be categorized into two main factors namely:

    • Factors that influence water to stay in a place, so that the water gets the opportunity to go through the infiltration process ( opportunity time )
    • Factors that affect the process of water entering the soil.

    Specific Property Factors from the Soil

    Not only that , Reader , in addition to the factors that have been described, there are also special properties of the soil that are very influential in determining and limiting the infiltration capacity, namely:

    a) Pore size

    Previously, it was explained that the rate of rainwater entering the soil is determined by the size of the pores and the arrangement of the pores in the soil. Yes, large soil pores or macros are called aeration, which have a diameter large enough to allow water to escape quickly.

    b) Pore stability

    The capacity of the infiltration process can only be maintained when the porosity is all fixed and undisturbed during the time when there is no rain.

    c) Water Content

    The greatest infiltration rate can occur especially at low and moderate water content.

    d) Soil Profile

    The nature of the layers of a soil also determines the speed of rainwater entering the soil.

    Important Meaning of the Infiltration Process

    This infiltration process of course has several important meanings in other environmental ecosystem processes, namely:

    1. Runoff Process ( Run Off )

    It should be noted that the term “runoff” has a definition in the form of ‘the part of rainfall that appears to flow in rivers or artificial channels on the surface of the land’. Well, the power of infiltration really determines the amount of rainwater that can be absorbed into the soil. The greater the infiltration power, then the difference between the intensity of rainwater and the infiltration power also becomes smaller. As a result, the runoff on the surface will also be smaller, so the peak discharge will be smaller.

    2. Replenishment of Soil Moisture and Ground Water

    The term “langas” means ‘ containing water or moist ‘, so this soil langas can be interpreted as a condition of soil that is moist and contains water. Well, the effort to make the soil in wet conditions and filling the soil with water is of course important for agricultural purposes.

    Benefits of the Infiltration Process for Human Life

    The existence of this infiltration process turns out to be useful for human survival and is often used as the main discussion in learning environmental geography and water management. Well, here are some of the benefits of the infiltration process for human life.

    1. Maintaining Ecosystem Stability

    The benefits can certainly be felt because remembering the infiltration process is an important part of the hydrological and biogeochemical cycle. Just imagine, if this infiltration process “disappears” from the hydrological cycle, then the water recycling chain on the face of the earth will be disrupted, right? So that it will have an impact on the capacity of water as a basic need for all living things.

    2. Water Conservation Study and River Basin District (DAS)

    The existence of the infiltration process is greatly used by humans to determine which areas can be used as seepage and built-up areas, especially when building new residential areas.

    3. Groundwater and Aquifer Water Research

    Since this infiltration process is an important part of the hydrological cycle as well as a method of replenishing groundwater on the surface of the earth, its existence must be studied by research.

    4. Preventing Runoff Flooding

    The infiltration process can be applied by humans, especially when planning water seepage areas and built-up areas. It must be planned in detail so that the potential for flooding, especially due to rain runoff, is lower.

    Infiltration Rate Measurement

    The infiltration rate process can be measured using various tools and of course by applying a special formula. Well, here are some ways to measure infiltration rate.

    1. Using the Infiltrometer

    The infiltrometer in its simplest form consists of a fertilizer tube pressed into the soil. Later, the surface of the soil in the tube will be filled with water. The water level in the tube will decrease due to the infiltration process. Then, the amount of water added to maintain the water level in the tube should also be measured.

    The smaller the diameter of the tube, the greater the disturbance due to the side flow under the tube. Through this method, the infiltration process can be calculated based on the amount of water added to the inner tube per unit of time.

    2. Using Test Plots

    Measuring the infiltration rate using an infiltrometer is known to only be possible in a small area, so it will be difficult to draw conclusions about the magnitude of the infiltration force in a wider area. Therefore, another option is to use a test plot.

    The use of test plots can be applied to flat land surrounded by embankments and flooded with water. The rate of infiltration will later be obtained from the amount of water that has been added so that the surface becomes constant. So, it can be concluded that the plot test tool is a form of infiltrometer that has a larger scale.

    3. Using a Lysimeter

    This lysimeter device is in the form of a concrete tank planted in the ground, then filled with the same soil and plants as the surrounding area. In addition, this lysimeter should also be equipped with drainage and water supply facilities.

    The use of the lysimeter will use the water balance equation as follows:

    P + I = D + ES …………………….. (2.18)

    Description:

    I = water supply

    D = water removed

    E = evaporation (evapotranspiration)

    S = water reservoir in the ground

    Influence of Texture or Soil Form on Infiltration Rate

    Does Reader realize that the texture or shape of the soil also affects the rate of infiltration? Yes, especially on the number and size of the pores on the skin. The larger the pores of the soil, the greater the rate of infiltration. Based on the size of the pores, there are clays that have a lot of fine pores and there are clays that have a few large pores. But on the other hand, sandy soil actually contains many large pores and few fine pores. Well, thus it can be concluded that the rate of infiltration in sandy soil is much greater than in clay soil.

    Soils that have a rough texture can create a light soil structure. But on the other hand, soils that have a fine soil texture can cause the formation of the soil that has a heavy structure.

    Well, that’s a review of what infiltration is and how the process of infiltration is the main part of the hydrological cycle. Did Reader ever play on the dirt when it rained as a child?

    •  
  • Definition of Infaq: Types, and Differences of Infaq with Charity, Zakat, and Waqf

    Infaq is – There are various practices in Islam that are also closely related to giving money or other property. One of them is infaq. Then what is meant by infaq. Islam has the concept that the universe and all its contents belong to Allah SWT, including those that are the property of humans. That is, for every property owned by a person, there are other people’s rights in it as well.

    The basis of the law of infaq itself has been explained in the Qur’an in Surat Adz-Dzariyat in verse 19 which states: “And in every property of theirs there is also the right of the poor who ask and the poor who do not get a share.” In addition, Surat Al Baqarah verse 245 also provides guidance for every Muslim to do infaq.

    The meaning of the word itself reads: “Whoever wants to give a loan to God, a good loan (that is to spend his wealth in the way of God), then God will then multiply the payment to him by multiplying it as well. And God will narrow and widen (provision) and to Him you will then be returned.”

    Meaning of Infaq

    Infaq is actually taken from the word anfaqa-yunfiqu which means to finance or spend. Meanwhile, according to KBBI or the Big Indonesian Dictionary, infaq is an effort to release property which includes non-zakat and zakat.

    In contrast to Sharia terminology, infaq is to withdraw part of the property, earnings or income owned for an interest that is then ordered in an Islamic teaching.

    So, infaq can also be defined as an effort to carry out the command of Allah SWT by spending wealth with the purpose of doing good. Thus, infaq is actually different from charity.

    Because, infaq does not recognize nisab and the amount of property determined based on the law. The gift of this property also does not have to be given to a certain mustahik, but can also be given to anyone known or unknown.

    For example, infaq can be given to the elderly, the indigent, relatives, orphans, or even to those who are on a journey. So, giving property is a voluntary activity.

    Types of Infaq and Examples

    Mandatory Infaq

    Being one of the types of Infaq in Islam, namely Mandatory Infaq as an infaq that must be issued by someone. If this infak is not released by a person, then he will then earn dosa. Therefore, if you have an obligation to spend, then do it.

    Because, as Muslims who are still given the opportunity to breathe fresh air every day, you should do what you should, below are some examples of obligatory infaq.

    Paying Dowry

    One example of obligatory infaq is paying dowry. Dowry is property that must be handed over by a husband to his wife for the marriage contract. However, it should be understood that there is no provision related to the minimum dowry.

    Dowry is actually not the main purpose of a marriage and its nominal standardization must also be in accordance with the conditions of each party. For information, there is a recommended dowry which is no less than 10 dirhams and no more than 500 dirhams. One dirham is equivalent to 2,975 grams of silver.

    Atonement

    Kafarat is a fine that must be paid by someone for violating the law or the provisions of Allah SWT. The amount of atonement itself depends on the type of offense a person has committed.

    Then, the recipient of this infak can also mean anyone. It can even be from family or other relatives who are in need. It is highly recommended to have an obligation like this, so you should immediately pay it.

    Providing for the Family

    Another example of the type of obligatory infak is providing sustenance to the family. For example, a husband who is obligated to provide for his wife and family. This is an obligation from the husband to the wife. Later there will also be a greater reward for him.

    Infaq Sunnah

    In addition to mandatory infaq, in Islam there is also sunnah infaq. This infak itself is an infak that is done with the purpose of giving charity in the way of Allah SWT. Therefore, charity in the form of wealth can then be said to be infaq sunnah.

    Anyone who has enough wealth can then do infaq sunnah. So, it can be said that there are actually so many practices that can be done to be able to reap as many rewards as possible. Infak sunnah itself consists of two types, namely:

    Infak Jihad

    Infak jihad as an infak given to someone or a group of people who want to fight in the path of Allah SWT. For example, when you give part of your property to those who are fighting for Palestine.

    This fact will certainly provide many benefits. Not only from the recipient’s side, but also from the giver’s side. In addition, it can also ease the burden of the recipient, this infak can also give a great reward to the giver of the infak.

    Infak to Help Others

    Infak will help others, of course, aiming to then lighten the burden of others. Similar to infaq jihad, this infaq can then be given to anyone in need.

    Not only covering the needs of jihad, the giver of infaq can also give his wealth to the people around him. Make sure all these things are done because and for Allah SWT. Don’t get caught up in wanting to be admired by many people when spending money.

    Infak Mubah

    The next type of infaq is mubah infaq. This type of infaq as an infaq is freely done but doing it will not make someone get a reward. Then, for those who do not do it, they will not reap sins. So, this infak is actually done for things that have the law of mubah.

    For example, when a person gives his property for farming, trading or farming. This kind of thing is certainly not a mandatory thing to do. However, it is legal for someone to do it. There is no prohibition for those who want to do mubah infaq.

    In addition to not getting a reward for those who do it, there will also be no sin for those who don’t do it. Everything is done with the intention of Allah SWT. Because, if it wasn’t because of Allah SWT, of course this law of infaq would later change into illegal infaq. Really this is the type of infak that should be avoided.

    Infak Haram

    Infak haram are types of infak that are strictly prohibited by Islamic teachings. Therefore do not do this infak. Illegal spending is spending in the form of property to other people insincerely or not for the sake of Allah SWT.

    Anyone who then spends with the intention of only wanting to be praised or get a reward from others, then the law is unlawful. Don’t do things like this. The act of illegal infaq will also reflect the riya behavior of those who do it.

    This behavior is truly cursed by Allah SWT and is also categorized as a hypocrite. There is even a reward given in the afterlife that will be very painful. The reward that should be reaped because of infak will actually be eliminated because of this riya behavior.

    Indeed, those who commit illegal spending will suffer greatly not only in the afterlife but also in this world. May all Muslims then be able to avoid things like this well. The type of endowment itself has various types, ranging from obligatory endowment, sunnah, permitted endowment, and haram.

    The difference between Infaq, Sadaqah, Zakat, and Waqf

    To understand the difference between infaq, almsgiving, zakat, and waqf, pay attention to each definition and the following examples of the differences between zakat, infaq, and almsgiving that you need to know:

    Charity

    Charity includes everything that one person gives to another person with the sincere intention of seeking pleasure and reward from God. The form itself is free, including the time and rate are also not bound. Charity includes giving in the form of material things such as money, property, etc. also in the form of good deeds or services.

    Infaq

    The scope of charity itself is broad, while the scope of infaq is more limited to the aspect of using or spending property for good purposes. Infaq as a charity in the form of property which is then given out with the sole intention of hoping for God’s pleasure. There is no stipulation of rate or time infaq is paid. So, every Muslim can spend anywhere, anytime, and in any amount.

    For example, infaq to go to Hajj, Umrah, and support the family, also to pay zakat, put money in the charity box of the mosque, feed the poor and orphans, give donations to people who have been hit by calamities or various disasters, and so on. .

    Zakat

    Zakat is one of the pillars of Islam and must be paid if a Muslim has fulfilled the various conditions of obligatory zakat. Because the law of zakat is actually obligatory, then all aspects of its implementation have been regulated in detail by the Sharia. If there are rules that are not followed there will be consequences, the zakat that is then paid is considered invalid and must be repeated.

    Some scholars also state that zakat is an obligatory charity that is taken from certain assets such as gold, silver (or savings), and livestock that have then met a certain amount. In addition, zakat must also be given to the eight groups who are entitled to receive it (al-ashnaf ats-tsaniyah) and be paid within a certain period of time.

    endowment

    Waqf According to jurisprudents, it is included in one of the practices of property charity which is done permanently by freezing its use or tasaruf for things allowed in the Sharia. In short, waqf is charity in the form of assets.

    For example, land, wells, houses or buildings, hospitals, mosques, and other public buildings that are productive. Assets from this waqf itself cannot be reduced in value and must be able to be developed according to sharia or according to the principles in Islam.

     

  • Understanding Creative Industries: Types, Examples & Government Policies

    Creative Industry – Every human being is blessed with their own creativity. However, not everyone can develop it into a real work that will be useful for other communities. Therefore, the creative industry is present to be a container for people who have brilliant ideas and ideas to be able to cultivate their creativity.

    A person’s creativity should be used to create well-being and open employment. With human resources that are utilized in the right way, the creative industry is expected to be able to produce a work without exploiting abundant natural resources.

    To find out in more detail what the creative industry is, see the explanation of the meaning of the creative industry, its types, examples, benefits, and various government policies that regulate it below.

    Meaning of Creative Industry

    The definition of creative industry in general is all processes of creation, creativity, ideas, and ideas from a person or group that can then produce works or products afterwards. The creative industry itself is a combination of two words, namely industry and creative. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, industry is the activity of processing or processing goods using facilities and equipment, while creative is an adjective that reflects that a person or related group has creativity and the ability to create.

    The creativity produced by that person or group is expected to help economic growth as well as open up new employment opportunities for communities in need. Therefore, the creative industry is an important field that must continue to be developed as time goes by and must be developed together in its development because it is one of the mainstays of the country’s economy.

    The Meaning of the Creative Industry According to the Experts

    According to Simatupang, the creative industry is an industry that relies on skills, talent and creativity that have the potential to improve well-being.

    According to the Indonesian Ministry of Trade in 2009, the creative industry is an industry that originates from the utilization of skills, creativity, and talents possessed by individuals in creating well-being and employment. This industry will focus on empowering the creativity and creativity of an individual.

    According to the UK DCM Task Force: 1998, the creative industry is an industry that originates from the creativity of individuals who are potentially capable of creating wealth and employment through the exploitation and generation of the individual’s creativity and intellectual wealth.

    According to Howkins, the creative industry is an industry that has superior characteristics in terms of creativity in producing or creating various creative designs that are attached to the goods or services produced.

    Types of Creative Industries

    In Indonesia, the creative industry itself is divided into 14 types of sectors that can be categorized as forms of creativity produced to grow the economy. Here are the types of creative industries that grow the community’s economy.

    1. Architecture

    Architecture is one type of creative industry related to the planning and design of building construction. The field of creative industry in the type of architecture also produces products in the form of buildings and properties that can be of high value.

    2. Advertising

    Advertising is one type of creative industry in which there are many human resources in the form of creative young people. The advertising industry also has a big role to help the nation’s economy because of its nature of promoting a product and service to a wide audience.

    3. Film, Photography, or Video

    The type of creative industry in the field of film, photography, and video is one of the sectors with great potential in the growth of the national economy. This field is included in the category of creative industries because the process in film or photography or video production starts from gathering ideas and initial creativity.

    4. Music

    Music is one type of creative industry that is used by artists as a way to express feelings. The field of music can be categorized as a creative industry because in the process of music composition, there are many processes that must be supported by ideas and creativity.

    5. Television and Radio

    The field of television and radio is a creative activity that contains various production processes with various creations. One example of television and radio is the provision of TV broadcasts and radio broadcasts that serve to educate and entertain the audience.

    6. Art and culture market

    The art and culture market is one type of creative industry that accommodates art activists and artists who produce their works through a qualified cultural and creative background. The art and culture market produces many works that convey emotional messages that are close to society.

    7. Craft

    Crafting is one type of creative industry that has become a community culture in every region. The production process in producing crafts is supported by various raw materials found in the surrounding environment, for example such as bamboo, wood, clay, stone, metal, and others.

    8. Fashion

    Fashion is one type of creative industry that will always grow and change as time goes on. This happens because fashion creators or designers create various fashion trends by adapting them to the conditions that are happening.

    9. Design

    Design is one type of creative industry that is closely related to creative activities such as graphic design, interior design, and product design. Designers in the creative industry are those who have creative ideas to always create something.

    10. Interactive Games

    Interactive games are one type of creative industry that produces computer and video games that both entertain and educate the public. This interactive game is closely related to the availability of the internet network, so this sector needs the support of informatics technology.

    11. Computer and Software Services

    The field of computer and software services is an activity related to information technology. The creative activities in it include computer services, software development, and system analysis.

    12. Performing Arts

    Some forms of performing arts include theater, dance performances, musical dramas, and puppet shows. Performance art in the creative industry itself is closely related to the culture of the community. Some examples of this performance art can not only be a source of income for artists, but also one of the ways to preserve culture.

    13. Publishing and Printing

    The creative industry in the field of publishing and printing produces many products or works in written form such as books, magazines, newspapers, invitations, and so on. However, along with the development of technology, many creators have begun to refer to written works in digital form, such as e-books, blogs, and websites .

    14. Research and Development

    The field of research and development is a creative activity that is closely related to various efforts in creating the discovery of science and technology for the application of science and knowledge.

    Research itself is systematic, critical, and scientific research into a problem to improve knowledge, while the development in question is science and technology that uses its functions and benefits to produce new technology.

    The fourteen types of industries that have been mentioned above belong to the creative industry. This is because they all need creativity in carrying out their respective processes, as well as producing new ideas in each product. The products that are produced then become a work that has different selling values.

    Examples of Creative Industries

    The creative industry or the field of business where all activities that produce a work also have several examples of works produced. Some works from the creative industry are easy to find in everyday life. Here is an example of a creative industry.

    1. Production of batik fabric

    Batik is one of the traditional fabrics of Indonesian origin that is already known by many countries and its existence is worldwide. In the production of batik fabric, of course there are many processes that must be gone through. The production process of batik fabric until it becomes a ready-to-market product certainly requires a lot of patience and creativity.

    2. Filmmaking process

    The process of making a film is quite a long stage, from creating an idea, making a story, writing a script, recording, editing, until finally a film can be shown to the audience. The product produced in the form of a film is the fruit of the creativity of the parties involved in each process.

    3. Performance of wayang or drama

    A puppet show is a traditional drama show that features a puppet show based on the background of each character’s story, while the theatrical performance is a variety of arts in the form of drama, dance, and music with various stories as the background. Both are examples of creative industries that are thick with Indonesian culture.

    4. Book printing

    Book printing is one example of a creative industry where the production process involves mass production of writing and images. Products produced in the field of book printing are not only books, but also brochures, flyers, magazines, invitations, etc.

    5. Fashion show

    A fashion show is an activity or event that is usually held by fashion designers to show and introduce their works to the general public. The fashion show process is one of the activities that requires creativity because it involves many parties, starting from fashion designers, models, fashion product providers to fashion support.

    6. Content creators

    Content creator is one of the most sought after jobs and is almost always needed in every sector of the creative industry. A content creator is tasked with creating various content materials in the form of writing, images, videos, even sound or a combination of them. In going through every process of becoming a content creator, a lot of creativity and brilliant ideas are needed.

    Benefits of Creative Industries

    The creative industry is one of the fields that support the country’s economy. The creative industry in Indonesia also not only has diverse types, but also has a myriad of benefits for society and the country.

    The main benefit of the creative industry is to foster creativity and innovation from every businessperson. This is also supported by the state of Indonesia with a lot of human resources, especially in the productive working age.

    As a means of supporting the country’s economy, the creative industry is also getting more and more attention from the country. The creative industry is also expected to be one of the biggest areas to develop the industry today.

    Because of the importance of the existence of this creative industry, it is not possible to depend on the number of sectors on nature. Bearing in mind that natural resources are limited in nature, Indonesia must also take the right steps and actions in developing the creative industry without reducing the natural resources that are getting thinner day by day.

    Government Policy Regarding the Creative Industry

    The importance of the existence of the creative industry makes the government issue some mandatory policies to make the creative industry continue to develop well. Here are some government policies to improve the creative industry in Indonesia.

    1. Integrating Assets and Potentials

    The first government policy in the field of creative industries is to integrate assets and the potential of creativity development. Maximized asset management can be a source of capital in this creative industry. By integrating the assets and potential of a person’s creativity, the community will always jump in directly and compete to produce their creativity.

    2. Encourage Innovation and Creativity

    Excellent ideas and innovations should be supported by the government in the form of providing capital and facilities to realize the creativity. Because of this, business activists will continue to be encouraged to create innovations with various creativity to produce something.

    These ideas often invite competition between business partners. However, it is also what makes society more motivated to create innovations that are out of the box .

    3. Forming Bekraf (Creative Economy Agency)

    Forming a Creative Economy Agency or commonly referred to as bekraf is one of the government’s efforts to strengthen the creative industry.

    Bekraf is one of the institutions formed by the president with the aim of providing a container or facility for people who have ideas and creativity to be realized. The existence of the Bekraf institution can also encourage the community to continue producing new innovations until it becomes a masterpiece.

    This institution is also one form of government policy that can improve the country’s economy because it presents fresh ideas.

    4. Regulating and Supporting Creativity

    Regulating and supporting the creativity of the nation’s children is one of the government’s obligations. Creativity should be regulated and supported, one of the ways is to provide copyright protection to creators, innovators, and business people.

    This is because a person’s creativity is an economic commodity that can be bought and sold. Without regulation and support from the government, creativity can be lost and change hands due to its unrealized form.

    In Indonesia itself, there are already regulations with the formation of copyright and intellectual rights protection laws.

    Conclusion

    After knowing various things related to the creative industry, it can be concluded that exploring the ideas and creativity of each individual is important. That is because human resources with creative ideas are needed to be able to carry out all production processes in the creative industry sectors.

    As dynamic individuals, we are required to be able to explore ideas without limits, the article is that this creative industry will continue to grow with the times and must still be supported by the presence of compatible human resources.

    In accordance with the content of the explanation above, you can find out briefly what is the meaning of the creative industry, its types, examples, benefits, and various government policies to improve the quality of the industry.

    For those of you who are interested in developing a creative industry and dabbling in that world, you can do many useful things to be able to run your own technology and business. It can be started by learning many theoretical things.

    You can visit various websites to read various scientific journals about the creative industry or even visit the official website www.Sinaumedia.com to find various references through books related to the creative industry.

    1.  
  • Definition of Industry, Types, Examples, and Purpose

    Knowing the Definition of Industry, Types, Examples, and Purpose – Knowing the current industry sector as one of the business sectors that is the benchmark for development in a country is very interesting to know. Because with the development of an industry, it certainly also develops the economy and growth of a country and provides the opening of many job opportunities for citizens.

    In general, industry is known as an economic activity that processes raw materials, raw materials, semi-finished goods or finished goods into high-quality goods for specific purposes, including industrial planning and engineering.

    Industry is part of the production process. Industrial materials are taken directly or indirectly and then processed to produce goods that are more valuable to the community. The activity of the production process in an industry is called an industry.

    If you look at the definition in general, industry can be interpreted very broadly and includes all human activities in the economic field that are productive and commercial. Because it is a vast industry, the amount and type of industry varies from one country to another country or region.

    The higher the level of industrial development of a country or region, the greater the amount and type of industry and the more complex its operations.

    Economically, the concept of industrialization is also defined as a group of similar businesses, where the word industry is combined with a word that describes the type of industry. The rest is for example the pharmaceutical industry, the clothing industry, the wood industry, etc.

    For that, in order to make it easier for Reader friends who want to get to know and understand more about the definition of industry in this discussion, we have summarized the definition of the complete industry along with its type, sector, and purpose in development.

    Further, we have presented the discussion below!

    Early History of Industry

    Before further discussing the definition of the industry along with its types, sectors, and development goals, it is good that we also know about the early history of the industry itself. For that reason, we have presented a discussion about the history of the industry below.

    This industry began with the work of a craftsman or craftsman. In ancient times, after living as nomads as gatherers, hunters, and fishermen, people lived permanently, building houses and cultivating the land through farming, gardening, and raising livestock. Their needs are increasing for things like harvesting tools, hunting tools, fishing tools, agricultural tools, gardening tools, mining tools, even military and economic tools. Artisans and artisans emerged as a source of necessary tools and goods. From there, handicrafts and carpentry began to develop, producing basic necessities. To grow into good craftsmen and workers, the apprenticeship model is maintained and to maintain the quality of workmanship and in the carpentry industry,

    Iron and steel mining flourished in the Middle Ages. In addition, the extraction of fuels such as coal, oil and gas is growing rapidly. These two things accelerated the development of mechanical technology, starting with the invention of the steam engine, which opened the way for large-scale production and trade of goods, and the mass in the late 18th and early 19th centuries in the cities of Lille and Manchester) and the railway, then steel industry (Essen) and shipbuilding, automobile industry (Detroit), aluminum factory. The chemical and pharmaceutical industries grew from the need for dyes in textile factories. From here the industrial revolution happened.

    Since then, the wave of industrialization, such as the mass production of goods and the establishment of factories involving the use of labor, quickly swept the world, replacing traditional agriculture (agriculture). Since then, various industry classifications have emerged.

    Industry Definition

    Most people think that industry is just a human economic activity that processes raw materials into semi-finished or finished materials. Although the meaning of industry is very broad, this industrial process includes all human activities in certain fields that are productive and commercial in nature. The word industry comes from the Old French word “industria” which means activity, but the word mainly comes from the Latin word “Industria” which means craft and activity.

    Broadly speaking, industry is a field of business that produces workforce skills and technology to produce a product for profit. Industrial products are not only in the form of goods (production) but also in the form of services (services), for example production results such as services such as banking, insurance, transportation, shipping services, etc.

    Industry is synonymous with the place where industry takes place, namely the factory, in a broader sense the factory is where people, machines or technology, materials, energy, capital and resources are managed in a unified production system. produce effective, efficient, and safe products and services that are ready for general use or that can be further processed to make other types of products. Factory is synonymous with processing raw materials and making finished products in the form of goods.

    The service industry is an industry that provides services to serve or support other industrial activities and can also provide direct services to the community (customers). This type of industry usually operates in buildings (offices).

    Industry is a sector or economic activity related to the processing/production of raw materials in a factory that uses skills and labor or the manufacture of finished goods (in industrial English) and the use of tools in the field of processing agricultural products and their distribution as the main activity. So industry is generally known as the next link in the business chain after agriculture, plantation and mining, which is closely related to the land, which fulfills the needs of the land (economics). The position of the industry is further away from the earth which is the basis of economy, culture and politics. Industry is part of the production process and industrial production process activities are called industrial.

    Industry can also be interpreted as a group of various companies that offer the same product. In other words, each product is a substitute for another because the company uses the same inputs and faces more or less the same suppliers and buyers.

    Types of Industries

    To find out what different types of industries are available below, we have presented a variety of different types of industries according to their fields.

    Industrial products can be in the form of processed food, textiles, cosmetics and others. And now we can enjoy various services from the industry sector

    The following types of industries are found in Indonesia:

    • Primary industry

    Primary industry focuses on the production of goods with the help of nature. This is a nature-based industry that requires little human effort. For example, agriculture, plantations, forestry, fisheries, horticulture, etc. as examples of non-mining industries.

    • Extractive Industries

    Extractive Industry includes the extraction or re-production of goods from land, air or water. In general, the products of the mining industry are in raw form, and the industry is used in the field of manufacturing and construction which is used to make finished products. For example, mining, coal, petroleum, iron ore, extraction of wood and rubber from forests, etc.

    • Secondary industry

    This industry is engaged in the reproduction and marketing of certain vegetable and animal spices. The main purpose is to make a profit from the sale. For example seeding, cattle rearing, poultry farming, mammal farming etc.

    • Construction industry

    The construction industry carries out construction work on buildings, bridges, roads, dams, canals, etc. This industry is different from other industries because the products of other industries can be produced in one place and sold in another place. But the goods produced and sold by the construction industry are assembled in one place.

    • Manufacturing industry

    The manufacturing industry deals with the transformation of raw materials into finished products with the help of machines and manpower. Finished goods can be consumables or commodities. For example, the textile, chemical, sugar, paper industry, etc.

    • Quaternary Industry

    Industries that use high technology. The people who work in these companies are often highly qualified in their field. Research and development companies are the most common businesses in this sector, an example of a secondary industry.

    • Service industry

    Currently, the service sector plays an important role in the development of the country and that is why it is called the service sector. The main industries in this category are the hospitality industry, tourism industry, entertainment industry etc.

    • Creative Industry

    The definition of creative industry in general is all processes of creation, creativity, ideas and ideas of a person or group that can later produce works or products. The creative industry itself is a combination of two words namely industry and creative. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary, industry refers to the processing or management of goods using facilities and equipment, while creative is an adjective that reflects that the person or group concerned has creativity and the ability to create.

    The creativity created by a person or group further encourages economic growth and can open new jobs for those in need. Therefore, the creative economy is an important sector that must be developed from time to time and grow together, because it is one of the pillars of the country’s economy.

    Industry Examples from Various Fields

    • Agro Industry

    The following industries are activities that use agricultural products as raw materials, design and produce equipment and services for these activities. Austin (1981) specifically defines agribusiness as a business that processes plant (derived from plants) or animal (derived from animals) materials. The process used includes transformation and preservation with physical or chemical treatment, storage, packaging and distribution. This agricultural product can be in the form of ready-to-use consumer end products or other industrial raw materials.

    • Mining

    This one industry is one of the pillars of the country’s economic development. This industry is driven by mining companies that manage natural resources (SDA) that are used for the development and well-being of the Indonesian people. Mining is any or all stages of activities related to the exploration, processing and use of minerals or coal, including general surveys, geographic surveys, construction feasibility studies, mining, processing and processing, transportation and sales, and mining operations. activity.

    • Farming

    Livestock is part of food production agriculture. Food from the food industry is a producer of animal protein with high nutritional value such as meat, eggs and milk.

    Farming is the care and maintenance of domestic animals, with which profit and income are obtained from this activity. Animals that are bred a lot are cows and chickens. goats, sheep and pigs. Livestock products include meat, milk, eggs, and clothing.

    • Handicrafts

    Crafts are one of the types of creative industries that have become a community culture in every district. The craft production process is supported by various raw materials available in the environment such as bamboo, wood, clay, stone, metal, etc.

    The handicrafts sold at this cultural art market are one of the types of creative economy that involve art activists and artists who produce works with a qualified cultural and creative background. The art and culture market produces many works that convey an emotional message close to the community.

    • Tourism

    The definition of the tourism industry is a branch of the economy that consists of all businesses that provide products and services intended for use by tourists in various levels of travel and tourism. Tourism is a very broad and growth-oriented industry.

    According to Tourism Law No. 10 of 2009, the tourism industry is a group of related tourism businesses that produce goods and/or services to meet the needs of tourists in the pursuit of tourism.

    The purpose of tourism is to increase mainly currency income and the income of the country and society in general. Expand opportunities and work opportunities and encourage the operation of supporting industries and other supporting industries. Apart from that, tourism is also able to introduce and present the natural beauty and culture of Indonesia.

    Purpose of Industrial Development

    The government explained that Indonesia will continue to develop the industrial sector for smooth development. The understanding of industrial development is one part of the country’s economic development that applies several principles of sustainable industrial development. This development is based on economic, social and environmental development.

    Article 2 of the Industrial Law contains an explanation of the principles and objectives of industrial development. Industrial development also takes place by believing in one’s own abilities and strengths, superiority and environmental sustainability.

    The government has announced several goals for the development of the industry. These objectives include:

    • Making well-being more equal

    The utilization of natural resources and/or agricultural products for industrial activities must be able to provide fair and equitable results for human well-being while still paying attention to the balance and sustainability of the living environment.

    • Increase economic growth

    The structure of the economy must be changed in a better, more advanced, healthier, and more balanced direction. Everything is done to create a stronger and broader base for economic growth in general and provide added value for industrial growth in particular.

    • Appropriate Technology Management

    The ability to master this technology is very important because it can increase confidence in the ability of the country’s business world.

    • Strengthening community participation

    In this case, an example is a small industry or home industry in which there is a role of the lower class community.

    • Equal Employment Opportunity

    With many open industries, it automatically opens up more jobs for those in need.

    • Foreign exchange earnings growth

    It is hoped that all forms of industry that exist will help bring in large amounts of foreign exchange for the national economy.

    • Development of industrial growth centers

    Areas that have the potential to be developed into industrial centers should be immediately developed with good and accurate methods.

    • The creation of national stability and a strong defense

    With the growth of industry and general prosperity, the strengthening of the defense and security sector becomes easy.

    Conclusion

    So much for a short discussion about definitions from Industry, Types, Examples and Purpose. Not only discussing the definition, but also discussing the history and development of the industry up to now. Understanding the definition of the industry itself gives us the understanding that there are many industrial sectors that we can know and provide many job opportunities according to our interests and abilities in one of the industries

  • The Understanding of Taklifi Law and the Various Types of Laws There Are!

    The meaning of taqlifi law – Hello Reader friends, do you know Islamic law? In terms of terminology (terms), Islamic law is God’s teachings about mukallaf in the form of requests (orders, prohibitions), recommendations to do or recommendations to leave or takhyir (the ability to choose between what should be done or what should not be done), or wad’i ( set something as a cause, condition, or obstacle).

    If the meaning of law is relevant to Islam, then Islamic law is a set of rules from God’s revelation and the Prophet’s Sunnah that, both directly and indirectly, regulate human behavior that is recognized, trusted, and respected by Muslims.

    In terms of terminology, according to Mr. Hasbi Ash-Shiddieqy, he believes that Islamic law is the collection of efforts of jurists to apply sharia to the needs of society. Meanwhile, An-Na’im thinks that Islamic law includes matters of belief, worship (ritual), morality and law.

    This description shows that Islamic law covers various issues of human life, both the affairs of this world and the affairs of the hereafter. The main source of Islamic law is divine revelation and human reason. The double identity of Islamic law is found in its two Arabic names, shari’ah and fiqh .

    Shari’ah has a greater relationship with divine revelation, while jurisprudence is a product of human reason or knowledge about Shari’ah terms that are actually taken from the Qur’an and Sunnah.

    Therefore, Islamic law can be divided into two parts: first, the provisions (law) of Islam are clear and detailed, such as matters of worship, marriage, inheritance provisions, etc. This part is the province of sharia . Second, the provisions of Islam are built through the corruption of reason. This part is the area of ​​jurisprudence .

    In Islamic law, there are two types of law that apply to mukallaf (those who have met the conditions to obey the law), the first is taklifi and the second is wadh’i .

    This law is used by mukallaf as a guideline for worship. Linguistically, the law of taklifi is the law of burdening, while in terminological terms it is God’s command in the form of choice and request. It is called taklifi law because this order is directly related to the actions of a mukallaf (puberty and common sense).

    The condition is due to the law of taklifi obliging the mukallaf to do and leave an act with certainty. The discussion of taklifi law is one of the many studies of Ushul Fiqh h. In fact, one of the main purposes of the discussion of Ushul Fiqh a is how to conclude the law of taqlifi definitively.

    Therefore, the position of taklifi law is so important in the discussion of Islamic law. So this article will discuss the meaning of taklifi law , its types, and functions according to Islamic teachings. If you Reader friends don’t know about taklifi law, let’s read the explanation!

    Definition of Taklifi Law

    Taklifi law is a law that has the meaning of demand (to be done or left by the mukallaf ) or that contains a choice between what is done or what is left. In other words, taklifi law is what is required to do or not to do or is allowed to choose between doing and not doing.

    Hukum taklifi is the book (word) of God that relates to mukallaf actions , either in the form of ability guidance, or establishing something as a reason, condition, or seed.

    The law also includes procedures, prohibitions, and permission of a mukallaf . For example, prayer is obligatory for all Muslims, adultery is forbidden and sleeping is allowed.

    The terms halal, haram, wajib, sunnah, etc. is part of the law of taqlifi in Islam. Law enforcement is aimed at Muslims. Mukallaf is an adult or old enough and quick (not crazy or unconscious). In other words, small children or people who suffer from acute mental disorders to the point that their minds are disturbed are not burdened by the law of taklifi .

    The law is very important to measure the faith of each person. Therefore, the law is absolute and must be obeyed and enforced relentlessly.

    The law of taklifi as mentioned before is the law that applies and must be obeyed in Islam for those who have been subject to the conditions of taklifi , that is, they are adults or have reached puberty, because taklifi is related to the commands and prohibitions of God. SWT.

    This law is basically related to the command of Allah SWT. The important thing is to organize people so that they have to do something, finish it, and leave it. Because the root of charity from human behavior comes from doing something and not doing something. Thus, this law is sourced from all syariah laws or laws that are sourced from legal foundations.

    Types of Taklifi Laws

    The Hanafi group divides the law of taklifi into seven types, namely by dividing the word to do an act with definite conditions into two parts, namely fardhu and ijab .

    According to this group, if an order is based on qath’i proofs , such as the proofs of the Qur’an and mutawatir hadith, then the order is called fardhu . However, if the order is based on zhanni evidence then it is called ijab . So is the ban.

    If the prohibition is based on ridiculous arguments, then it is called karahah tahrim . With such a division, the Hanafi group divided the law of taklifi into fardhu, ijab, tahrim, karahah tanzih, nadb and ibahah.

    Although this second group divides the law of taklifi into seven types, in general the scholars agree on dividing the law into five types as mentioned above.

    The five types of law have an influence on the actions of mukallaf and this result is known by jurists as al-ahkam al-khamsah, which is obligatory, haram, mandub, makruh and mubah. Here is the explanation:

    1. Mandatory (Ijab)

    Ushul experts give the meaning of obligatory according to the Sharia, that is, what the Sharia demands to be done by the mukallaf upon a firm request and will be rewarded and if neglected will incur a sin, this ijab can be known by pronunciation or by other signs ( qarinah ).

    The determined obligation can be seen through pronunciation as in the form of amar (command) in the word of God: “… establish Salat to remember Me.” (QS. Thaha: 14).

    It can also be known through the words that are included in the sentence itself which shows the obligation as in His words: “O you who believe, it is obligatory upon you to fast as it was obligatory upon those before you” (QS. Al-Baqarah: 183 ).

    Seen from many aspects, it must be divided into four. Viewed from a certain point of view whether the act is obligatory or not, obligatory can be divided into two, namely:

    1. Wajib Mu’ayyan is something whose actions have been determined, for example reciting Surat al-Fatihah in prayer.
    2. Wajib Mukhayyar , that is, those who can choose one of the many types of actions determined. For example, the oath of atonement offers three alternatives, feed ten poor people, or give clothing to ten poor people, or free the slaves.

    Seen in terms of the time to do it and the time available to do what is needed. This obligation can be divided into two categories, namely:

    1. Wajib Muwassa , that is, the time available to carry out what is required is wider or longer than the time of carrying out this obligation. For example, Dhuhur prayer. The time available to perform Dhuhr prayer is much greater than the time used to perform Dhuhr prayer. It is very important that it can be done at the beginning of time or in the middle of time or at the end of time. According to the scholars, if muwassa’ is required to be done in the middle or at the end of the time, one should intend after the time has arrived (early time) to delay its implementation until the desired time as neglecting the time.
    2. Wajib Mudhayyaq , i.e. those who have the same or equal free time to fulfill this obligation, such as Ramadan fasting. Fasting itself occupies all days in the month of Ramadan. This is why the obligation of mudhayyaq cannot be postponed in the time available for its implementation.

    Seen from the perspective of the person who must do it, it is divided into two parts:

    1. Wajib Ain are the conditions to perform one act per mukallaf and cannot be replaced by others, such as the obligation to perform prayer, fasting, zakat and hajj. This obligation is also called fardu ‘ain.
    2. Wajib Kifayah is an obligation imposed on a group of people and if someone fulfills the request it is considered fulfilled, and if no one does it, the group commits crimes such as amar ma’ruf and nahi munkar , funeral prayers, construction of hospitals, schools, etc.

    Seen in terms of the ratio (amount) and the form of loss, it is divided into two:

    1. Wajib Muhaddad, is what is determined by the syar’a in the form of a requested act and the mukallaf is considered negligent in fulfilling the request before carrying it out as requested by the syar’a’ or otherwise is an obligation whose rate or quantity has been determined. For example prayer, zakat and debt repayment. The five-step prayer has a time, the number of rak’ahs, pillars and conditions. Zakat has been defined for the types of goods that must be provided and the amount of zakat that must be paid. Wajib muhaddad if not implemented will become a debt and can be confiscated.
    2. Wajib Ghairu Muhaddad is a mandatory and optional act, which does not determine the method of implementation and deadline or an obligation that does not determine the amount of limitations, such as infaq fi sabilillah, helping people who want to help, helping each other, etc.

    Wajib ghairu muhaddad , if not forced, does not become a debt and cannot be forced. According to Amir Syarifuddin in ushul fiqh, the law of coercion is: Asking to do something safe, meaning something that if done will be rewarded and if surrendered will be threatened by Allah SWT, known as the term “wajib”.

    2. Sunnah (Mandub)

    Ushul experts say that what is meant by mandub is what is required by syariah to make mukallaf, but the conditions are not too strict, there is no punishment or sin (‘iqab) .

    The act of mandub can be recognized from the pronunciation included in the text such as the word sunnah or recommended or given as a warning but there are indications that it is obligatory not to extend from the text itself.

    Scholars of the Hanafi school equate the meaning of sunnah and nafal with mandub, according to them there are three types of mandub, namely:

    1. Sunnah Hadyi is an act ordained to perform obligatory acts such as the call to prayer and congregational prayer. People who abandon acts like this are said to be lost and reprehensible and if the whole village agrees to abandon them then they can be fought.
    2. Zaidah’s Sunnah is all actions that are recommended to be done as commendable qualities for mukallaf for following the footsteps of the Prophet as a normal human being such as eating, drinking, sleeping etc. and if the action is done then it becomes good for the mukallaf and if it is omitted it cannot be said to be makruh.
    3. Sunnah Nafal is an act that is recommended to be done in addition to obligatory and sunnah acts such as circumcision prayer. If you can do this, you will be rewarded if you stop, you will not be punished, nor reproached.

    Usually, this mandub is also called sunat or mustahab, and is divided into:

    1. Sunnah ‘ain , is all actions that are recommended to every mukallaf person to do, for example sunnah rawatib prayer.
    2. Sunnah kifayah is all actions that are recommended to be done by just one of a group, for example saying greetings, praying for someone who sneezes, and so on.

    3. Haram (Tahrim)

    Ushul scholars say that what is regulated by syar’a is forbidden, which cannot be done under harsh conditions.” In other words, it is forbidden and if you do it and you will be punished, and if you leave it you will get a reward.

    Broadly speaking, Haram is divided into two parts:

    1.  Haram Lidzatihi is haram in the act itself or haram in its substance. Haram like that is basically forbidden from the beginning. For example murder, adultery, theft, etc.
    2. Li ghairihi is forbidden , forbidden because it is related to other acts, or forbidden because of other factors that come later. For example, buying and selling which was previously allowed becomes haram, when the call to prayer on Friday is heard. Similarly, the obligatory fasting of Ramadan which originally became haram because fasting causes pain that threatens the safety of the soul. The same goes for others.

    Scholars of the Hanafi school divide this haram into two types, which are seen based on the strength of the arguments that support it:

    1. Haram set by Dalil Qath are Al Quran, Sunnah Mutawatir and Ijma Harm. Haram that is established by this argument of qath is the opposite of fardhu. For example, the prohibition of adultery as explained in Surah Al Isra verse 32.
    2. Haram that is established with zanni arguments such as hadith ahad and kias and haram like this is contrary to what is obligatory or also karahiyatul tahrim . For example, men are forbidden to wear gold jewelry and silk cloth.

    According to Amir Syarifuddin, he said that the taqlifi law about haram is: Demand to leave clearly, that is a job that if done by a mukallaf then he will receive a sin from Allah SWT and if left then he will get a reward, which is known as “haram “ .

    Hanafiyah scholars define forbidden law into two based on the evidence that establishes it. Claims and prohibitions can definitely be determined by the evidence of the Zhanni evidence called karahah tahrim .

    4. Makruh (Karahah)

    According to Ushul scholars, Makruh is what is required by syariah to do, but is not haram or in other words, something that is haram but will not be a sin if done. For example, smoking, eating food that causes bad smell, etc.

    Generally, scholars divide makruh into two parts:

    1. Makruh Tanzih , that is, all actions that are omitted are better than done.
    2. Makruh Tahrim , i.e. all acts that are prohibited but the justification for the prohibition is zhanni , not qath’i. For example, playing chess, eating fish, and eating snake meat (according to the Hanafiyah and Malikiyah schools).

    According to Amir Syarifuddin, the takfili law about makruh reads: A demand to leave or an indefinite prohibition. That is, a job that if done without sin and if abandoned will be rewarded, which is known as “karahah (makruh)”.

    5. Mubah (Ibahah)

    What does Mubah mean according to Ushul scholars: “what gives the mukallaf the freedom to choose whether to do it or not.”

    Mubah can be divided into three types, namely: 36, whose syarah explains the ability to choose between doing and not doing

    1. Its ability is not explained, but syar’ states that it can provide peace and comfort for those who do it
    2. It is not well explained at all that the ability to do such things is rooted in the rules of Bara’atul Ashliyah .

    According to Amir Syarifuddin he said that the taklfi law about mubah is something that gives the possibility to choose between doing or leaving. Therefore, here there is no demand to work or leave. this is neither commanded nor forbidden.

    Laws in this type are called “ibahah” while actions that are given a choice to do or not are called ” mubah” . For example: hunting after performing tahallul in Hajj and others.

     

  • The Understanding of Individuals as Individuals and Social Beings

    Understanding of Individuals – Humans as individual beings need to be understood in terms of the individual itself. The word “Individual” comes from the Latin word, ” individuum ” which means “undivided”. So, is a term that can be used to express the smallest and limited unit.

    Humans as individual beings have physical and spiritual elements, physical and psychic elements, body and soul elements. A person is said to be an individual human while those elements are united in him. If the elements are no longer united, a person is not called an individual. Every human being has its own uniqueness and special characteristics, no human being is exactly the same. From so many people, it turns out that each one has its own uniqueness.

    The definition of an individual is a combination of phenotypic and genotypic factors. Genotype factor is a factor carried by the individual since birth, it is a hereditary factor. If an individual has physical characteristics or character traits that are carried since birth, he also has physical characteristics and character or traits that are influenced by environmental factors (phenotypic factors). Environmental factors (phenotype) play a role in the formation of a person’s special characteristics.

    The term environment refers to the physical environment and the social environment. Physical environment such as the surrounding natural conditions. Social environment refers to the environment in which an individual interacts socially. We interact socially with family members, with friends, and larger social groups. The special characteristics of a person can be called personality. Each person has a different personality that is influenced by innate factors (genotype) and environmental factors (phenotype) that interact continuously.

    According to Nursid Sumaatmadja (2000), personality is the entire behavior of an individual which is the result of the interaction between bio-psycho-fiscal (physical and psychological) potentials that are carried from birth with a network of environmental situations, which are revealed in actions and deeds and psychological mental reactions, if it gets stimulation from the environment.

    He concluded that environmental factors (phenotype) play a role in the formation of a person’s special characteristics. Each individual has inherent characteristics and characteristics ( heredity ) and characteristics obtained from the influence of the environment. Innate characteristics are hereditary characteristics possessed since birth, both related to biological factors and social psychological factors.

    Nature and nature are terms commonly used to explain individual characteristics in terms of physical, mental, and emotional aspects at each level of development. A newborn baby is the result of two family lines, the father’s line and the mother’s line. Since conception or the conception of a new life, it is continuously influenced by various stimulating environmental factors.

     

    Definition of Individual

    The word “individual” comes from the Latin language, i ndividium which means something that cannot be divided or a small limited unit. This describes humans as individual beings because physiologically humans have an independent nature that does not have an organic dependency on others.

    In fulfilling the essence of the notion of individuality, humans will always try to develop their personal abilities, such as the ability to survive, communicate, and so on. Humans as individual beings are equipped with intellect, thoughts, and emotions. It is this ability that makes man a monodualist being, a being that is responsible for himself.

    As individual creatures, humans are one of God’s creations that have physical (body) and spiritual (soul) elements. These elements cannot be separated and become an individual shaper. When those elements are no longer united, a person is no longer said to be an individual being. Every human being has certain uniqueness and characteristics, no human being is exactly the same in this world, even identical twins have different characteristics.

    Humans as individual beings are a combination of two factors, namely phenotypic and genotypic factors. Genotype factors are factors that humans carry from their parents, or also called hereditary factors. This factor is carried by man since he was born on this earth. These factors affect human physical traits such as skin color, height, hair shape, etc., and also psychological traits, such as quiet, active, etc.

    Meanwhile, phenotypic factors are factors that form individuals that come from the environment. It cannot be denied that the environment can affect human character. Although basic attitudes have been formed through genotype factors, it is the environment that determines whether these traits can develop or not.

    The two factors interact and form a special characteristic of an individual called personality. The understanding of humans as individual beings is that humans have rights over themselves that are adjusted by the social conditions or environment around them. These are all closely related to the environment through society, through personality, through the senses, gender, and social status.

    Definition of Individual According to Experts

    During his life, an individual goes through stages starting from baby, child, teenager, adult, until he experiences old age. To protect each individual’s rights, the government issues a policy on the protection of the rights of each individual without exception (Human Rights). Every individual is also entitled to his personality including in thinking and acting. For example, someone needs education or guidance and direction.

    1. Viniagustia

    The concept of individual is a term that can be used to express the smallest and limited unity.

    2. Dr. A. License

    The definition of individual is “people” or something that is a whole that cannot be divided again, a limited unity.

    3. MJ Langeveld

    Every human child, human being is born with the potential to be different from others, or to be (like) himself. There is no identical individual on the face of the earth, that two twins that come from the same egg are commonly said to be like betel nut split in two, similar and difficult to distinguish one from the other, only similar but not identical, let alone identical.

    4. Martin Luther

    The concept of individual comes from the word individum (Latin), which is a small unit that cannot be divided again. According to the sociological concept, an individual means a human being who lives independently. Individuals as creatures created by God in themselves are always equipped with life equipment that includes body, taste, ratio, and harmony.

    • Raga, is a special form of the human body that can distinguish one individual from another, even with the same essence.
    • Rasa, is a human feeling that can capture objects of movement from things in the universe or feelings related to beauty.
    • Ratio or common sense, is a human equipment to develop oneself, overcome everything that is needed in every human being and is a tool to digest what is received by the five senses.
    • Rukun or life association, is a form of socialization with humans and living side by side with each other harmoniously, peacefully and complementing each other. This pillar is what can help people to form a social group that is often called community.

    5. Sujatmiko Eko

    The meaning of individual is one person; private person (separate from other people). Organisms that live on their own, are physiologically independent (do not have an organic relationship with each other). Individuals are the smallest unit of society.

    In social science, the concept of individual also means the smallest part of a group of society that cannot be separated into smaller parts. For example, a family consists of father, mother, and children. Father is an individual in that social group, which can no longer be divided into smaller units.

    Individual comes from the Greek word ” individium ” which means “undivided”. In social science, the understanding of the individual is related to the character with the life and soul that is plural and plays a role in human social life. The individual is a limited unity, that is, as a single human being, not as a whole human being.

    It can be concluded that an individual is a human being who has a special or specific role in his personality. There are three aspects in an individual, namely the physical organic aspect, the spiritual psychological aspect, and the social aspect. Where the aspects are related to each other. If one is damaged, it will damage other aspects. When the pattern of behavior is almost identical to the behavior of the masses concerned.

    The process that increases the characteristics of individuality in a person to himself is called the process of individualization or self-actualization. In this process, individuals are burdened with various roles that come from the conditions of living together, which eventually emerges as a group that will determine the stability of a society.

    Individuals in their behavior according to their personal patterns have three possibilities, namely deviating from the collective norm, losing their individuality, subjugating the collective, and thirdly influencing society. Thus, human beings are individual beings not only in the sense of the whole body and soul, but are special individuals, according to their personality patterns and abilities.

    Another definition of an individual is a single person; private person (separate from other people). Organisms that live on their own, are physiologically independent (do not have an organic relationship with each other).

    Individual Instincts

    Basically, each individual has different characteristics. Individuals who join together will form a group or community. The individual will have the same characteristics as the group when he joins.

    Each individual has special characteristics that are different from other individuals, such as physical shape, intelligence, talent, desire, feelings and have their own level of understanding/meaning towards an object. So, the individual is the internal condition of a human being who functions as a subject.

    Humans as individuals have three instincts, namely:

    1. Survival Instinct

    The instinct to maintain survival has given rise to various needs. One of the most basic needs is the physiological needs consisting of eating, drinking and protection. All these needs are obtained from the human environment, and in utilizing the environment requires technology.

    Technology can be defined as the means or tools used by humans to fulfill their needs. So technology does not only include modern equipment or machines. Arrows for hunting, shifting cultivation and other simple tools or means are included in the technology. Human needs are very diverse and these needs are easier to fulfill if individuals live in groups with other individuals.

    2. Instinct to Defend the Continuation of Livelihood of Descendants

    The instinct to protect the offspring, demands the need for a sense of security ( safety need ), both from the disturbance of uncomfortable weather, wild animals or other humans. Clothes made from various types of materials and models adapted to the weather conditions. Housing with various materials and forms, is basically an effort to obtain a sense of security from various disturbances.

    As for the diversity of materials and models used, it depends on the environment. Like houses in tropical areas are generally made of wood or bamboo with a triangular or conical roof model and often the bottom does not directly touch the ground, but is stilted or vaulted. In moderate climates, many houses are built from bricks/soil, with flat roofs, while in cold regions the Eskimos make houses from ice with a bare shape. All that depends on the weather and the raw materials available in the environment.

    In addition to meeting the biological needs of humans, marriage on the other hand is also a reflection of the individual’s dependence on other individuals and the instinct to continue the lineage.

    3. Curiosity and Seeking Satisfaction

    Every human being has an instinct to be curious about something around them, whether it is the natural environment or other human environments. There are natural differences such as land, hills, mountains; differences in the distribution of plants and animals; physical differences in humans such as black, white, tanned, tall, short and so on; human cultural differences such as when it comes to eating, some eat with their hands, spoons, forks and knives; differences in clothing, livelihood, house shape and so on.

    All that has pushed people to find out. The question “what, why, how, and who” has given birth to a system of knowledge, which is then organized into a system through certain rules, thus giving birth to knowledge.

    This knowledge is basically to meet the spiritual/inner needs of man, while the application of knowledge in the form of methods and tools to meet the needs of human life is called technology. So, technology is a variety of ways or tools to meet human material needs.

     

    The Difference between Individual Humans and Social Beings

    1. Humans as Individuals

    An individual is a person or a human being as a whole. Whole here is defined as a quality that cannot be divided. It is a unity between the physical and the spiritual that is attached to a person. The two cannot be separated to support and fulfill human needs, both as individuals and communities.

    The knowledge and technology that individuals possess is not entirely the result of their own experience, but more from learning and imitating others. Therefore, in fulfilling the instinct of curiosity and seeking satisfaction, it cannot be separated from group life.

    2. Humans as Social Beings

    Humans are creatures that cannot immediately adapt to their environment. During infancy, humans are completely dependent on other individuals. He learns to walk, learn to eat, learn to dress, learn to read, learn to make things and so on, needs the help of other adults.

    According to Malinowski, one of the figures of anthropology from Poland stated that the dependence of individuals on other individuals in their group can be seen from human efforts in meeting biological needs and social needs that are done through cultural mediation.

    A sense of security specifically depends on the presence of protection systems in the house, clothing and equipment. Protection in general, in the sense of interference with other groups, will be easier to create if people are in groups. In order to create the security and comfort of this group life, rules and social controls were created about what can and cannot be done by each member of the group. In addition, it is also determined who has the right to organize the life of the group to achieve common goals.

    Individuals have the characteristics of having a mind and self that is able to determine reality, interpret the situation, determine actions from outside and within themselves. Can be interpreted as an individual communication process in interacting and relating. Individuals will not have a clear identity without the existence of a society that is the background of the individual marked by where the individual tries to place his behavior in accordance with the norms and culture of the environment, such as in Indonesia the individual upholds polite behavior, and is ethical in socializing.

    Individuals are always in a group, the role of the group is to mature the individual into a person, whose process depends on the group and the environment can be a supporting factor in the process as well as an obstacle to the process of becoming a person. Supporting factors and inhibiting factors can also be based on the individual himself.

    •  
  • Understanding Individuals, Groups, and Social Relations

    Humans are social creatures who live side by side with society and the help of others. That is what indicates that within each individual there is a desire and need that is needed to live together with other individuals in creating a social relationship. However, do you know what individuals, groups, and social relationships are? Well, in order to know the explanation, let’s pay attention to the following discussion.

    A. Definition of Individual

    Individuals are the smallest part of a group of society that cannot be separated into smaller parts. The term “individual” comes from the Greek language, namely “individuum” which means not divided. In sociology, an individual is also defined as an organization or individual that is independent and not tied to other organizations, be it action, thought, or behavior.

    Based on the Indonesian Dictionary or KBBI, individual means a single organism that lives and stands alone. Physiologically, individuals have the same independent nature as the definition of individual based on the sociological concept which means that life stands on its own.

    Each individual in society plays a role with a different status. In society, individuals have a role as social beings. Not only do they play a role in society, individuals also have a role in the political world. The role of the individual in the political world, for example as a person who contributes an opinion, one of the people who plays a role in political activities, and participates in helping to solve problems in the organization and the political world.

    1. Characteristics of Individuals

    In general, there are a number of individual characteristics that you need to know or recognize, among others:

    a. Individuals have intelligence, thoughts, wishes, and desires, as well as feelings that can determine action from outside and from within the individual.

    b. Individuals have the instinct to survive, achieve satisfaction, etc.

    c. Individuals have a soul and body that can distinguish between individuals.

    d. Individuals have unique or special behaviors and behaviors that can distinguish one individual from another.

    2. Individual aspects

    An individual is a person who has personality and behavior, and plays a role in society and other environments, for example in the political environment. According to H. Hartomo, states that there are 3 (three) aspects owned by each individual that are interconnected and have an impact on others, including the following:

    a. Spiritual and psychological aspects

    b. Social aspect

    c. Aspects of soul and body

    In addition, there are also individual psychological aspects, among others:

    • Special talent or ability or intelligence
    • Interest or desire
    • A person’s personality
    • Enthusiasm
    • Learning

    3. Individual Characteristics

    Based on the explanation given by Stoner and Freeman, it is said that individual characteristics are translations or other words of attitudes, interests and individual needs. The attitude is carried and used by a person when doing an activity.

    In addition, John, Donahue, and Kentle also said that there are 5 (five) individual characteristics that you must know and pay attention to, including:

    a. Openness to experience

    Openness to Experience is a characteristic of individuals who accept new experiences or do not reject when there is change.

    b. Conscientiousness

    Conscientiousness is one of the characteristics of individuals who are careful about everything.

    c. Extraversion

    Extraversion is an individual characteristic with its open and comfortable nature. So that there is no disturbance when interacting between individuals.

    d. Agreeableness

    Agreeableness is one of the characteristics of individuals who always want to avoid problems with other individuals.

    e. Neocriticism

    Neocritism is a characteristic of individuals who are open to pressure and have an assessment of their ability to withstand stress on a person.

    B. Definition of Social Groups

    A social group is a group of people who are related to each other by using common patterns. A group of people can be called a social group when it has met 3 (three) main conditions, among which each group member realizes that he is part of his group, each group member has the same background or characteristics, and there is a structure of norms and behavioral patterns.

    Unbeknownst to you, this social group has a form that has spread around your environment. With one of the functions of the form of social groups which he hopes is to organize procedures in establishing interactions between individuals. There are a number of things that you must know and pay attention to in forming social groups, including:

    1. Social Board, is a system of norms that organize life to achieve common goals.

    2. Social Order, is a condition where the members of the community proceed in harmony, harmony, and harmony in accordance with the values ​​and norms prevailing in the community. The social order is formed through stages consisting of order, order, stability, and also patterns.

    3. Order, is a social group that has a series of values ​​and norms that run in harmony, and are obeyed by members.

    4. Social Order, is a system in a social group where every member obeys and carries out every value and norm that has been arranged with full awareness.

    5. Steady, is one of the regularities in members of social groups that have been running with their fixed nature.

    6. Pattern, has a similar meaning as regularity, only pattern is more directed to the relationship between social regularity and the form of social interaction.

    C. Understanding Social Relations

    Social relationships are interactions between individuals, groups, and between groups with the environment that have a mutual impact on each other in life. This social relationship itself is closely related as the most basic form of social relationship. There is no social relationship that occurs without social interaction.

    Social interaction is a social reciprocal relationship that includes mutual influence between individuals, individuals with groups, and between groups. There are 6 (six) factors that have an impact on the formation of a social interaction, including suggestion, sympathy, imitation, identification, empathy, and also motivation.

    There are not only supporting factors for the creation of social interaction, there are also mandatory conditions that need to be fulfilled by individuals in order to create a social interaction, namely the number of actors, social contact, and communication. In general, the form of interaction according to its purpose can be categorized into 2 (two) parts, namely associative social interaction by leading to unity, for example cooperation, assimilation, accommodation, and controversy. Second, that is dissociative social interaction that creates division with examples of contravention, competition or opposition, and opposition or conflict.

     

  • Understanding Immunization: Purpose and Types

    Meaning of Immunization – For parents, they must be familiar with what is called immunization. This immunization is important to give to children, especially for those who are not yet five years old. Immunization can be done at health clinics, hospitals, and even posyandu. Immunizations given through posyandu are usually free or not charged, so parents should not miss this opportunity so that the toddler can grow up healthy.

    By giving immunization, the parents have protected the child from various diseases, so that the child is healthy and can grow to the maximum. Giving immunization to toddlers is not for no reason, toddlers have an immune condition that is not yet strong, so in order to avoid various diseases they are given immunization. Immunization itself is mandatory and some are recommended or additional immunizations.

    However, not a few also think that this immunization is not very important. Assumptions like this are unfortunate because they can make the health of children under five vulnerable to disease and their growth becomes less than optimal. Therefore, those assumptions should be eliminated by socializing to the parents.

    Knowledge about the importance of immunization needs to be disseminated to the entire community, from teenagers to the elderly. Not only knowledge, but the benefits of immunization also need to be spread. This should be done so that the community thinks that immunization is an important activity to do.

    Well, this article is suitable for you to read if you want to know more about immunization. So, don’t wait and read this article to the end, Reader.

    Definition of Immunization

    As we know that the human body must have immunity to prevent the entry of viruses or diseases into the body. Every human has a different immune condition. The body’s immune system is known as the term immunity which means protection to avoid various diseases. The immune system is what every human being needs to take care of, if the body’s immune system is weak, then the person will be susceptible to disease.

    The body’s immune system consists of various types of cells and substances produced in the body from the result of cooperation with the collective and organized to fight all kinds of germs that enter the body.

    So that the body’s immune system is quickly formed, then a person needs immunization. Things like this need to be done to toddlers because at that age the body’s immune system is not yet fully formed. Therefore, many people say that immunization can help the body to form an immune or antibody.

    In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) immunization is immunization or immunity (against disease). While according to the Ministry of Health of the Republic of Indonesia, immunization is an effort carried out in giving vaccines to a person’s body, so that it can create immunity against certain diseases.

    Based on the definition of immunization from KBBI and the Ministry of Health of the Republic of Indonesia, it can be said that immunization is a way of giving germs with the aim of making the body’s immune system immune and not easily affected by diseases, especially infectious diseases.

    Immunization itself is divided into two, namely active immunization and passive immunization. Active immunization is a way of giving germs that have been weakened or turned off with the aim of making the body respond, thus creating its own antibodies. meanwhile, passive immunization is a way to strengthen the body’s immune system by injecting a certain amount of antibodies so that the antibodies become strong.

    Therefore, immunizations can be said to be in the form of serum or injected into the body and there are also immunizations that are put into the mouth. Immunizations that are serum or injected, such as measles, BCG, and DPT immunizations. Meanwhile, immunizations that are administered orally, such as polio immunization.

    Immunization services specifically for children under five can usually be obtained at Posyandu, Puskesmas, Government Hospitals, Maternity Hospitals, etc. In fact, the government has made a recommendation to give immunizations that must be given when the child is still a toddler, such as BCG (Bacillus Calmette Guerrine) , DPT (Diphtheria, Pertussis, Tetanus) , Polio, Measles, and Hepatitis B immunization.

    Purpose of Immunization

    1. Preventing a person from contracting diseases that are contagious and harmful to the body.
    2. Increase immunity, especially for toddlers whose immune system is not well formed.
    3. Making the growth of a child to the maximum that can make the family happy.
    4. Giving a sense of security to the community, especially children with a good immune system.

    Type of Immunization 

    After knowing the meaning of immunization, now we know about the types of immunization. These types of immunization are divided into two, namely mandatory immunization and recommended immunization.

    1. Mandatory Immunization

    This mandatory immunization is usually given to babies who are still babies so that they have a strong immune system. Mandatory immunizations include:

    a. BCG (Bacillus Calmette Guerrine) immunization

    Tuberculosis disease or better known TB is a type of disease that is dangerous enough that our body needs to be given immunity in the form of immunization. This BCG immunization contains a bacterium or Bacillus Calmette Guerrin germ which is then weakened. The germ particles in this immunization are around 50,000 to 1,000,000 particles per dose.

    The purpose of giving this type of immunization is to prevent the baby from contracting tuberculosis, so that the baby can grow up healthy. Meanwhile, giving this type of immunization should be done before the child is 2 months old. In addition, do not give repeated immunizations or second immunizations with the same type, because the success rate of repeated immunizations is still doubtful. A good temperature to store this BCG vaccine is around 2 degrees Celsius.

    b. DPT Immunization (Diphtheria, Pertussis, Tetanus)

    DPT immunization is often known as 3 in 1 immunization because the vaccine given aims to prevent three diseases at once, namely diphtheria, pertussis, and tetanus. Therefore, this vaccine consists of diphtheria toxoid and tetanus toxoid which are then purified with botella pertussis germ (which has been killed).

    This type of vaccine will usually be given to children who are less than 7 years old. In addition, the administration of this vaccine is usually in the form of an injection or serum that is injected into a part of the body, such as the thigh or arm. A good DPT immunization is done three times, namely DPT I immunization at the age of 3 months, DPT II immunization at the age of 4 months, and DPT III immunization at the age of 5 months. In addition, repeat DPT immunization is done one year after the third DPT. This is done so that a child’s immune system will be formed quickly,

    . Hepatitis B immunization

    Based on what is available, around 33 percent of mothers giving birth have HBsAg with an estimated maternal transmission of 40 percent, especially mothers giving birth in developing countries. HbsAg is an antigen found in the hepatitis B virus. If the mother gives birth when her HbsAg test is positive, then the person has hepatitis B, and can even spread it to others. Therefore, hepatitis B immunization is done as soon as possible after the baby is born.

    Hepatitis B immunization is done with the aim of preventing people from getting hepatitis B, especially children under the age of five whose immune system is not yet strong. Hepatitis B immunization, preferably 12 hours after the baby is born, then the second dose is given when the baby is 6 months old. The third dose is given to babies aged 6-18 months. It would be good, when the child is 10-12 years old, it should be given a repeat immunization.

    This is done if the mother is not detected as suffering from hepatitis B. If the mother has hepatitis B, the baby should be given 0.5 ml of HBIG before the baby is even one week old.

    d. Measles Immunization

    Measles immunization contains the measles virus which is then weakened. Therefore, this vaccine should be stored at a temperature of 2-8 degrees Celsius and should not be exposed to direct sunlight because it can kill the measles virus. If the measles virus is dead before being injected, the body’s antibodies to prevent measles cannot be formed.

    Measles immunization aims to prevent a person from getting the measles virus and disease. Based on the recommendations of the WHO or the World Health Organization, the provision of measles immunization should be done in babies who are still 9 months old, especially in babies in developing countries. The thing that needs to be noted when the baby has been immunized against measles is a high fever that occurs after 8 to 10 days of vaccination and red spots for 1 to 2 days.

    e. Polio Immunization

    Polio can be said to be one of the types of diseases that can cause the sufferer to experience physical disorders, so that their growth will not be optimal. Polio immunization is one of the compulsory vaccines given to children. This vaccine contains weakened polio virus, so that when it is put into the child’s body it is not dangerous.

    Polio immunization is done 4 times so that the body’s antibodies to prevent polio disease are quickly formed, so that a person can experience growth well. The recommended time to give polio immunization is the interval between the first, second, third, and fourth immunization should not be more than 4 weeks . The vaccine given 4 times is not for no reason, the first and second immunizations aim to form a response from the body. Then the third and fourth immunization aims to increase antibody immunity to the highest level.

    After the fourth polio immunization, it is best to re-immunize. This repeated immunization is done when a person is around 5-6 years old (around the beginning of elementary school) and at the age of 12 (has graduated from elementary school).

    2. Additional Immunization

    Additional immunization is an immunization that can be done and not done is no problem. This additional immunization is usually given to those who are exposed to disease and have a high risk of death. Here are the additional immunizations you need to know.

    a. MMR immunization

    MMR immunization is an immunization that aims to provide protection so that a person does not get measles, German measles, and mumps. The thing that needs to be underlined from this vaccine is that it is not dangerous and does not cause autism. MMR immunization, preferably given twice. In the first dose, injected in a child aged 12-15 months. Then the second injection is given to a child at the age of 4-6 years or at 11-13 years.

    For children who have allergies to eggs, neomycin antibiotics, and gelatin, it is not recommended to follow this immunization. In addition, a child who has experienced immune disorders caused by cancer, leukemia, lymphoma, steroids, and chemotherapy is also not recommended to follow this immunization.

    b. Varicella immunization

    Varicella immunization is a wrong immunization that aims to prevent a child from contracting chicken pox. For children who have never had chicken pox, it is best not to forget to follow the varicella immunization. By following this immunization, the chances of contracting chicken pox are very small.

    For the administration of the varicella vaccine, this can be done before the child reaches 13 years of age and the dose is given only once. However, for those who are over 13 years old and have not received varicella immunization and have not been exposed to chicken pox, it is best to receive two doses. The first and second doses are only 4-8 weeks apart.

    c. HiB immunization

    The next additional immunization is the HiB immunization which aims to prevent inflammation of the brain and lungs. Immunization is usually given to babies who are still 2 months, 3 months, and 5 months old. In those three periods, the baby is given different doses of the vaccine according to the level of the injection. Not only that, the injection of this vaccine is done in the thigh muscle.

    For some parents, giving this vaccine is accompanied by giving Diphtheria, Pertussis, and Tetanus (DPT) immunization and hepatitis B immunization. For parents who have given HiB immunization to their child, there is no need to worry if the child has a fever and red swelling on the part injected body, because this does not last long.

    d. Influenza Immunization

    Influenza immunization aims to make antibodies in the body so that it is not easily attacked by severe influenza. Influenza is one of the most dangerous diseases because it can make the body’s immunity decrease, and can even cause death. This disease is very easy to attack for those whose immune system is weak enough.

    Therefore, this influenza vaccine is highly recommended to be given to adults who are over 65 years old. This needs to be done because at that age, a person’s body resistance has already decreased.

    e. Typhoid Immunization

    Typhoid immunization is an immunization that aims to reduce a person’s risk of contracting typhoid fever. Typhoid fever is also known as typhus or paratyphoid. In Indonesia itself, the giving of this vaccine has been categorized into an immunization expansion program organized by the government.

    Typhoid immunization can be done when a child is 2 years old or older. When our body is injected with this vaccine, usually the person will experience fever, headache, and pain in the part of the body that is injected.

    Conclusion

    We can take care of the baby’s immunity with immunization, so parents don’t forget to give immunizations to toddlers according to schedule. With a stronger immune system, toddlers will not easily get sick. Even immunization can reduce the number of children who are sick and the number of children who die. In short, don’t delay immunization!

     

  • Understanding Importer, Terms, and Types in Trade

    Meaning of Importer – Reader must have heard the word import, right? Import is the activity of bringing in goods and services from abroad. The meaning of importer starts from this import activity, because countries in the world have different resources that are influenced by geographical factors and so on.

    So, in order to fulfill goods or services in a country, the country carries out import activities through importers. If Reader already understands the meaning of import, now is the time for Reader to know more about what an importer is. See the following explanation.

    Definition of Importer

    According to Law No. 17 of 2006, import is defined as a form of activity carried out by entering goods into the customs area or in this case the territory of the country of Indonesia.

    Meanwhile, an importer is a legal entity, individual, or company that brings a trade product from abroad to then be sold to the domestic market.

    According to the Financial Services Authority, importer is defined as a person or entity that carries out import activities. While the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI) defines an importer as a person or trade association (company) that imports goods from abroad, the importer and the company are designated by the government as importers.

    As for goods imported by importers, they can be used for production or other consumption purposes. If concluded, then the importer is a party that carries out import activities as well as bringing goods from abroad into the country.

    Import activities themselves, of course, will have a positive or negative impact on the economy in Indonesia. One of the positive impacts is the increasing development of importer services in Indonesia, then it will also help the process of goods coming in from abroad, so that the goods that come in will be more smooth and practical.

    Rules and Conditions of Becoming an Importer

    As with import and export activities, importers are also clearly regulated by the government, through Law No. 7 of 2015. In the Law, it is explained that the importer has full responsibility for the goods being imported.

    If the importer commits a violation or is not responsible for the goods they import, then the importer will be subject to administrative sanctions, namely the revocation of permits, recognition, approvals and stipulations in the field of trade.

    When the importer carries out import activities, the importer must comply with the rules that have been implemented by Customs and Excise regarding any goods that are allowed and permitted to enter Indonesia.

    Some of the items that are prohibited from entering Indonesia are living creatures, illicit drugs, human and animal trafficking, dangerous firearms and objects that contain pornography.

    Meanwhile, there are several conditions that must be met by companies and individuals who want to become importers. Here are some conditions.

    1. Individuals who wish to become importers are required to have a legal entity, accompanied by complete documents consisting of company deed, SIUP, NPWP, certificate of company domicile, company registration mark, as well as basic documents required by other companies.
    2. Institutions or companies applying as importers must have an API document accompanied by an importer registration number that has been officially obtained from the Department of Trade and the Ministry of Trade.
    3. Importers must have a NIK or Customs Master Number as well as a registration number that has been obtained after the prospective importer registers with Customs.
    4. Having and preparing API documents for importers in general.
    5. Own and prepare API documents used for importers and manufacturers who already own factories.

    In addition to the five conditions above, to become an importer, a company or institution must have an import business license. If not, then the goods imported by the importer will not pass Customs. The license applies to all types of imports, both small-scale and large-scale imports.

    According to the latest regulations from the Ministry of Trade in 2015, there are two types of importer licenses that must be used, namely API-U or General API and API P or Producer API.

    In addition to the conditions and regulations, importers must know which commodities are allowed to enter Indonesia. According to the purpose and use, the following is the division of commodities.

    1. Raw materials

    Due to the nature of dependence on international trade and domestic industry, raw materials are one of the commodities allowed by the government. In addition to the purchase of basic raw materials and companion materials originating from within the country, the fulfillment of these goods can also be done through imports.

    In Indonesia, importers import many kinds of raw materials needed by the industry. The raw materials of the industry can be in the form of basic raw materials as well as companion materials.

    For example, such as the need for components for motor vehicles, in addition to local content originating from domestic products and some of the products are still imported. In order to increase competitiveness, the government also provides import facilities, and import duties are borne by the country.

    2. Consumables

    The second commodity is a consumer item that is included in the most commodities that importers do now. Consumer goods are goods used to meet daily household needs, such as milk, rice, meat, canned food, butter, cosmetics, medicines and electronic goods.

    3. Children’s toys

    In addition to consumer goods and raw materials, children’s toys are the most imported commodity by importers. Importing children’s toys is done to protect children’s safety because there are more and more children’s toys with unsafe materials that can harm children.

    4. Petroleum and minerals are currently restricted export commodities

    By limiting the export of petroleum and these minerals, the government hopes that there will be added value to this commodity. An example of such restrictions, for example, is applying the obligation to build factories and smelters.

    Types of Importers

    The import of goods is generally done when a country is unable to produce the commodity itself. In some cases, imports are carried out when the stock produced in the country is feared to be insufficient or insufficient to meet the needs of the population.

    For example, in the case of rice imports by Indonesia. Although Indonesia is able to produce its own rice, Indonesia still imports rice in order to maintain stocks and stabilize rice prices on a national scale.

    Importers themselves are divided into several types known in the trade industry. Here are some types of importers.

    1. General Importer

    A general importer is a specialized company engaged in activities to bring merchandise from abroad. Companies that are included in general importers are usually limited liability companies.

    2. Importer Limited

    A limited importer or commonly referred to as IT is a company or legal entity that has obtained permission from the authorities to be able to carry out import activities for certain types of imported goods. There are also some types of merchandise that can only be imported by IT or limited importers.

    Merchandise that can be imported by importer companies is limited, after having arranged permission and trade in Indonesia by the Minister of Trade. The rules and permits, including rules about what goods can be imported as well as how to handle the trade process in the country.

    With limited imports, it is possible for companies to be able to compete in a healthy way. That way, there will be no party who feels harmed by the import activity.

    Companies that are allowed to carry out limited imports are companies that have a permit with a license in the form of an API T or Limited Importer Identification Number and the license is issued by the Investment Coordinating Body or BKPM.

    3. Sole Agent Importer

    The third type of importer is the sole agent importer, which is a foreign company that wants to trade in Indonesia. This third type of importer, will show the representative in Indonesia and the representative has the task of being a special agent to import production carried out by the agent to the domestic market.

    4. Import Merchant

    As explained earlier, the importation of specific goods requires a separate permit. The party that has the right to import the specific goods is an import merchant who has permission in the form of an official license from the government in the form of an Import Acknowledgment Identification Mark or TAPPI. In addition, items that are outside the list of official permits from the government are prohibited from entering Indonesia.

    5. Approved Traders

    The fifth type of importer is approved trades. Some commodities and certain products are only allowed to be imported by companies that have been designated or given privileges by the government. Companies that have these privileges are called approved traders . Usually, the goods imported by approved traders are commodity goods that have a specific purpose.

    For Reader who are interested in becoming an importer, you can learn more about the import process by reading the book written by Indarniati and Ismiyati entitled “Import Top Secret: Cara Impor Resmi Tanpa Rebet”.

    In this book, the author presents a variety of information related to import activities and how to become an importer that is easy and official. Because according to the author, large-scale importation of goods certainly requires the intervention of Customs in two countries, both the sending and receiving countries. So that there are laws that must be understood and obeyed.

    Difference between Importer, Exporter, and Forwarder

    After knowing the importer’s explanation, Reader needs to know the explanation and differences between importers, exporters and forwarders. Here is the explanation.

    An importer is someone who carries out the activity of importing goods, from abroad and importing goods into Indonesia. Whereas an exporter is the opposite of an importer. An exporter is a person or business entity that sends goods from within the country and sends them abroad.

    The difference between importers and exporters, of course, can be clearly seen when looking at the goals of different importers and exporters. However, importers, exporters and freight forwarders are different things, Reader.

    Freight forwarder, is a body or company engaged in the field of transportation and delivery of goods. Well, after knowing the meaning, importers, exporters and freight forwarders are certainly different, aren’t they? In conclusion, an expeditor is an expedition that helps the import and export process carried out by importers and exporters.

    How Importers Make Payments?

    As an importer, Reader must know the tools and methods of payment in import activities. Here is the explanation.

    Payment instruments and methods of payment for import activities, are payment instruments that can be accepted internationally, such payment instruments can be in the form of foreign currency, gold bars, securities or checks. Foreign currencies that can be used for export and import payments can be in the form of dollars, yen, euros, and pounds sterling.

    In the payment of exports and imports using foreign currency, the importer and exporter need to compare the value of a country’s currency with the foreign exchange rate.

    After calculating the foreign exchange rate, here are some payment methods abroad that importers need to know.

    1. Payment in advance

    Payment in advance or also called advance payment , is a payment system carried out by the importer by paying in advance or in advance, before the goods are sent by the exporter.

    The currency used for payment also depends on the agreement and can use the currency of the exporting country or the currency of the importing country.

    2. Later payment

    The second payment method is open account , this second payment method is a payment system that is done after the importer receives the goods from the exporter. The payment system is carried out, if there is trust between the exporter and the importer and there is certainty of the goods and documents of the goods to be received by the importer, as well as legal certainty regarding the transaction as well as the transfer of payment/

    3. Consignment

    The third payment is consignment, which is a way of sending export goods that have the nature of deposit to be marketed by the exporter through a certain price agreement. New payment is made, when the party entrusted with the goods has successfully sold the goods.

    This consignment payment method has a weakness, namely the owner of the goods cannot determine the time from receipt and payment because the owner of the goods must wait for the goods to be sold by the party entrusted.

    4. Payment via money order

    A promissory note or bank promissory note or bill of exchange is a document whose content contains an acknowledgment from the bank or promissory note, which is used to pay the amount of money that has been written on the promissory note to certain parties or parties who have brought the promissory note.

    In that way, the importer must pay for the goods they have purchased by depositing an amount of money at the bank designated by the exporter who issued the promissory note.

    These payment methods can be done by exporters and importers in accordance with the agreement of both parties.

    Thus the explanation of the meaning of importer as well as the conditions or rules to become an importer in Indonesia. 

  • Understanding Imperialism and its Types, Causes, and History

    Understanding Imperialism – Imperialism is a familiar term, especially in this case it is one of the materials in history subjects. Imperialism itself is an understanding and policy carried out by a country to control other countries.

    This term began to develop since the end of the 19th century, when the rulers of a country or region competed with each other to invade other countries with the aim of gaining control.

    The system of imperialism is often considered the same as the system of colonialism because they both have the goal of dominating the country. In fact, the system of imperialism and colonialism have differences.

    This article will specifically discuss the imperialism system, starting from the meaning of imperialism, its types, and the difference with the colonialism system. Check out the full explanation below about the meaning of imperialism!

    What is Meant by Imperialism?

    The definition of Imperialism is a system of policies taken by a large country to hold control or rule over other regions so that the country can develop.

    The term imperialism itself comes from the Latin language, namely imperare or imperium , which means an area of ​​population or power. According to Puspa Swara in the book with the title Sistem Belajar Yesterday: Summaries of Formula Group Materials, the meaning of imperialism is an expansion of territories or areas of power/colony.

    The expansion of the territory can be done in a subtle and mutually beneficial way, such as economy, culture, ideology, or by using coercion (armed force). This is done on the basis of self-interest.

    The concept of Imperialism itself has existed since the 19th century, which was first coined by the British Prime Minister at the time, namely Benjamin Disraeli. The desire to dominate other countries and regions has existed since the fall of Constantinople. Constantinople was a strategic area for trade that eventually fell to the Ottoman Turks.

    The fall of Constantinople made traders and buyers unable to enter the region without care, so that the European nation became confused and had to find where to meet the need for spices commodities.

    In the end, the Europeans began to conduct oceanic expeditions with the aim of finding various regions in the Asian continent and its surroundings which would then be used as an area of ​​power.

    Imperialism can be divided into royal or liberal imperialism, semi-royal or semi-liberal imperialism, etc.

    In principle, imperialism is an ideology that focuses on developing a territory of power outside its territory by seizing territory from other countries through war or peace or by occupying territories that do not have a master.

    Based on some previous explanations, it can be concluded that the understanding of imperialism is a system that is carried out to dominate other countries for its own interests.

    What Are the Types of Imperialism?

    Imperialism is a system that when it comes to form and purpose consists of several types. Taken from the book Sari Sejdarah Volume I: Asia-Africa written by Soebantardjo, the following are the types of imperialism.

    1. Based on the Shape

    Imperialism when viewed from the form of the system used is divided into two types, namely:

    • Ancient imperialism, which is the type of imperialism that has the motto gold, glory, gospel as its purpose to find wealth, find success, and spread religion.
    • Modern imperialism, which aims to dominate the economy, such as acquiring areas producing raw materials, acquiring areas to market industrial products, for long-term investment.

    2. Based on the Purpose

    Unlike imperialism based on its form, imperialism based on its purpose is divided into four types, namely:

    • Political imperialism, which is a type of imperialism that aims to control the political life of a country.
    • Economic imperialism, which is a type of imperialism that aims to dominate the economic sector of a country.
    • Cultural imperialism, which is a type of imperialism that aims to dominate the cultural values ​​of a country.
    • Military imperialism, which is a type of imperialism that aims to control the strategic territory of an area to strengthen national defense.

    What Causes Imperialism?

    The desire to seize other areas appears due to several driving factors. Here are the factors that led to the practice of imperialism.

    1. Desire for Jaya

    There is a desire from a nation to become a superpower and the most influential country in the whole world. Therefore, the imperialist countries try to seize other regions and expand their success and power.

    2. Racial Superiority

    The feeling of a nation that the nation is more special when compared to other nations in the world makes some imperialist countries do the imperialism system to fulfill the feeling of pride and increase the self-esteem.

    3. Desire to Spread Ideology and Religion

    One of the things that caused the emergence of the imperialist system is to spread the religion and ideology owned by the imperialist country so that the “mind and soul” of the colonies can also be controlled by the imperialist country.

    4. Place the country less strategically

    A country that has a less strategic and profitable geographical location makes the country have the desire to dominate areas located in more strategic regions.

    5. Economic Factors

    Economic problems are also the main cause of the rise of imperialism, especially modern imperialism. Here are the economic factors that caused the emergence of imperialism:

    • The desire to get wealth from a country.
    • Want to join in world trade.
    • Want to master the trade.
    • The desire to ensure the prosperity of the industry.

    What is the Difference Between Imperialism and Colonialism?

    Imperialism and colonialism have a number of similarities, one of which is to seize the power of a region for profit, while the colonized country becomes very disadvantaged. As mentioned earlier, imperialism and colonialism have a number of similarities, so people consider these two systems to be the same.

    Quoting from the book Dutch Colonialism and Multiculturalism of Medan City Society by Rosmaida Sinaga, colonialism is an effort to expand and dominate an area in order to obtain the greatest profit for the parent country.

    1. Purpose

    If viewed from its purpose, colonialism has the purpose of controlling and using the potential natural resources of its colonial countries. As for imperialism, it aims to instill influence in various areas of the life of the colonized country.

    2. Control

    Colonialism controls various fields, such as politics and economy according to interests, while imperialism controls an area in various fields as a whole both formally and informally.

    3. Sovereignty

    Based on its sovereignty, colonialism seizes the power of the country permanently even to the point of occupying the country, while imperialism is done with power over territories that have been successfully controlled through various mechanisms of sovereignty or indirect control.

    Imperialism and Colonialism in Indonesia

    Indonesia is known as one of the regions that produce spices. Spices are much sought after by Europeans because they are considered to have benefits as a heater and can be used as a food preservative. Apart from the expensive spices, having spices also became a symbol of success for a king at that time. From these factors, many European nations are trying to find a region that produces spices, one of which is Indonesia.

    Things that encourage the arrival of Europeans to Indonesia

    1. Portuguese

    Bartholomeus Diaz explored the ocean until reaching the Cape of Good Hope and South Africa, in 1488. The exploration was continued by Vasco da Gama who reached Gowa (India) in 1498, then returned to Lisboa, Portugal, bringing various spices.

    The Portuguese were even more determined to find sources of spices. For that, the Portuguese continued an expedition to the eastern region led by Alfonso d’Albuquerque to control Malacca. From the expedition, they managed to control Malacca as the center of the spice trade in Southeast Asia on August 10, 1511.

    2. Spain

    The Spaniard who first explored the ocean was Christopher Columbus. In 1492, he sailed west across the Atlantic Ocean, until he finally arrived in the Americas. At that time, Columbus thought that he had reached the area he was going to, namely India. That’s why Columbus named the local people he met as Indians.

    The next exploration was carried out by Magellan from Spain to the southwest region. Crossing the Atlantic Ocean to the southern tip of America, then crossing the Pacific Ocean and landing in the Philippines in 1521. Magellan’s voyage was very influential for the world of science because they succeeded in proving that the earth is round. Magellan’s explorations were later continued by Sebastian del Cano. In 1521, Sebastian del Cano managed to land in Tidore, but their arrival was considered a violation of the Treaty of Tordesillas. To solve both problems, Portugal and Spain made the Treaty of Zaragoza in 1529.

    3. The Netherlands

    In 1596, Cornelis de Houtman managed to land in Banten. The attitude of the Dutch at that time was less than friendly and explicitly tried to monopolize trade in Banten, making the Sultan of Banten angry at that time. As a result, this expedition was a failure. Around the year 1598-1600, Dutch traders started coming back. His arrival this time was led by Jacob van Neck. He managed to land in Maluku with spices. Van Neck’s success caused more and more Dutch traders to come to Indonesia.

    4. England

    The entry of the British into Indonesia also had the purpose of finding spices. Its leading explorers are Sir Henry Middleton and James Cook. Henry Middleton began exploring in 1604 from England along the waters of Cabo da Roca (Portugal) and the Canary Islands. Henry Middleton continued to the waters of South Africa to the Indian Ocean. He arrived in Sumatra, then went to Banten at the end of 1604. He sailed to Ambon (1605), then to Ternate, as well as Tidore, and got spices, such as pepper and cloves. While James Cook arrived in Batavia in 1770, after coming from Australia.

    The Development of European Power in Indonesia

    Among those nations, the Netherlands is the country that has been in Indonesia the longest. Until finally they came to create a trading company in Indonesia. Even though it has gone bankrupt, until now, this company is listed as one of the companies with the most wealth in the world, you know ! Can Reader guess the name of the company?

    Vereenigde Oostindische Compagnie or better known as VOC is the name of the trading company. The VOC was founded on March 20, 1602 by Johan van Oldenbarnevelt. Its leadership is held by 17 shareholders ( Heeren Zeventien ) based in Amsterdam, the Netherlands. The purpose of VOC formation is:

    1. Avoiding competition among Dutch traders.
    2. Strengthen the Netherlands in competition with other European nations.
    3. Monopolizing the spice trade in Indonesia.

    The existence of the VOC is not only a trading partner, but also a political force. The VOC has octrooi rights, ie making agreements, declaring war with other countries, exercising judicial power, trading monopoly, printing its own currency, collecting taxes, having an army, and building forts. The VOC also has several policies, namely:

    1. Contingent : compulsory tax in the form of land products paid directly to the VOC.
    2. Verplichte leverantie : compulsory delivery of produce at a price determined by the VOC. This policy applies to colonies that are not directly controlled by the VOC, such as the Sultanate of Mataram.
    3. Extirpation : cutting down the excess amount of plants so that the production is not excessive, so that the price can be maintained.
    4. Hongi Cruise: A kora-kora boat cruise to monitor the cultivation and trade of spices by farmers.

    In 1799, the VOC experienced bankruptcy due to many VOC officials committing corruption, incurring debts due to the war, as well as the moral decline of the officials. With the dissolution of the VOC, its power in Indonesia was then taken over by the government of the Dutch kingdom which at the time was controlled by France.

    What is meant by Anti-Imperialism and Colonialism?

    The many forms of power struggles make some regions in the world carry out anti-imperialism movements as a form of resistance to the ideology. Anti-imperialism and colonialism is a form of opposition to the system of imperialism and colonialism that exists in the world.

  • Understanding Imperialism and Colonialism: Background and Impact

    Understanding Imperialism and Colonialism – Around hundreds to thousands of years ago, there were many countries that colonized other countries. The purpose of the colonial state is very clear, that is to control and even expand its territory. Many colonial countries continue to seize their resources, both natural and human resources. So, the colonial state became stronger by controlling strategic places from a region.

    The beginning arose from the desire to dominate other regions at the time of the fall of Constantinople. Constantinople was a strategic location for trade and the Ottoman Turks wanted to conquer it. In the end, merchants and buyers could no longer enter the city. Ottoman Turkey is a name for the rulers and military of the Turkish sultanate, while Constantinople is the capital of the Roman Empire and is the largest and even the most prosperous city in Europe.

    After the fall of Constantinople, the European nation became no longer able to meet the commodities of spices, even though at that time the price of spices was very high in Europe. Then the European nation also saw Indonesia, because with the existence of Indonesia as a country that produces the best spices, it was heard by the European nation. Until then, the country of Indonesia became a place for Europeans to buy spices and to meet their needs.

    In addition to the country of Indonesia having many of the best and abundant spices, the people are also friendly and very good at welcoming Europeans who come. Because of that, there were a lot of fleets belonging to European nations that stopped in Indonesia. This incident will be very closely related to the explanation of the meaning of colonialism and imperialism.

    Understanding Colonialism and Western Imperialism

    1. The meaning of colonialism

    Colonialism is derived from the word Colony, colony according to Latin is a settlement. An effort made by the ruling countries in order to dominate an area or region in order to obtain resources is called colonialism.

    Colonialism is generally done by countries that have strong military power. Examples are Dutch, Spanish, Portuguese, and English. Those countries have managed to dominate other countries which include Indonesia.

    2. Understanding of Imperialism

    Further, for Imperialism itself is a term derived from the word “imperator” which means to rule. So, Imperialism is a system in the political world that aims to dominate other countries while gaining power and profit from the countries it controls. Imperialism itself has been around since the 19th century, initially sparked by Benjamin Disraeli who was the British Prime Minister at the time.

    Imperialism itself is actually divided into 2, based on time and purpose, namely:

    Imperialism based on time:

    • Ancient imperialism, which has emerged before the industrial revolution in England motivated by 3G, namely Gold, Glory, and Gospel.
    • Modern imperialism, emerged after the industrial revolution. Happened due to economic factors and industrial needs at that time.

    Imperialism based on purpose:

    • Political imperialism, to be able to dominate the entire political life of a country
    • Economic imperialism, to dominate the economic sector of other countries
    • Cultural imperialism, to be able to dominate the values ​​of a country’s culture
    • Military imperialism, to dominate other countries because it is considered to have strategic and strong territories that can strengthen a defense

    Background of Colonialism and Imperialism in Indonesia

    Colonialism and imperialism have long been carried out by the European nation even since the 15th century all over the world, until it finally entered the archipelago. At that time, the background of Europeans entering the archipelago had several reasons, such as the fall of Constantinople in the Mediterranean by the Ottoman Turks in 1453, the decline of the economy and even European trade until the industrial revolution.

    It should be known that colonialism and modern imperialism emerged after the industrial revolution with the aim of being able to develop the European economy. The industrial revolution that made the European nation make a ship that it used to explore the ocean in search of resources in other countries. In addition to that, the mission was also done to live the spirit of the Crusades.

    Until in that effort, the European nation that began to spread throughout the world, in the end colonialism and imperialism in Indonesia also happened. On the other hand, the fall of Constantinople to the Ottoman Turks in 1453, which caused the access of Europeans to get cheaper spices in the Mediterranean Sea became closed and thus made the price of spices in Europe increase sharply. Europeans who were then encouraged to search for and eventually found regions that produced spices to a new region in eastern Europe.

    So that in the end they are more and more ambitious to dominate various countries in order to seize their economic profits as well as their political success, especially in regions such as the Indonesian environment which is the location of the production of spices, such as nutmeg, cloves, pepper, and others. The spices produced in the country of Indonesia eventually encouraged them to be able to do colonialism and imperialism because spices at that time became a very popular commodity in Europe. Europeans who later referred to the archipelago as India.

     

    List of Countries that Implemented Colonialism and Imperialism in the Past

    List of Countries Practicing Imperialism

    1. Spain

    It can be mentioned that Spain became the first European nation along with Portugal to open trade routes to India. Spain will dominate the territory of the Philippines, Mexico, the Caribbean, Florida, and many more.

    2. English

    The focus of British power was on India and the east coast of North America. After the year 1800, England began to dominate many countries until it became the largest empire in the world. Just mention Australia, Malaya, Egypt, and others.

    3. The Netherlands

    Compared to the territory of other European countries, the Netherlands is a country that has a relatively small source of military power. Although the Dutch state does not want to divide its government with the local community, its position is very strong. Until now the Dutch control the East Indies, South Africa, Suriname, and Guyana.

    List of Countries Practicing Imperialism

    1. Soviet Union

    Many of the countries in Eastern Europe have been successfully controlled by them after the victory of World War II. The country also formed a subordinate state to counter the western bloc and joined the Warsaw Pact.

    2. The Japanese Empire

    Looking at the number of territories that have been successfully conquered by the Japanese Empire in World War II provides evidence that Japan’s power is very great. This country also created a Manchukuo puppet to claim that the Chinese plain is its own.

    3. French Republic

    During the revolution, France waged war on European monarchies. This country also managed to conquer the Netherlands. In addition, the Rhine Plain region and Spain have a puppet state that is under the rule of the French empire.

     

    The impact of the development of colonialism and imperialism in Indonesia

    The arrival of Westerners to Indonesia has brought many changes to the lives of its people. There are many remnants of the West that exist to this day, as an example of education.

    The development of education in Indonesia itself has been there since the West entered. In addition to education, there are still many other influences from the arrival of western nations into Indonesia in terms of politics, social, economy, and even culture.

    1. Political-Government Field

    The arrival from the West itself provided a change in the political system of government. With the government system that was initially the government system slowly changed to become like the western system. This can be seen from the reign of Governor General Daendels who divided Dutch power in Java into 9 provinces and 30 regencies.

    The head of government from each province is called a prefect. Each regency and regency is led by a Regent who is appointed from among the natives. This regent himself is still there to this day.

    In the Regency government itself, in addition to the Regent is also assisted by a patih. Each region of the Regency is divided into districts, which are led by a Wedana.

    Then this district was further divided into Onderdistrik led by assistant wedana, which until now is called subdistrict. Then there are villages.

    Continuing Daendels was then appointed a Governor named General Raffles. During his reign, Java was divided into 16 Residents, each of which was led by a Resident and assisted by Resident assistants. A system that has been brought since the time of Daendels will continue to experience development and improvement. During the Dutch colonial period, this Raffles system was improved again, which united all the Dutch powers in 1905 called the Pax Neerlandica.

    2. Economic field

    In addition to reforming the political sphere of government, the Netherlands also made changes to the traditional economic system. The lands that originally belonged to the kings were later transferred to the government. This is of course very much in line with the early principles of the Netherlands which wanted to accumulate wealth.

    The government that applies the tax system and the price from the sale of farmers’ land has also been determined by the colonial rulers. By carrying out the transfer of land ownership, the government is free to do anything with the land, including renting it out to the private sector. So that the government can get additional taxes from the private sector to be able to continue filling the government coffers.

    In 1828, from within the banking system that had begun to enter Indonesia. The first bank was De Javasche Bank. So that the economic system of money will also grow more and more. The Dutch government also built port centers for the benefit of trade.

    In addition to that, plantations will also continue to grow, which for the crops are also very abundant. In order to facilitate the transportation of crops, the Netherlands created a railway line. This railway line was also made to be able to develop the transportation system, as well as connect it to the port.

    So with the availability of facilities and infrastructure that can be very helpful, the Dutch economy in Indonesia is also growing rapidly. The revenue that can be achieved by the government is increasingly filling the Dutch coffers.

    However, from the changes in the system, it can also be beneficial for the Indonesian nation. The results of the expansion can even be seen and used to this day, such as trains, highways, ports, banking systems, and the money system.

    3. Social-Cultural Field

    The arrival of Europeans themselves to Indonesia will also influence the cultural field. Some of these influences are for example in architecture, the way of dressing, music, and even others. However, due to the influence of the West, it was certainly not accepted easily by the people, and was adapted back to the local culture. So that in the end a new culture emerges.

    In the society of the indigenous community itself, during the period of Western domination, it has always been a group that is at the bottom. So, the natives must submit and obey the West.

    The West itself sees white people as the highest group in the social caste. Foreign Orientals are the second group. While the natives are a third or lowest group. This was done again to instill a thought among the indigenous people, that they are not better than Westerners.

    So that in the end they have to submit, cannot fight against the West. That thought is deliberately indoctrinated into the community, so that they will not rebel. In addition to the negative impact, the West also brought Christianity into Indonesia. So as to increase religious diversity in Indonesia.

    In the community’s own culture, their lifestyle is increasingly shifting, especially the upper class natives. Western style has begun to influence the lifestyle of the community, for example in the style of clothing. The change in dress style is not only to improve the social strata in the community, but it is done for the sake of employment.

    Indigenous women began to get to know the use of dresses in parties, lace dresses, and sleepwear. As for the men themselves, they started to get used to wearing suits at parties and in doing their jobs.

    You can learn about Why? World War I & II That Shook Up The World

    by Park Gyeong-eun

    4. Field of Education

    With the entry of western nations into Indonesia, education is growing in a more advanced direction. It cannot be separated from the existence of reciprocation politics or Ethical Politics carried out by the West, especially with the Dutch Colonial Government. This system appeared as a form of protest from the Dutch liberals who wanted to criticize the Dutch Colonial Government which had been judged to oppress the people.

    With the spread of the situation of the oppressed Indonesian people, it will not be separated from the figures, one of whom is named Multatuli, who has created a book about the state of society at that time, entitled Max Havelaar. In addition, there is also an article about “Debt of Honor” with Van Deventer that has been published in the Dutch magazine, de Gids. In the writing it is written that the Dutch owe the Indonesian nation for all the wealth they have obtained, so it needs to be paid back for the well-being of the natives.

    Van Deventer’s thinking was eventually known as ethische politiek or Ethical Politics, which focused on three things, namely population transfer, education, and irrigation. So in 1901, Queen Wilhelmina informed about welfare research in Java and that policy was confirmed.

    Education in Ethical Politics

    Since ethical politics was applied in Indonesia, the influence that became very large was in the field of education. At the beginning this education was used to produce government workforce and only for Dutch citizens and nobles, but eventually people’s schools are also growing.

    These schools are named Europese Lagere School (ELS), Hoogere Burgerlijk School (HBS), STOVIA or medical school, and so on. For the natives, there is a First Class school that is reserved for the upper classes. As for the people, a Second Class school (Ongko Loro School) is provided.

    With the development of the field of education among the natives, it also evokes the emergence of a sense of national consciousness to be able to carry out the liberation of the country. The emergence of an educated group among the youth.

    Most of these activists are from schools in STOVIA or the Javanese Doctor’s School. With the expansion of education and the emergence of educated young people, their sense of nationalism is also spreading among the Indonesian nation.

    So in the end there was also a national awareness that grew with the Youth Pledge held on October 28, 1928. With the emergence of the national movement organizations. From that moment on, in the struggle for independence of the Indonesian Nation, it is not only to be achieved through physical means, but can be achieved through organizational struggle and diplomacy in the international sphere.

  • Understanding Imitation: Impact, Stages, and Examples of Imitation in Social Interaction

    Understanding Imitation – Social interaction can occur due to the presence of several driving factors. One of them is imitation, i.e. imitating the behavior of other people or parties. More fully, the understanding of imitation is the behavior that a person performs through observing the behavior shown from other objects when he will gain new knowledge about a behavior he observes and tries to imitate the behavior.

    In other words, the process of imitation does not happen by itself. Before a person imitates or imitates another person, first he accepts, admires, and holds in high esteem the person being imitated or imitated. Something that is imitated in this imitation behavior can be anything, such as behavior, lifestyle, appearance, norms, values, knowledge, and so on. Through imitation, a person learns values ​​and norms in society or vice versa, he learns actions that deviate from the prevailing values ​​and norms.

    All that depends on the values ​​that occur in the environment. When a person is equipped with good values ​​and principles, he will certainly imitate things that are good and beneficial for his life. On the other hand, someone who is not equipped with good values ​​and principles will imitate bad things.

    Meaning of Imitation

    Imitation or imitating is a process of cognition to perform actions and actions as done by the model by involving the senses as receivers of stimuli and the installation of perceptual abilities to process information from stimuli with the ability of actions to perform motor movements. This process involves a high level of cognitive ability because it not only involves language but also understanding other people’s thoughts.

    Imitation is currently studied from various scientific points of view such as psychology, neurology, cognitive, artificial intelligence, animal studies , anthropology, economics, sociology and philosophy. This is related to the function of imitation in learning, especially in children, as well as the human ability to interact socially until the decline of culture in the next generation.

    In real life, this imitation is related to social life, so it is not too much to say that the whole social life is internalized in the child based on the imitation factor. Thus, in general, imitation is a social process or a person’s action to imitate another person through attitude, appearance, lifestyle, even anything owned by another person (Sasmita, 2011).

    Sarsito (2010) says imitation is a process of cognition to perform actions and actions as has been done by the model by involving the senses as receivers of stimuli and the installation of perceptual abilities to process information from stimuli, with the ability of actions to perform motor movements.

    Some of the concepts of imitation above are in line with the view of Barlow (2003), who says imitation is mostly done by humans through the presentation of behavioral examples (modelling), which is the learning process that occurs when a person observes and imitates the behavior of others. Meanwhile, according to Bandura (2007), imitation is behavior that is produced when someone sees a model or another person doing something in a certain way and getting consequences from that behavior.

    The party doing the imitation will imitate exactly the actions done by the imitated party, without thinking about the purpose of the imitation. As for the behavior that is imitated according to Soekanto (2005) it can take the form of appearance ( performance ), attitude ( attitude ), behavior ( behavior ), lifestyle ( life style ) of the imitated party.

    However, imitation does not happen directly but requires an attitude of acceptance, and an attitude of admiration towards what is being imitated. Through imitation, a person learns values ​​and norms in society or otherwise he learns an act that deviates from the prevailing values ​​and norms. Both children and adults learn many things from observation and imitation.

    Observations made by individuals produce an imitation behavior that is seen by the people around them, so that behavior arises. That is in line with the opinion of Bandura (2006) who says that human behavior should be linked to responses that can be observed. The behavior is the result of observing the individual in his environment. Especially in children as the best imitators, children always observe behavior that appears from the environment, especially the family.

    Based on several definitions of imitation that have been presented above, it can be concluded that imitation is a behavior produced by someone by imitating or watching other individuals do something, both in the form of appearance, attitude, behavior and lifestyle of the imitated party. In this case, imitation behavior is more visible to children, especially in the family environment through direct observation.

    1. Psychological Studies of Imitation

    Imitation should be distinguished from imitation of the same movement (mimicry) or imitation of a goal (emulation), but in the process of imitation, humans perform the principle of imitation of an action by understanding the purpose of the action and being directed by the achievement of the target goal (goal ) .

    Imitation is often associated with social learning theory from Albert Bandura. In addition to imitation, it is said that children form their theory of mind through imitation of other people’s actions as well as perception of stimuli received from their environment.

    2. Neuroscience Studies

    The discovery of the mirror neuron system in macaque monkeys published in 1996 by Giacomo Rizzolati from the University of Parma in Italy provides neurological evidence that imitation is important.

    The mirror nervous system is the nerve of animals and humans that lights up when performing an action or witnessing the same action performed by another animal or human. The mirror nervous system (SSC) is located in the precortex of the brain. This SSC helps to understand the actions performed by others, making it possible to imitate.

    Factors in Imitation

    Imitation does not happen automatically but is influenced by the attitude of accepting what is observed. There are several factors that cause someone to engage in imitation behavior, as follows:

    1. Psychological Factors

    In order to imitate or copy there are other psychological factors that play a role, one of which is the cognitive aspect. That is how people think about things and interpret various experiences gained. In addition, this aspect also explains that new and complex behavior can be created by observing or seeing a model that he sees directly or indirectly. Until someone does an imitation.

    According to Mussen and Conger (1984), imitation can occur as a response to a desire to be similar to others or a desire to achieve certain goals. The attitude that is imitated during the first three years of life, depends partly on the level of cognitive development of the child that determines any behavior that a child catches as a challenge that is not impossible.

    The motivation to be similar to others and the level of emotion that is influenced by others, determines who will be imitated by the child, as well as the motivation in achieving the goal of determining what will be imitated.

    2. Family Environment

    Imitation has been going on since the individual was young and started from the family environment. For children, the family environment is the most influential environment, after that the school, then the community. Family is the smallest environment built by parents together with other family members.

    The formation of a child’s nature or character is related to socialization or a process of inculcating values ​​and rules from parents to children. Cultivating those values, such as factors that motivate children to behave religiously. At first, children see the activities done by their parents.

    When the child likes that, the child will imitate without knowing the essence of the act, so that the child’s motivation to imitate arises. That of course happened because at the time of the prime imitator, the child already had interests and desires but was not yet able to express those interests and desires properly (Jalaludin, 2010). A child’s interest and desire can only be seen through his gestures and behavior

    3. Mass Media

    Imitation will continue to expand to a wider environment, namely society. Imitation in society is accelerating with the development of time media, such as television shows. In the era of communication, time media can be added as a very influential factor more than others, because it is seen continuously and repeatedly.

    A show is a message or series of messages in the form of voice, graphics, characters, whether interactive or not, that can be received through a message receiving device and ready to be shown (Kurniasih, 2004).

    4. Social Interaction with Peers

    Not only through time media, but social interaction or peers are also very influential in children’s imitation. Interaction with peers in the interaction process has an important role, especially in imitation in aspects of religious behavior.

    This is explained by Nurhayati (2007), peer interaction has an important role in children’s religiosity through two things as follows:

    • Through the interaction of peers, the child will know whether his behavior that has been formed based on the standard of religiosity in the family can be accepted or rejected by his environment.
    • Peer interaction will motivate children to only behave appropriately that can be accepted by their environment.

    Imitation Impact

    Citing the book Social Science Sociology Volume 1 by Tim Mitra Guru (2007), there are two impacts caused by imitation behavior, namely positive and negative impacts.

    1. Positive Impact

    Imitation can encourage a person to do and fulfill the prevailing norms or rules so that a harmonious, harmonious, stable, and orderly society is created. For example, following the style of a famous singer, imitating the healthy lifestyle of other people, and so on.

    2. Negative Impact

    The negative impact of imitation occurs if it can encourage someone to oppose the prevailing norms or rules. In this case, imitation can weaken the development of a person’s creativity. For example, a person imitates the lifestyle of his idol rock star by wearing earrings, using illegal drugs, etc.

    Levels of Imitation

    Imitation is the process of imitating the behavior of a model, so it is also called the modeling process. This can be applied to all types of behavior that have a strong tendency to imitate. This process is not done to everyone but to certain figures such as famous people, people who have power, successful people, or people who are often found.

    The figure that usually becomes the model is the old man himself. However, according to Tarde (2010), before people imitate something, several conditions must first be met, namely:

    • Have a big enough interest/attention about it.
    • Admiring or admiring things to be imitated.
    • Want to gain social recognition as imitated.

    Imitation is often associated with the theory of social learning from Bandura, because social learning is known as observational learning or learning from models, which is a learning process that emerges from observation, mastery of the imitation learning process, and imitation of other people’s behavior. In imitation there is a process of learning to copy or make a model of the actions of others through observation of that person. In social learning theory, individuals learn not through conditioning, but through observation.

    As already explained, imitative behavior is usually caused by the interest, actions, attention, or admiration of the other party. Quoted from the journal Relationship Between Celebrity Worship and Imitation Behavior in Teenagers by Yolanda Bilqis Sherly (2019), those factors then develop into imitation which is done with the following stages:

    1. Attention _

    The first is to pay attention. That is, in order to be able to perform imitation actions, a person is motivated by observing the model or imitation object first. From there, it can perform the same behavior from the imitated object.

    Individuals can learn through observation when there are models that are presented directly or indirectly, and accurately there are aspects that are relevant to the model’s activities. New responses can be learned by looking, listening and paying attention to other people, so attention in this matter becomes very important.

    But as is known, not all the models presented will get the attention of individuals. Therefore, in order to be able to observe and learn from the model, it is necessary to direct and increase his attention. The method used is not always the same for everyone, for example children differ from adults in directing attention. However, in general, to increase attention, rewards and highlighting the quality of the model can be used, for example, the model has a certain appeal.

    2. Retention ( Retention )

    After the activity of the model is observed, the subject performs a retention process by storing the memory of the model seen, then stored in his memory. However, not all the information from the model will be saved by it. Usually, what is stored is information that attracts the subject’s attention and interest.

    3. Behavior Formation ( Behavior Formation )

    Things that have been learned and stored in memory by the subject from the imitated model will then be translated through action or behavior.

    4. Motivation _

    The last stage is the stage of acceptance of encouragement that can function as reinforcement. Reinforcement can be used as a motivator to stimulate and maintain behavior in order to be actualized in life.

    Examples of Imitation

    To better understand what imitation is, here are some examples of positive and negative imitation that often occur in everyday life.

    1. Examples of Positive Imitation

    • Copy the clothing style of idol artists.
    • Imitate the singing style of other singers.
    • Imitate the learning habits of other students in order to get a better final grade.
    • Imitate basketball game tactics from famous basketball clubs.
    • A mother imitates another mother who is successful in educating her children.
    • A student imitates the behavior of his teacher who is very disciplined in dividing time.
    • Modeling the development of urban planning from other countries.

    2. Examples of Negative Imitation

    • Imitating the habit of drinking alcohol and free association between young men and women.
    • Copying other people’s work, either in the form of cheating, stealing copyright, or plagiarism.
    • Imitating the habit of speeding on the road to the point of disturbing the comfort of other road users.
    • Imitating the habit of smoking.
    • Imitating a style of dress that is contrary to the prevailing norms or rules.
    • Using mobile phones while studying in class.

     

  • The Meaning of Immigration: Its Occurrence Factors, Types and Roles in National Sovereignty

    Understanding Immigration – In the current era of globalization, this means that there is no space and time limit for each individual to relocate.

    In any country, there must be rules regarding the immigration process for Foreign Nationals (WNA). This immigration process is a kind of authorization done by individuals before entering the territory of another country.

    So, what exactly is the meaning of immigration? How is the legislation governing immigration in Indonesia? Let’s discuss together!

    Understanding Immigration

    Etymologically, the terms emigration, immigration, and transmigration are both derived from the Latin language meaning displacement of people.

    A brief definition of immigration is the movement of people from one country to another. A person who does immigration activities is called an immigrant.

    This immigration activity is of course regulated by the laws that apply to all immigrants or foreigners in Indonesia. Even the legislation has given its own definition of what immigration is.

    According to article 1 paragraph 1 in Law Number 6 of 2011 on Immigration, what is meant by immigration is ” the right of traffic of people entering or leaving the territory of the Republic of Indonesia as well as its supervision in order to maintain the sovereignty of the State .”

    Based on the definition of the law, it can be deduced that there are two important regulatory elements, namely:

    1. Arrangements on various matters concerning the traffic of people entering, exiting, and staying from and into the territory of the Republic of Indonesia.
    2. Arrangements on various matters regarding the supervision of foreigners in the territory of the Republic of Indonesia.

    In addition, the International Conference on Emigration and Immigration held in Rome in 1924, gave a definition of immigration which is ” a movement of people entering a country with the intention of earning a living and settling there. 

    The immigrant identity check process (TPI) is usually carried out at ports, airports, or certain places that have been designated by the previous government as entry or exit points to Indonesian territory.’

    Immigrants who violate the provisions of the Immigration legislation will of course receive appropriate sanctions and penalties.

    Another element in the immigration process is the supervision of Foreign Nationals (WNA) who enter and reside in Indonesian territory. The supervision is done to control or monitor the existence of the foreigner until the activities of the foreigner are in accordance with the applicable Immigration provisions or not.

    Driving Factors for Immigration

    1. Economic Factors

    Economic factors are usually one of the reasons why individuals or groups of individuals do immigration activities. Immigrants usually have the idea that by doing immigration they will open up opportunities to advance their own economic well-being or perhaps it can be called earning a living in other people’s countries.

    2. In the country itself, the economic standard is low

    As a result of the decline in the economy of their country of origin, immigrants will flock to immigrate with the aim of improving the standard of living system.

    The countries that are used as the destination for immigrants are Germany and some other European countries. This is because in that country there is economic prosperity to obtain a better life.

    3. Socio-Cultural Factors

    Social and cultural factors also play an important role in the process of encouraging immigrants to do immigration activities. For example in the country of Korea which has a K-Pop culture and is loved by the world community, causing many immigrants to immigrate to the country because they are attracted to its K-Pop culture.

    4. Political Stability Factor

    Politics is closely related to the way of government in a country. If the politics in a country is less stable, it will make its people “migrate” to other countries. For example, in the case of immigrants from Afghanistan due to the government being taken over by the Taliban.

    Factors Attracting Immigration

    1. There is hope to gain opportunities in improving the standard of living
    2. There is an opportunity to get a better education
    3. Environmental conditions and living conditions that are considered more pleasant. For example climate, schools, public facilities, etc.
    4. There are activities in big cities and places of entertainment.

    Types of Immigration Violations

    Violations in the field of immigration that are often committed by foreign nationals, namely:

    1. Abusing the residence permit owned
    2. Being in Indonesian territory by using a fictitious sponsor
    3. Not reporting any changes in civil status, domicile address, employment, and sponsor to the local Immigration Office
    4. Entering Indonesian territory using a fake visa and passport that does not belong to him
    5. Applying for a passport using a false identity
    6. Involved in a network of human trafficking syndicates
    7. Drug smuggling

    The Role of Immigration in National Sovereignty

    Operationally, the role of immigration in Indonesia always contains three functions, namely the community service function, the security function, and the law enforcement function.

    1. Community Service Functions

    In this first function, the aspect demanded in immigration activities is excellent service in the field of Immigration, both to Indonesian Citizens (WNI) and Foreign Nationals (WNA).

    Services for Indonesian citizens usually include

    • issuance of passports,
    • Passport Validation Travel Letter (SPLP),
    • Cross Border Pass (PLB), and
    • giving signs to leave or enter.

    Meanwhile, services for foreign nationals include the granting and extension of Immigration Documents (DOKIM) in the form of:

    • Limited Residence Permit Card (KITAS),
    • Permanent Residence Permit Card (KITAP),
    • Special Immigration Facility (DAHSUSKIM),
    • extension of visit visa,
    • granting permission to re-enter or leave and
    • the signer leaves or enters.

    2. Law Enforcement Functions

    In Immigration duties, the entire rules of immigration law must be enforced for every individual in Indonesian territory, whether they are Indonesian Citizens (WNI) or immigrants.

    The law is aimed at avoiding the problem of false identity, sponsor liability, ownership of multiple sponsors, up to the violation of immigration rules.

    While law enforcement against Foreign Nationals (WNA) is usually on the problem of:

    • falsify identity
    • registration of foreigners and the issuance of foreigner surveillance books
    • misuse of residence permit
    • enter Indonesian territory illegally
    • and others.

    In the case of law enforcement, this has a pro-justicia nature, that is, where the authority of the investigation, includes investigative tasks (summoning, arrest, detention, inspection, search, and seizure) related to filing cases and submitting case files to the public prosecutor.

    3. Security Functions

    Immigration can function as a gatekeeper in a country. This is because immigration is the first and last institution that “screens” the arrival and departure of foreigners to Indonesian territory.

    For Indonesian citizens (WNI), the implementation of this security function is carried out by preventive measures to leave the country.

    While for Foreign Nationals, the implementation of the security function is done with the following things:

    • Examination of visa applications in order to select against each purpose for the arrival of foreigners.
    • Collaborating with the security apparatus of other countries in providing supervision regarding the enforcement of immigration laws.
    • Conduct immigration intelligence operations for national security
    • Preventing and countering violations in the field of immigration.

     

    The Role of Immigration Against the Threat of Terrorism

    Acts of terrorism are part of transnational crimes that are carried out in an organized manner that threaten national and international peace and security.

    Prevention of terrorism can be done with the immigration process. How do you do that?

    Because in the immigration process, there is surveillance that limits the right to freedom of movement abroad as well as entering the country. So, from the restriction it is hoped to be able to break the link between the terrorism network abroad and the terrorism network within the country.

    Even with the immigration process, there will be attempts to revoke passports and citizenships for perpetrators of terrorism, as has been arranged in Article 12b paragraph 1 of the Law.

    In addition, based on article 12A paragraph 1 which reads ” any person who intentionally and against the law enters into contact with any person who is in the country and/or abroad or a foreign country will commit or commit a criminal act of terrorism in Indonesia or in the country other, shall be punished with a minimum imprisonment of 3 (three) years and a maximum of 12 (twelve) years”

    Based on the article, it is clear that anyone who commits acts of terrorism will face the law through the immigration process, to prevent them from “running away” to other countries.

    Immigration has the principle of selective policy and an important immigration intelligence function. The two elements became a great collaboration in an effort to counter the flow of non-military threats entering Indonesian territory.

    An example is the case of the arrest of 4 Foreign Nationals (WNA) of Chinese origin at the Bogor Regency Immigration Office. The foreigner was arrested because the immigration (intelligence) department analyzed the existence of a case of drug cultivation in the Bogor region by Chinese nationals.

    In addition, there is also a case of malpractice committed by a foreign doctor, Randall Cafferty, at the First Chiropractic Clinic, Pondok Indah Mall. The foreign doctor killed a local patient. The immigration authorities can examine and interview the foreign doctor because he applied for a visa at the representative office abroad, so that the case can be resolved by the authorities.

     

  • Meaning of Yield, Formula, and How to Calculate it

    Knowing the Definition of Yield, Formula, and How to Calculate It – In a business there are various terms used to name the business activity such as this time it is a term about yield or profit sharing from an investor after investing in a long term.

    In an investment, understanding the terms of yield is quite important so that Reader friends who want to start investing know about how the investment works, its benefits, and the correct calculation method. Because it will affect the profit that Reader friends will get in an investment.

    Yield (English), or yield, is the benefit of investment instruments given to investors during a certain period of time. Income can include income and profit from price increases. The result is usually expressed as a percentage (%).

    In mutual funds, performance is shown by the change in net asset value (NAV) of mutual funds. A positive return indicates that the net worth of the investment fund has increased compared to the net worth at the time of purchase. However, a negative return indicates a decrease in net worth.

    For that, all Reader friends, especially those who want to start investing in stocks, need to find out what important elements are needed to invest successfully. Well, in this discussion we have also summarized the terms of yield, the formula, and the correct way to calculate it.

    Further, we will present the discussion below!

    Definition of Shares

    Before understanding how the yield system works in a stock fund for the benefit of investors, it is good that we also understand the meaning of the stock itself fundamentally. For that let’s take a look at the meaning of shares below!

    Shares are proof of ownership of the company’s value. The word stock itself is taken from the Arabic language. In fiqh literature, shares are taken from the term musahamah which comes from the word sahm (Arabic: سهم‎), the plural form of ashum or suhmah which means part, share of ownership.. The more shares you have, the greater the power you have in the company. By issuing shares, it is possible for companies that need long-term financing to “sell” their business property – shares (equity effect) – for money, which, in addition to issuing bonds, is the main means of obtaining business capital. Shares are sold through the primary or secondary market. Stocks are one of the most popular financial market instruments. Issuance of shares is one of the company’s choices in deciding on company financing.

    Shares can be interpreted as proof of capital participation of a person or party (business entity) in a company or limited company. With the participation of this capital, the political party has a claim on the company’s income, a claim on the company’s property and the right to participate in the general meeting (GMS).

    Definition of Yield

    The yield is the profit that can be obtained from the investment made during a certain period of time and following a certain process. Another name for yield is yield or return.

    Return, or often return, is the profit obtained from an investment during a certain period of time or after a certain process. Revenue and return are terms that usually refer to nominal income. However, return is profit, usually expressed as In essence, return is a term that refers to the return on investment – ​​nominally. Meanwhile, yield is a term that refers to profit in the form of a percentage.

    Yield is a term often used to refer to the profit obtained from investing in stocks. More specifically, return is a measure of profit or profit that investors receive from investing in a product over a certain period of time. Generally, returns are calculated per year, although some also calculate monthly returns. In addition, the yield is usually also reflected from the historical price increase of the stock. Thus, yield can be your consideration when deciding to buy an investment asset, one of which is shares. Then how to calculate income? As previously explained, the rate of return is the percentage obtained by dividing the income received by the invested capital. So the formula to calculate the return is simple: Return = Return/Capital Value x 100 percent For example, if you invest with equity instruments, the return you get can consist of two things. The first comes from rising stock prices and the second from dividend-paying issuers or companies whose shares you own.

    What is meant and how to calculate it: If the income you receive from an increase in share prices, for example from Rp 1000 to Rp 1200 per share. In addition, dividends, for example, 20 pieces per share received in one year. The revenue or income received consists of the increase in the share price and dividends received divided by the share capital value at the time the shares were first purchased. As an example of the calculation in the picture above: Return = (Rp 200 Rp 20)/Rp 1000 = 0.22 Or if you use a percentage, you get a return of 22 percent.

    Types of Returns

    Although higher yields indicate lower risk and higher returns, it is important to know the various indicators that cause investment results to fluctuate. The higher the yield, the greater the possibility of a falling market effect, where the market value will also fall. If the yield is too high, it could mean that your stock price is going down or that the company is paying a large dividend. There are different types of returns that you need to know about. You can consider these different types of returns before making an investment decision.

    • Current Yield

    Current yield is a type of yield for bond instruments. The current yield is the ratio of the coupon rate to the spot price of the loan.

    • The payoff of maturity

    Yield to maturity is the result of bond investment at maturity. It can be said that the yield to maturity is the initial value of the investment that is fully returned to the investor. The calculation formula is to equate the current bond price with the total yield in the future.

    • Yield Dividend yield

    Dividend yield is a percentage of the value of the dividend or dividends distributed and the share price per share. This distribution value can change from time to time. The dividend yield calculation is obtained by dividing the dividend by the current price of the stock.

    • Call Returns

    This definition of return is useful as a return denominator due to the transfer of company shares to all owners. This usually happens in a limited company, which can be called.

    In other words, the company can buy back the shares it needs from investors. You simply use the following formula to calculate this type of return.

    Yield t= [profit + (latest bond value – bond value at purchase) / tenor until stock calling] / [(bond value at purchase + bond value at latest) / 2] x 100%

    • Worst yield

    If this yield is the type of yield applied is used to return to the investor. This usually happens because investors call back before expiration.

    To get the worst returns, we recommend taking the lowest value between the return and return periods. So there is no need for formulas such as income or other income, this is a discussion about the meaning of income from definitions, calculations into formulas. If you are interested in the worst returns, make a simple investment by becoming a lender on the Amartha microfinance market. Earn up to 15% flat per year!

    In addition to income, you can also contribute to supporting Indonesian SMEs by influencing access to capital in a positive way, starting from just Rp 100,000.

    The relationship between risk and return

    From the explanation of the definition of yield that has been explained above, it can be known that yield is usually closely related to investment risk. Risk is an important part of the return paid on an investment.

    In general, the relationship between risk and investment return is such that the greater the potential risk of an investment, the greater the potential return of the investment. For example, stocks tend to carry higher risk than bonds, so stocks have a relatively higher return potential than bonds.

    Return on Investment

    The return on invested capital can vary depending on the type of investment instrument you choose. In the following, we will explain the types of returns owned by various types of investment instruments.

    • Obligation proceeds

    Bond yield is the expected yield from an interest-bearing investment over a specified period of time. Bond yield is usually expressed as a percentage or interest.

    • Return Investment fund income

    Unlike obligations, the return of investment funds is the return that is returned to investors in the form of interest and dividends produced by investment funds. Mutual fund performance is usually expressed as a percentage based on total earnings per share divided by the net worth of the shares.

    Investment fund managers can use different methods to calculate returns to investors. Therefore, every prospective investor should consult the prospectus to see where the figures come from.

    The higher the performance of the mutual fund, the more attractive the mutual fund is in the eyes of investors. This is because the higher the yield of mutual funds, the higher the yield. On the other hand, investors should also anticipate the risks that may occur, because the higher the mutual fund yield, the more risky the type of mutual fund.

    How to Calculate Yield

    The calculation of yield can vary depending on the purpose and type. In short, the calculation will depend on the respective investment instrument. Below is a general way to calculate yield.

    Yield = profit / principal x 100%

    For example, you buy a share at a price of Rp.900 per share, then sell it in the next few years at a price of Rp.1,000 per share. This means you earn a nominal profit of Rp.100.

    In addition, on the investment you get a dividend at a price of IDR 10 for each share. Well, how does the calculation work? This is the answer to the yield example.

    Yield = (Rp100 + Rp10)/Rp900 x 100% = 12.2%

    It should be noted that the discussion of yield calculation method above is general for stock instruments. If you want to be more specific then, find out the formulas based on their own types.

    Average Return on Investment

    The yield value of each investment instrument can be said to be quite variable and depends on the trading market conditions of the relevant asset. For this reason, it is quite difficult to state the average value of bond, mutual fund and crypto investment returns.

    However, when for the estimate. Bond investment yield can vary based on the indicator rate. The following is the highest average Indonesian bond yield 2022 (as of April 28, 2022):

    • Yield on National Bonds, the highest average of 7.87%;
    • Bond yields with AAA indicators have the highest average of 12%;
    • Bond yields with the AA indicator have the highest average of 11.5%;
    • Bond yield with indicator A has the highest average of 12.25%; as well as
    • Finally, the bond yield with the BBB indicator has the highest average value of 13.13%
    • Meanwhile, mutual fund investment returns also vary depending on the type. The following is the highest average mutual fund yield as of April 4, 2022.
    •  
    • Mutual fund yield of 17.91%;
    • Mixed mutual fund yield of 10.89%;
    • The yield of money market mutual funds worth 1.3%; and
    • Lastly, the yield of fixed income mutual funds is 3.48%.

    That’s a complete explanation of what investment yield is, how to calculate the average yield from each investment instrument. Hope the information is useful for you, yes!

    Recently, investors are increasingly attracted to crypto investment assets, including in Indonesia. As of December 2021, the number of crypto investors in Indonesia has even reached 11 million people.

    Make the right strategy for high returns

    Every mutual fund investor wants to get a higher yield. For that, make sure you make the right mutual fund investment strategy. For example, buying and selling at the right time. For example, buy when the price is low and sell when the price is high. So, don’t withdraw money immediately after the investment yield drops.

    Improve your investment skills by learning to invest online or by attending investment training, which is often held by financial media or famous investors. This is how you become a trusted investor.

    Conclusion

    So much for a short discussion about the definition of Income, Formula and How to Calculate it. Not just the definition, but also discussing the role of function in stock investment, how to calculate etc. Understanding the definition of yield makes us as members of the public be more careful when entering the world of stocks so as not to invest randomly and be able to understand the world of stocks better to avoid false investments.

     

  • Meaning of Faith in Language and Terms and Levels

    Meaning of Faith – According to the Islamic view, faith can mean believing and this matter about faith has been written in the Al-Quran, which is the holy book of Muslims. In some letters, such as the letter At-Taubah, Allah has explained about the faith revealed to his people.

    In addition to being mentioned in the Quran, faith is also explained through various hadiths. According to one of the hadiths, faith is a binding of the heart that is done as well as spoken, until it becomes a unity.

    Islamic religious scholars also gave their opinion on the definition of faith. However, before that, Reader need to know the meaning of faith in terms and language. Read to the end of the article!

    Meaning of Faith in Language and Terms

    Faith is a belief believed by a person related to religion, belief and trust in God, the prophet, the book and so on. In Islamic religious teachings, faith means trust, confidence in God, HIS prophets and the book, the Al-Quran and so on.

    According to Islamic teachings, Muslims believe in the six pillars of faith. The six pillars of faith must be believed and trusted by Muslims. However, what is the meaning of faith according to language and terminology?

    Before discussing the meaning of faith from scholars and according to the Quran and hadith. Here is the meaning of faith in language and terms.

    According to the Arabic language, the word faith is rooted in the word amana – yu; minu – imana which literally or etymologically can be interpreted as believing and confident. Linguistically, faith can be interpreted as tashdiq or justify which means almost the same term.

    In terms of terms, according to the book Encyclopedia of Faith written by Shaykh Abdul Majid Az-Zandani, faith can be interpreted according to its linguistic meaning, which is tashdiq or trust.

    Faith in terms, maknawi or terminological is believing with confidence in the existence of God, the Angels of God, His Books, His Messengers, the afterlife, up to qadha and qadar which have been summarized in the pillars of faith according to the teachings of Islam.

    The Meaning of Faith According to the Quran and Scholars

    In the Al-Quran, faith is mentioned with the pronunciation yaqin or believing. As in Surat Al-Baqarah verse 4 and Surat Al-An’am verse 75. Here is a more complete explanation.

    In Surah Al-Baqarah verse 4 

    وَالَّذِيْنَ يُؤْمِنُونَ بِمَآ انْزِلَ عَلَيْكَ وَمَا ُنْزَ مِنْ قْلِكَ ۚ وَبِلْاِٰرَةِ هُمْ ُوْقِنْنَۗ

    Meaning:

    “And those who believe in (the Qur’an) which was revealed to you (Muhammad) and (the books) which were revealed before you, and they believe in the Hereafter.”

    Meanwhile, faith is also mentioned in Surah Al-Anam verse 75: 

    وَكَذٰلِكَ نُرِيْٓ عِبْرهِيْمَ مَلَكُوْتَ السَّمٰوٰتِ وَالْاَرْضِ وَلِيَكُوْنَ مِنَ الْمُوْقِنِيْنَ

    Meaning:

    “And thus, We showed Ibrahim the power (of Us) in the heavens and the earth, and that he be among those who believe.”

    From the two chapters and verses in the Qur’an, the words yaqin and tashdiq are mentioned which mean the practice of the heart. Faith can be interpreted as the speech of the heart that is in the heart and is formed through confidence in the heart.

    Several other chapters in the Quran also mention the faith of a Muslim.

    Surat Al-Baqarah, verse 136

    QS 2:136

    قُوْلُوْٓا اٰمَنَّا بِاللّٰهِ وَمَآ اُنْزِلَ اِلَيْنَا وَمَآ اُنْزِلَ اِلٰٓى اِبْرٰهٖمَ وَاِسْمٰعِيْلَ وَاِسْحٰقَ وَيَعْقُوْبَ وَالْاَسْبَاطِ وَمَآ اُوْتِيَ مُوْسٰى وَعِيْسٰى وَمَآ اُوْتِيَ النَّبِيُّوْنَ مِنْ رَّبِّهِمْۚ لَا نُفَرِّقُ بَيْنَ اَحَدٍ مِّنْهُمْۖ وَنَحْنُ لَهٗ مُسْلِمُوْنَ

    Meaning:

    Say, “We believe in Allah and in what was revealed to us, and in what was revealed to Abraham, Ishmael, Isaac, Jacob and his descendants, and in what was given to Moses and Jesus and in what was given to the prophets from their God. We do not discriminate between any of them, and we submit to Him.”

    Referring to the Surah Al-Baqarah, it can be concluded that the faith believed by Muslims is a belief and conviction embedded in the heart and manifested through words and deeds. The belief refers to the belief in the five pillars of Islam.

    Besides according to the Al-Quran, some scholars also gave their opinion on the definition of faith. Some famous scholars such as Imam Syafii, Imam Ahmad to Imam Bukhari also expressed their opinion.

    According to Imam Syafii , the faith of a Muslim includes his words and actions. faith can increase or decrease. The increase in one’s faith is caused by obedience to God, while the decrease in one’s faith is caused by disobedience.

    Imam Ahmad has an opinion that is not far different from Imam Syafii, Imam Ahmad stated that faith can increase and decrease, increase because a person performs certain practices and decreases because the person abandons the practice.

    Then, Imam Bukhari also added from the two scholars, Imam Bukhari said that after meeting many scholars from various parts of the country, he saw that the scholars’ presentation of faith is words and deeds that can increase and decrease.

    Other scholars such as Imam Malik, Ash Syafi’i, Al Auza’i and Ishaq Bin Rahawai have the same opinion about the meaning of faith. Faith is justification done with the heart, confession verbally, and practiced with the limbs. According to the scholars, charity is one of the elements of faith.

    Companions of the Prophet such as Ali bin Abi Talib believed that faith is speech spoken with the tongue and belief that is believed to be true with the heart and done with the body parts. Like Ali, Aisyah also has the same opinion about the meaning of faith.

    The Meaning of Faith According to Indonesian Scholars

    Scholars in Indonesia such as Ustadz Khalid Basalamah to Ustadz Adi Hidayat also expressed their opinions on the meaning of faith. Here is the meaning of faith according to scholars in Indonesia.

    Ustadz Khalid Basalamah

    According to Ustadz Khalid Basalamah, faith is vowing something with the mind, then saying it verbally and believing it in the heart and applying it using the body parts.

    Ustadz Adi Hidayat

    Ustadz Adi Hidayat explained that the word faith comes from the word Al-Amnu which means safe, calm and peaceful. According to Ustadz Adi Hidayat, faith has a relationship with the word peace and calm. These two words can then be interpreted as if a Muslim believes in God, then he will have peace of mind and a sense of security from the restlessness of the world as well as threats in the afterlife.

    Levels of Faith in Islam According to Sheikh M, Nawawi

    In Islam, faith has levels. This level also differentiates the faith of each person. According to a scholar from Banten, namely Sheikh M, Nawawi, a person’s level of faith can be divided into five levels. Here is the explanation.

    a. Iman Taqlid

    The first level of faith is iman taqlid. Iman taqlid is a faith based on the speech of others, generally from scholars, but without understanding the evidence. According to Sheikh M. Nawawi, this first level of faith is valid, even without looking for evidence for the problem.

    b. Iman Ilmu or Ilmul Yaqin 

    The second level of faith is the faith of knowledge. Faith in knowledge is the faith possessed by a servant in solving a problem with evidence and knowledge possessed.

    c. Iman Iyana knows Ainul Yaqin

    At the third level of faith is iman iyana. Faith is the faith possessed by a servant who believes that God is a real being, even though his existence cannot be seen. When a person is at the third level of faith, he believes that God is not unseen and is always present in his heart.

    d. Iman Haq or Haqqul Yaqin

    At the fourth level of faith is true faith. Iman haq is the faith possessed by a Muslim with the view that Allah is always in his heart. Scholars also say that a person with a high level of faith is said to be a wise person. This is because God is always present in his heart, the person only looks at God and not at the worldly.

    e. True Faith

    The last level is real faith. Real faith is the faith possessed by a servant by only doing everything that brings him closer to God. Therefore, people with true faith can be seen as a slave who has drowned in the sea and does not see the shore.

    From the five levels of faith, the first two categories of faith can be cultivated by humans. Therefore, Sheikh M. Nawawi also explained that every human being is obliged to deepen his level of faith by looking for arguments about faith.

    Whereas faith at the next level, is a gift given by God to humans and cannot be cultivated by humans. Because it can only be obtained according to God’s will.

    Level of Faith in General

    In addition to the level of faith, according to the views of Sheikh M. Nawawi, the level of faith in general can be categorized into five, namely Muslim, believer, muhsin, mukhlis and muttaqin. Here is the explanation.

    a. Muslims 

    Muslim is the level of faith when someone professes to be Muslim, this first level of faith includes the lowest level of faith. This is because it is only limited to the acknowledgment that Allah is the god he believes in as the One and Only God. For this reason, a servant is considered to have no difference with the devil, because the devil also believes that God is the One God.

    b. Believer

    A believer is a servant who has faith by studying Islamic religious law. With the study of the Sharia, it has an increase in insight about the Islamic religion.

    c. Muhsin

    Muhsin is a servant who has a level of faith that can improve all his actions to be better.

    d. Mukhlis

    Mukhlis is a servant of people who have sincerity in worship. At this level, a servant does everything he does only for God.

    e. Muttaqin 

    The last and highest level of faith is muttaqin. Muttaqin is a servant who always fears God and avoids God’s prohibitions..

    Those are the five levels of faith in Islam according to scholars and in general. The next discussion is about the pillars of faith in Islam.

    • The meaning and meaning of Jazakumullah khairan with examples of its use
    • 19 Most Beautiful Mosques in the World, Make Your Heart More Comfortable
    • Arti Istighfar: Benefits, Advantages and Wisdom

    Pillars of Faith in Islam 

    In Islamic teachings there are six pillars of faith, as one of the foundations of faith itself. The pillars of faith can also be used as a benchmark for the understanding of faith in terms of meaning or terms. Here is a further explanation.

    The pillar of faith is a view in Islamic religious teachings that believes that the Prophet and Messenger are messengers from God and are ordered to deliver good news and deliver threats to humans living on earth.

    The meaning of this pillar of faith is also summarized in a hadith from Muslim that reads:

    “… Rasulullah SAW said, ‘You believe in Allah, in His angels, in His messengers, in the Day of Resurrection and in good and bad destiny.’ This person (Jibril), then said, ‘You are right’.”

    The hadith is the narration of Umar bin Khattab, when he heard that the angel Gabriel changed his form into a man and asked the Prophet Muhammad.

    Here are the six pillars of faith in Islam.

    1. Faith in God

    The first pillar of faith is to believe in Allah as the One and Only God and the Lord of the Universe. A person can be said to believe in God, if he believes in the following four things.

    1. Believing in the existence of God or believing in the existence of God.
    2. Believing in the Rububiyyah of Allah, that is believing and confident that no one controls, creates, and regulates the entire universe except Allah.
    3. Believing in the Uluhiyyah of Allah, believing that there is no one entitled and worthy of worship other than Allah and denying all worship other than Allah.
    4. Believing in the name and attributes of God or Asmaul Husna that has been set for God and set by the prophet for God. Then stay away from attitudes that can remove the meaning, turn away, and question God.

    2. Faith in God’s Angels

    Faith in the angels of God includes believing in the practices and tasks given by God to the angels. Faith in angels can be done by believing that no one knows for sure the number of angels. Meanwhile, there are 10 angels that Muslims must believe in and believe that angels are created from light.

    There are 10 angels that Muslims must believe in, namely angel Gabriel, angel Mikail, angel Rakib, angel Atid, angel Munkar, angel Nakir, angel Maut, angel Israfil, angel Malik, and angel Ridwan.

    3. Faith in the Books of God

    Believing in the books of God including in kalam or speech. There are four books of God that must be believed by a Muslim. Among them are the Torah, the Gospel, the Psalms and the holy book Al-Quran.

    4. Faith in the Messengers of God

    Believing in the messengers of God means believing and trusting with all your heart that the messengers of God exist. Believing in the messengers of God means believing that the messengers were created by God to bring the truth and teachings of God to people on earth.

    The messengers who were created and sent by God can receive revelation through intermediaries, namely angels. It should be known that God sent down many prophets to the earth, but there are only 25 prophets and messengers that Muslims must know, starting from Prophet Adam to Prophet Muhammad.

    5. Faith in the Last Day

    Believing in the last day or doomsday means believing and trusting that the last day or doomsday will definitely come and no one knows for sure when the doomsday will come.

    On the last day, the universe and all its contents will be destroyed and man will be raised from the grave to be gathered and held accountable for what he did while still alive in the world.

    6. Faith in Qada and Qadar

    The last pillar of faith is faith in fate, namely qada and qadar. Believing in destiny qada and qadar means to believe and believe wholeheartedly that destiny, good and bad, comes from God, and that all destiny that happens to humans has been decreed by God.

    Qada is a ruling that has been written since before humans were born in the world, from fate, death to sustenance. While qadar is a provision or certainty that has been determined by God and will definitely happen, has happened or is happening.

    That is the meaning of faith according to terms and language accompanied by an explanation of the levels of faith and the pillars of faith in Islam.

    Reader can learn more about faith by reading and buying books on related topics at www.Sinaumedia.com . Because Sinaumedia as #SahabatTanpaBatas, always provides quality books with interesting topics for Reader. Buy and book now!

    • Anger in Islam
    • Dhuha Prayer Procedure
    • Characteristics of Hypocrites
    • Ablution Procedures
    • Meaning of the Qur’an and Hadith
    • Honest Behavior in Islam
    • Meaning of Zakat
    • Pillars of Hajj
    • The meaning of aurat
    • List of 99 Asmaul Husna and Meaning – Meaning the Good Name of Allah SWT
    • Noble Attributes
    • Ablution Procedures
    • Meaning of Al-Quran and Hadith
    • Meaning of Morality
  • Definition of Sharia Law Established Based on the Qur’an and Sunnah

    As Muslims, we certainly want to worship according to the rules given by Allah SWT. God’s laws have been established in the books that He sent down and through the prophets, messengers, and guardians that were sent down to earth.

    Linguistically, law means Al-Qadha’  (القداء) which means decision. While the meaning of syariah law in terms is:

    It is the address of the street that is related to the actions of the responsible, seeking, or choosing, or placing

    It means: “It is a commandment of the Sharia related to the act of mukallaf, both in the form of demand, choice, and placement”.

    Hukum syara’ can be interpreted as anything that has been established by the commandments of the Sharia, namely the Qur’an and the Sunnah. The law of syra’ is related to acts of mukallaf either in the form of words or actions in doing or leaving something.

    Sharia law’ is not related to a person’s belief or creed. Mukallaf refers to anyone who is burdened by the Shari’a, including minors and the insane.

    One of the things that must be understood by a Muslim is the Islamic law. Hukum syara’ is the name of law that is based on sharia or sharia. That is, a provision that comes from Allah SWT and the Messenger either in textual form or the result of the understanding of scholars. For this reason, syara’ law can also be said to originate from the Qur’an and Hadith.

    From this understanding it can be known that the syar’ah law is divided into two, namely demand and placement (wadh’i). demands in the form of orders or prohibitions, whether certain or uncertain. As well as the choice of whether to do it or leave it.

    Meanwhile, the second, which is wadh’i or placement which is the things placed by the shariat maker that determines the realization of a law or its perfection.

    Broadcasting from various sources, following the division of Shariah law.

    Division of Sharia Law’

    Based on the meaning of syarah law’ above, syarah law’ can be categorized into 2 types as follows.

    1. Taklifi Law

    Based on Nasehatquran.com, the law of taklifi is a demand imposed on the mukallaf to do or leave a job and the choice between doing or leaving a job.

    Taklifi laws are grouped into several types, including obligatory, haram, mubah, mandub, and makruh. Here is an explanation of the five categories.

    • Compulsory

    Mandatory is something ordered by the Sharia maker to be done. A person who does an obligatory thing will be rewarded and get punished if he leaves it.

    Reader can recognize obligatory by other names including fardhu, faridhah, hatmun, mahtum, and lazim. In the view of the hafiyyah, fardhu and wajib are different. fardhu or faridhah is a legal term that is established by qath’i arguments such as the Quran and mutawatir hadith. Whereas those established with dzanni arguments such as Sunday hadith are called obligatory.

    Mandatory law itself can be categorized into four as follows.

    1. Based on Time Commitment

    Based on time constraints, mandatory laws are grouped into two of them as follows.

    • Wajib Mutlaq or Wajib Muwassa’, which is an obligation that has a wide implementation period and is not bound by a specific time, such as fasting in Ramadan.
    • Wajib Muqayyad or Wajib Mudhayyaq, which is an obligation whose implementation is bound by a certain time, such as five daily prayers, Ramadan fasting, and so on.
    1. Based on Object Provisions

    Based on the provisions of the object, mandatory law is divided into two categories as follows.

    • Wajib Mu’ayyan, which is an obligation that has been determined and there is no other option than what has been stipulated, such as the obligation to fast in the month of Ramadan, the obligation of Hajj, and so on.
    • Wajib Ghairu Mu’ayyan or Wajib Mukhayyar, which is an obligation that allows you to choose one of several options. An example is expiation for a person who breaks an oath.
    1. Based on the Rate

    Based on the rate, the law is divided into two categories as follows.

    • Wajib Muqaddar or Wajib Muhaddad, i.e. obligations whose rate has been determined, such as the number of rak’ahs in obligatory prayers, the minimum amount of zakat payment, etc.
    • Wajib Ghairu Muhaddad, which is an obligation that is not determined in terms of amount, such as spending in the way of God, giving charity, feeding orphans, etc.
    1. Based on the Legal Subject

    Here are the mandatory details based on the legal subject.

    • Wajib Aini or Fardhu Ain, which is the obligation imposed on each individual, such as praying five times a day, fasting Ramadan, etc.
    • Wajib Kifa’i or Fardhu Kifayah, which is an obligation that is burdened collectively, which when it has been represented then the obligation falls away. Such as funeral prayer, jihad fi sabilillah, amar ma’ruf nahi munkar, etc.
    • Illegal

    Haram is something that is forbidden by the Sharia makers that must be abandoned. People who abandon unlawful things will get a reward. However, the person who does it will earn sin.

    Haram itself can be categorized into two groups as follows.

    • Haram lizatihi or haram because of its substance. That is an act that is originally illegal according to syar’i law. Examples: polytheism, adultery, stealing, eating pork, etc.
    • Haram lighairigi or haram because of something else. That is, an act that was originally permitted or prescribed, but due to the presence of other factors that can cause damage and harm, the act becomes haram.

    For example, drinking alcohol becomes haram because it contains khamer. People who drink alcohol will lose self-control and can do other immoral things. Like adultery, killing people, etc.

    • Change

    Mubah is something that has nothing to do with commands and prohibitions. For example eating, sleeping, drinking, etc.

    All actions that were not originally ordered and not prohibited by the Shari’a. This is because if the act is motivated by something that is ordered or prohibited then the act follows the law behind it.

    For example, learning Arabic, which is the original law, is allowed. However, because we are required to know the content of the Al-Quran and As-Sunnah, it is impossible for us to know it without learning Arabic. So learning Arabic is legally mandatory based on that background.

    Other examples are eating and drinking. The original law is mubah, but when it is done excessively to the point of harming oneself then it becomes haram.

    • Mandub

    Mandub is something ordered by the sharia maker that should not be done. A person who does something wrong while looking for a reward will get a reward, but if he doesn’t do it then he won’t get a punishment.

    Mandub or sunnah has several levels among them as follows.

    • First, the sunnah of muakkadah. It is a sunnah that was always done by the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam. For example, performing two rak’ah sunnah prayers before dawn.
    • Second, the sunnah ghairu muakkadah. It is a sunnah that the Prophet sallallaahu ‘alaihi wasallam did not always do, meaning that he occasionally left it, such as tarawih prayer, four rak’ah prayers before and after noon, and so on.

    In Islam there is also a customary sunnah, namely the actions of the Prophet Muhammad SAW that are not part of the worship of God. Such as, the way to dress, the type of food and drink consumed, the way to drive, the way to walk, and so on.

    • Makruh

    Makruh is something that is forbidden by the shariat in the form of non-obligation. When, someone abandons makruh things then he will be rewarded. However, if he does, the person will not sin.

    The use of the term makruh is believed by scholars except Hanafi scholars. For him, makruh consists of two, namely makruh tahrim and makruh tanzih. Makruh tahrim is something that is prohibited or prohibited by Sharia but the evidence is dzanni al-wurud (strong presumption).

    Meanwhile, makruh tanzih is something recommended by the Sharia to be abandoned as makruh known by scholars in general.

    2. Law of Wadh’i

    Launched from the page Pai.ftk.uin-alauddin.ac.id , wadh’i law means artificial or made. The wadh’i law that is meant here is the existence of a law that depends on the presence or absence of something else such as reasons, conditions, and legal obstacles (manic).

    a. Reason

    What is meant by reason is everything that is made by syar’i as a reason for the existence or non-existence of law and the absence of something makes the existence of law necessary.

    For example, in the word of God in QS Al-Maidah which contains two laws. First, the law of taklifi, which is to violate the prohibition of stealing. Second, there is also the law of wadh’i because he stole as a reason for his hand being cut off. So, the presence of thieves ensures the presence of amputation.

    b. Requirement

    What is meant by conditions is the absence of something that ensures the absence of law. But not the other way around, that is, there must be a law. for example the word of God in QS Al-Baqarah verse 110.

    The meaning of QS Al-Baqarah verse 110, “And establish prayer and pay zakat.” And whatever goodness you do for yourself, of course you will get the reward from God. Indeed, Allah sees everything you do.”

    Based on the verse, zakat becomes a mandatory law. However, if there is not enough haul then there is no mandatory law. However, haul is not enough to ensure the obligation of zakat because it still depends on other things such as nisab. In this case, haul is bought as a condition, which is one of the obligatory conditions of zakat.

    c. Mani’

    What is meant by ‘mani’ is everything that can negate or invalidate the law. For example, a woman who is on her period or postpartum is forbidden to pray.

    Simply put, the essence here is menstruation and nifas. This is due to the presence of menstruation or nifas, so there is no obligation to pray.

    d. Rukhsah and Azimah

    Here is a more detailed explanation about rukhsah and azimah.

    • Rukhsah

    Rukhsah means easy and light. What is meant by rukhsah is the change of something from heavy to light or easier. Because there is a reason for the original law. As in the word of God, QS An-Nisa’ verse 101.

    The meaning of the verse is “And when you travel on earth, then it is not a sin to miss the prayer, if you are afraid of being attacked by the infidels. Verily, the unbelievers are your real enemies.”

    The verse explains about the relief for those who are on the way to miss their prayers. Launched from bincangmuslimah.com, rukhsah can be grouped into several categories as follows.

    • Rukhshah which must be taken. Like eating carcasses for people who are about to die and can’t find other food.
    • Sunnah Rukhsah is taken. Such as breaking the prayer on the way, not fasting for the sick, and looking at the face and the palms of the woman who wants to marry.
    • Rukhshah that can be taken. Like practicing akad salam.
    • The more important Rukhshah is not taken. Such as rubbing shoes, praying multiple times in the absence of dhaar, etc.
    • Makruh Rukhsah is taken. Like skipping prayers on a journey that is less than a radius of 3 marhalah (120 km)

    With the existence of rukhsah, it provides convenience for human life that is squeezed by difficulties and there are only haram or forbidden things in front of the eyes. However, that was the only thing that could save his life.

    • Azimah

    Azimah means firm, heavy, and strong. Azimah can also be interpreted as anything that is prescribed in the beginning, and does not depend on any excuse or obstacle such as praying five times before there is an excuse. Fasting Ramadan before there are ailments or obstacles. Similarly, other obligations are called azimah.

  • Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels

    Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels – In general folklore, angels are considered to be forces of nature, holograms or a good illusion. Westerners sometimes depict angels as chubby baby cherubs, or handsome and handsome men, or beautiful young women with halos surrounding their heads.

    However, in Islam, angels are real creatures created by God. Angels themselves cannot be seen with the naked eye. Angels are not objects to be worshiped or prayed to. Angels submit to God and carry out his orders.

    In the view of Islam, there are no fallen angels. They are not divided into good angels or bad angels. Humans do not become angels after they die. Satan is not an angel, but Satan is a type of jinn. In the Islamic religion, angels must be believed in, must be trusted. Believing in the existence of angels is in the second pillar of faith. Below will be explained the belief in angels along with the names of angels believed in Islam.

    Meaning of Faith in God’s Angels

    Faith means believing, Believing in God’s Angels means believing that angels are true” creatures of God who were created from Light, and do not have sex, so they always obey God’s commands.

    Angel comes from the Arabic language ‘malak’ which means messenger, the plural form is ‘malaikah’. Angels are believed to be heavenly beings, created from light by Allah SWT. This is mentioned in a hadith narrated by Muslims. The hadith reads,

    عَنْ عَائِشَةَ قَالَتْ قَالَ رَسُوْلُ اللهِ صَلَّ اللهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّم خُلِقَتِ المَلٰئِكَةُ مِنْ نُوْرِ وَخُلِقَ الْجَانُّ مِنْ مَارِجِ مِنْ نَارٍ وَخُلِقَ اٰدَمَ مِمَّا وُصِفَ لَكُمْ (HR. Muslim:5314)

    “an ‘aa`isyat qaalat qala rasulullahi shallahu ‘alaihi wa sallam khuliqatil malaikati min nuri wa khuliqal jaannu min maari min naar wa khuliqa aadama mimmaa wushifalakum

    Meaning : “Angels were created from light and Jinn were created from a mixture of fire, and Adam was created from earth.”

    Angels have roles such as praising Allah SWT and carrying out the laws of nature. Islam does not even have a graphic or symbolic representation of angels. However, angels are often depicted as beautiful creatures with wings. Angels form different hierarchies and cosmic orders.

    Angels do not eat or drink, have no anger, and never tire.

    {فَلَمَّا رَأَى أَيْدِيَهُمْ لَا تَصِلُ إِلَيْهِ نَكِرَهُمْ وَأَوْجَسَ مِنْهُمْ خِيفَةً قَالُوا لَا تَخَفْ إِنَّا أُرْسِلْنَا إِلَى قَوْمِ لُوطٍ وَامْرَأَتُهُ قَائِمَةٌ فَضَحِكَتْ} (Surat Hud: 70-71)

    Meaning : So when he saw that their hands did not touch him, Ibrahim looked at their actions as strange, and felt afraid of them. The angel said, “Do not be afraid, indeed we are (angels) sent to the people of Lut.” And his wife stood (behind the curtain), then he smiled.

     

    The angel that humans have seen with the naked eye is the angel Gabriel. Angel Gabriel once met Prophet Muhammad SAW.

    It is narrated in the Sahih Book of Ibn Hiban, from the companion of Abdullah Ibn Mas’ud, the Messenger of Allah said:

    On Ibn Masoud – may God bless him and grant him peace – he said in this verse: {And he saw it descend further} [Al-Najm: 13], the Messenger of God – may God bless him and grant him peace – said: I saw Gabriel at the end of his chest, upon him there are seventy Jannahs, يَنْثِرُ من رِيشِه التَّاوِيلُ : الدُّرُّ والياقُوتُ

    From Ibn Mas’ud RA that he said about this verse, “And verily Muhammad saw Gabriel (in his original form) at another time.” (QS. An-Najm: 13)

    The Prophet SAW said, “I saw Gabriel in Sidratul Muntaha, he had six hundred wings scattered in his fur with diamonds and gems of different colors.”

    Angels also never stop or feel bored to worship Allah SWT, this is stated in Al-Quran chapter 21 verse 20 which reads,

    وَاِنَّا لَنَحْنُ الْمُسَبِّحُوْنَ

    Meaning : And verily we glorify (to Allah). (QS: As Shafat: 166)

    Although there is no history that says when angels were created, many believe that angels are the first creations of God, and live in the heavenly realm.

    Many scholars debate whether humans or angels have a higher degree. But in the Al-Quran, the prostration of angels to Adam is often considered as proof of human supremacy over angels. But there are also those who think that angels are superior to humans because they do not have anger and lust.

    Faith in God is also often said to be the key to a servant’s success in the afterlife. However, practicing faith is not as simple as we imagine. There are pillars, branches, and everything we experience and witness that intersects with our faith. Learn all that in the Encyclopaedia of Faith book below.

     

    Evidence for God’s Angels

    Faith in angels is an obligation commanded by God. This is stated in the Al-Quran, chapter An-nisa verse 136 which reads,

    يٰٓاَيُّهَا ​​الَّذِيْنَ اٰمَنُوْٓا اٰمِنُوْا بِاللّٰهِ وَرَسُوْلِهٖ وَالْكِتٰبِ الَّذِيْ نَزَّلَ عَلٰى رَسُوْلِهٖ وَالْكِتٰبِ الَّذِيْٓ اَنْزَلَ مِنْ قَبْلُ ۗوَمَنْ يَّكْفُرْ بِاللّٰهِ وَمَلٰۤىِٕكَتِهٖ وَكُتُبِهٖ وَرُسُلِهٖ وَالْيَوْمِ الْاٰخِرِ فَقَدْ ضَلَّ ضَلٰلًا ۢ بَعِيْدًا

    Meaning : “O people who believe! Keep believing in Allah and His Messenger (Muhammad) and in the Book (Al-Qur’an) that was revealed to His Messenger, as well as the book that was revealed before. Whoever disbelieves in God, His angels, His books, His messengers, and the Hereafter, then indeed, that person has gone astray very far.”

    In that verse, God not only commands people to believe in angels, but God commands us to believe in His books, His messengers and the Last Day or Judgment Day. Study the SD/MI book Iman Kepa Malaikat Allah SWT to have more knowledge, understanding, and practice goodness in everyday life.

    Names of angels and their duties

    How many angels were created by Allah SWT? Actually, only God knows the answer. Angels do not have the same status because they are given different tasks.

    Some angels are assigned to carry out God’s law in the world. For example, the angel Michael is responsible for the rain and directs it wherever God wants.

    Michael the Archangel has assistants who help him in carrying out the orders of Allah SWT, they direct the wind and clouds according to God’s will. There are also those who are in charge of blowing the trumpet on the Day of Judgment and there are also those who are in charge of taking life from human bodies.

    There is also a group of angels who pray for those creatures of God who give good deeds to others. Angels love those who believe and ask God to forgive their sins.

    Among them there are also angels who protect the believer throughout his life, both when he is inside the house, outside the house and when he is asleep. Learn more about the existence of angels, starting from believing in their existence, their abilities, the types of angels and their functions in the book Malaikat Dalam Al Quran: Seri Makhluk Ghaib.

    10 Angels that we must believe in

    As for the 10 Angels that we must believe in, namely,

    1. Angel Gabriel His job is to deliver revelation
    2. Archangel Mikail’s task is to distribute Rizki
    3. Angel Izroel His job is to take lives
    4. Isrofil angel His task is to blow the trumpet
    5. Angel Rokib His job is to record human actions
    6. Angel Atid His job is to record human actions
    7. The Munkar dan Nakir Angel’s task is to ask him in the grave
    8. Angel nakir His task is to ask in the grave
    9. Angel Malik His job is to guard hell
    10. Angel Ridwan His job is to guard heaven

    Angel Gabriel’s task

    Jibril: Jibril is an angel tasked with delivering revelations from Allah SWT. Gabriel is the angel responsible for revealing the Quran to Prophet Muhammad SAW verse by verse. Angel Gabriel is the angel who communicates with all the prophets and also descends with the blessing of Allah SWT on the night of Laylatul Qadr or the night of a thousand moons. Angel Gabriel is also recognized as an extraordinary fighter in Islam. The angel Gabriel is believed to be the leader of the angelic army into the Badr War.

    The angel Jibreel following the war is described in a hadith narrated by Ibn Hisham that the Messenger of Allah called out to him “Rejoice O Abu Bakr because God’s help has come. The angel Gabriel grabbed the bridle of his horse, then pulled it towards the cloud of dust (the battlefield).”

     

    God said:

    وَلَقَدْ نَصَرَكُمُ اللُّ بِبَدْرٍ وََانْتُمْ اَذِلَّةٌۚ فَتَّوُواُوا اللَّّ لَعَلَّكُمْ تَشْكُرُوْنَ

    It means : Truly God has helped you in the battle of Badr. (Ali Imran: 123)

     

    اِذْ تَقُوْلُ لِلْمُؤْمِنِيْينَ إَلَنْ يَّكْفِيكُمْ انْ يُّمِدَّكُمْ ربُّكُمْ بِثَلٰثَةِ الَافٍ مِّنَ الْمَلٰۤىِٕكَةِ مُنْزَلِينَۗ

    Meaning : (Remember) when you said to the believers, “Isn’t it enough for you that God helps you with three thousand angels sent down (from heaven)?” (At Tawbah: 27)

     

    In addition, this is also mentioned in the Al-Quran, chapter Al-Anfal verse 9 which reads,

    اِذْ تَسْتَغِيْثُونَ رَبَّكُمْ فَاسْتَجَابَ لَكُمْ انِيْ مُمِدُّكُمْ بِالْفٍ مِّنَ الْمَلٰىِٕكَةِ مُرْدِفِيْنَ

    It means : “Remember, when you ask for help from your Lord, and He grants you permission, ‘Indeed I will bring reinforcements to you with a thousand angels who come in succession,’”

     

    Archangel Michael’s task

    Mikail: The angel Mikail is the angel responsible for directing rain, food and sustenance with the will of Allah SWT. Some scholars also agree that the angel Michael also has responsibility over the angels who bring the laws of nature. Archangel Michael is one of the four main angels of God. This is mentioned in a hadith,

    From Alqamah bin Martsad, from Abdurrahman bin Sabith, he said,

    يُدَبِّرُ الأُمُورَ أَرْبَعَةٌ : جِبْرِيلُ ، وَمِيكَائِيلُ ، وَإِسْرَافِيلُ ، وَمَلَكُ الْمَوْتِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَى نَبِيِّنَا وَعَلَيْهِمْ وَسَلَّمَ ، فَجِبْرِيلُ عَلَى الرِّيحِ وَالْجُنُودِ ، وَمِيكَائِيلُ عَلَى الْقَطْرِ وَالنَّبَاتِ ، وَمَلَكُ الْمَوْتِ يَقْبِضُ الأَرْوَاحَ ، وَإِسْرَافِيلُ يُبَلِّغُهُمْ مَا يُؤْمَرُونَ بِهِ

    There are 4 angels who manage affairs: Jibril, Mikail, Israfil and the Angel of Death – may blessings and peace be poured out on our prophet and them. Jibreel arranges the wind and the forces, Mikail arranges the rain and the trees, the angel of death who takes away lives, and Israfil conveys to them what they are commanded. (HR. Abu Shaikh al-Ashbahani in al-Adzamah, no. 294. This hadith is a Maqthu’ hadith, because Abdurrahman bin Sabith was a tabi’in).

    In a hadith it was also mentioned that the angel Michael never smiled after the angel Michael saw how hell was created, this was conveyed by the angel Gabriel to the Prophet Muhammad. The hadith was narrated by Anas bin Malik, the Prophet Muhammad SAW asked the angel Gabriel ‘why have I never seen the angel Michael smile? then the angel Gabriel answered, ‘Mikail has never smiled since hell was created.’

     

    The task of Angel Israfil

    Israfil: the angel Israfil is the angel who blows the trumpet at the end of time. The angel Israfil is responsible for signaling the coming of the Day of Judgment by blowing his trumpet.

    In the Al-Quran, Surat Al-Qamar verse 6, it is mentioned that the angel Israfil calls for something unpleasant on the Day of Retribution.

    فَتَوَلَّ عَنْهُمْ ۘ يَوْمَ يَدْعُ الدَّعِ الِلٰى شَيْءٍ نُّكُرٍۙ

    “So turn away from them, Remember the day when a caller or an angel calls to something unpleasant on the day of retribution.”

     

    The task of the Angel of Israel

    Izrail: The angel Izrail has the task of taking life from the human body and he will take the believers to heaven and the unbelievers to hell. Angel Izrail took human life with the help of his subordinates. This is explained in Al-Quran surah As-Sajdah verse 11 which reads,

    say

    Meaning : “The angel of death entrusted to (take away) your life will kill you, then only to your Lord will you be returned”.

     

    In addition, it is also mentioned in the Al-Quran chapter Al-Araf verse 37 which reads,

    فَمَنْ اَظْلَمُ مِمَّنِ افْتَرٰى عَلَى اللّٰهِ كَذِبًا اَوْ كَذَّبَ بِاٰيٰتِهٖۗ اُولٰۤىِٕكَ يَنَالُهُمْ نَصِيْبُهُمْ مِّنَ الْكِتٰبِۗ حَتّٰٓى اِذَا جَاۤءَتْهُمْ رُسُلُنَا يَتَوَفَّوْنَهُمْۙ قَالُوْٓا اَيْنَ مَا كُنْتُمْ تَدْعُوْنَ مِنْ دُوْنِ اللّٰهِ ۗقَالُوْا ضَلُّوْا عَنَّا وَشَهِدُوْا عَلٰٓى اَنْفُسِهِمْ اَنَّهُمْ كَانُوْا كٰفِرِيْنَ

    Meaning : “Then who is more unjust than the one who makes up lies against Allah or denies His verses? Those people will get the share that has been determined for them in the Book (Lauh Mahfuzh); until when Our messengers (angels) came to them to take his life, (at that time) Our messenger asked: “Where (idols) do you usually worship besides Allah?” The polytheists replied: “The idols have all disappeared from us,” and they admitted to themselves that they were disbelievers.

     

    The duties of Angel Munkar and Nakir

    Munkar and Nakir: Angels Munkar and Nakir are angels who are in charge of asking people in the grave. This is explained in a hadith narrated by Tirmidhi. The hadith reads,

    عَنْ أَبِي هُرَيْرَةَ رضي الله عنه قَالَ : قَالَ رَسُولُ اللَّهِ صَلَّى اللَّهُ عَلَيْهِ وَسَلَّمَ : إِذَا قُبِرَ الْمَيِّتُ أَوْ قَالَ أَحَدُكُمْ أَتَاهُ مَلَكَانِ أَسْوَدَانِ أَزْرَقَانِ يُقَالُ لأَحَدِهِمَا الْمُنْكَرُ وَالآخَرُ النَّكِيرُ (HR At-Tirmidzi)

    From Abu Hurairah RA said, the Messenger of God SAW said, “When the body has been buried or when one of you is buried, there are two angels who come to him, both of them black and bluish, named Munkar and the other named Nakir.” (HR At-Tirmidhi)

     

    From Abu Hurairah radhiyallahu ‘anhu who said, the Messenger of Allah sallallaahu ‘alaihi wa sallam said,

    إِذَا قُبِرَ الْمَيِّتُ أَوْ قَالَ أَحَدُكُمْ أَتَاهُ مَلَكَانِ أَسْوَدَانِ أَزْرَقَانِ يُقَالُ لأَحَدِهِمَا الْمُنْكَرُ وَالآخَرُ النَّكِيرُ ، فَيَقُولَانِ : مَا كُنْتَ تَقُولُ فِي هَذَا الرَّجُلِ ؟ فَيَقُولُ مَا كَانَ يَقُولُ: He is a servant of God and His Messenger, I testify that there is no god but God, and Muhammad is a servant of God and His Messenger. فَيَقُولانِ : قَدْ كُنَّا نَعْلَمُ أَنَّكَ تَقُولُ هَذَا ، ثُمَّ يُفْسَحُ لَهُ فِي قَبْرِهِ سَبْعُونَ ذِرَاعًا فِي سَبْعِينَ ، ثُمَّ يُنَوَّرُ لَهُ فِيهِ ، ثُمَّ يُقَالُ لَهُ : نَمْ ، فَيَقُولُ : أَرْجِعُ إِلَى أَهْلِي فَأُخْبِرُهُمْ ، فَيَقُولَانِ : نَمْ كَنَوْمَةِ الْعَرُوسِ الَّذِي لا يُوقِظُهُ إِلا أَحَبُّ أَهْلِهِ إِلَيْهِ حَتَّى God bless you.

    And he said: فَيَقُولَانِ : قَدْ كُنَّا نَعْلَمُ أَنَّكَ تَقُولُ ذَلِكَ ، فَيُقَالُ لِلأَرْضِ : الْتَئِمِي عَلَيْهِ ، فَتَلْتَئِمُ عَلَيْهِ ، فَتَخْتَلِفُ فِيهَا أَضْلاعُهُ ، فَلا يَزَالُ فِيهَا مُعَذَّبًا حَتَّى يَبْعَثَهُ اللَّهُ مِنْ مَضْجَعِهِ ذَلِكَ

    “When the body or one of you has been buried, then he will be approached by two black and blue angels, one of them Munkar and the other Nakir, both of them will say: What do you think about this person (Prophet Muhammad)?, then he will answer as when in world: Abdullah and His Messenger, I bear witness that there is no god worthy of worship except Allah, and I bear witness that Muhammad is the messenger of Allah. Both of them said: We have known that you used to say that. Then his grave was expanded 70 x 70 cubits, and it was given light, and it was said: Sleep. He replied: “I want to go home to tell my family”. Both of them said: “Sleep, as the bridegroom sleeps, no one can wake him up except the one he loves the most,

    Duties of Angels Raqib and Atid

    Raqib and Atid: The angels Raqib and Atid are angels who have the task of recording good and bad deeds. This is stated in Al-Quran Surat Qaf verses 17 and 18 which reads,

    إِذْ يَتَلَقَّى الْمُتَلَقِّيَانِ عَنِ الْيَمِينِ وَعَنِ الشِّمَالِ قَعِيدٌ (17) What is the meaning of the words of the Prophet (18)

    Meaning : “(Remember) when two angels recorded (his deeds), one sat on the right and the other on the left. There is not a word he utters but there is a guardian angel by his side who is always ready (to record).”

    In addition, it is also mentioned in the Al-Quran chapter Al-Infithar verse 10-12 which reads,

    وَاِنَّ عَلَيْكُمْ لَحٰفِظِيْينَۙ
    كَرَامًا كَاتِبِيْنَۙ
    يَعْلَمُوْنَ مَا تَفْعَلُونَ

    Meaning : “Indeed there are (angels) for you who watch over (your work), who are noble (in the eyes of God) and record (your work), they know what you do”

    The deeds recorded by the angels Raqib and Atid will be placed around the neck of people on the Day of Judgment. This is explained in Al-Quran surah Al-Isra verse 13 and 14 which reads,

    وَكُلَّ اِنْسَانٍ اَلْزَمْنٰهُ طٰۤىِٕرَهٗ فِيْ عُنُقِهٖۗ وَنُخْرِجُ لَهٗ يَوْمَ الْقِيٰمَةِ كِتٰبًا يَّلْقٰىهُ مَنْشُوْرًا
    اِقْرَأْ كِتَابَكَۗ كَفٰى بِنَفْسِكَ الْيَوْمَ عَلَيْكَ حَسِيْبًاۗ

    “And every human being, We have fixed his deeds (just as a necklace is fixed) on his neck. And We will bring forth for him on the Day of Resurrection a book which he will find open. “Read your book, suffice yourself at this time as your accountant”

     

    The task of Angels Malik and Ridwan

    Malik and Ridwan: Angel Ridwan has the task of guarding the gates of heaven. While the angel Malik has the duty of guarding the gates of hell. This is stated in the Al-Quran, Surat Az-Zukhruf, verses 77 and 78 which read,

    وَنَادَوْا يٰمٰلِكُ لِيَقْضِ عَلَيْنَا رَبُّّۗ قَالَ نَّكُمْ مكِثُونَ
    لَقْ ِيْنٌكْ بِالْحقِّ وَلِنَّ اَكُرَكُمْ لِلَحَقِّ ٰرُِوْنَ

    Meaning : “And they exclaimed, “O (Angel) Malik! Let your Lord kill us.” He replied, indeed, you will remain (in this hell). Indeed, We have come to bring you the truth but most of you hate the truth”

    In addition, it is also mentioned in Al-Quran Surat Az-Zumar verse 73 which reads,

    وَسِيْقَ الَّذِيْنَ اتَّقَوْا رَبَّهُمْ اِلَى الْجَنَّةِ زُمَرًا ۗحَتّٰىٓ اِذَا جَاۤءُوْهَا وَفُتِحَتْ اَبْوَابُهَا وَقَالَ لَهُمْ خَزَنَتُهَا سَلٰمٌ عَلَيْكُمْ طِبْتُمْ فَادْخُلُوْهَا خٰلِدِيْنَ

    It means : “And those who fear their Lord are taken to heaven in groups. So that when they reached it (paradise) and its doors were opened, its guardians said to them, “Peace be upon you, blessed be you! So enter, you remain in it.”

    The wisdom of believing in angels

    In the book Lautan Hikmah Becoming a Beneficial Person, it is explained how with us having faith can be one of the bases to calm the heart, calm the soul, and give instructions within.

    Here is the wisdom gained if we believe in angels:

    • It is one form of human piety to Allah SWT.
    • Strengthen faith in Allah SWT.
    • will always pray and always forgive for others.
    • People who believe in angels are always kept away from sinning.
    • Always be thankful to Allah SWT, be thankful for realizing that Allah has created angels to help all human lives.
    • Establishing a feeling of pleasure to do good deeds.
    • Feeling afraid if he has committed an immoral act or is about to commit an immoral act, because he is confident that all actions will not escape the supervision of angels.
    • People who believe in angels will always fear Allah SWT, and compete in doing good deeds.
    • Always to always think and be careful in everything you do, because good or bad deeds will always be held accountable in the afterlife.
    • Be sure that the help of Allah SWT is a real thing.
    • Always to be honest, trustworthy and do good.
    • The faith in yourself will be much stronger and much more confident in Allah SWT.
    • People who believe in angels have perfect faith.
    • Cultivate a sense to always glorify the name of Allah SWT, because with the power of Allah SWT he has created angels, special creatures in the eyes of Allah.
    • Avoid people if they want to do bad or reprehensible actions.
    • Adding to the awareness that nature exists that cannot be reached by the five human senses.
    • Increase enthusiasm in worship and always be sincere in performing worship even if there is no one to see, but confident that God and his angels can witness the act.

     

  • The Meaning of Montage: Its Function, Purpose, and Influence on Children’s Fine Motor Skills

    Meaning of Montage – When attending Kindergarten in the past, were Reader often taught by the teacher to make an art using the paste technique? Usually the art teaches us how to cut paper and then paste it according to the pattern of the existing picture. Well, that simple art is usually called montage.

    Although it looks simple, this montage art is often used as a special learning tool to develop children’s creativity while also training children’s fine motor skills. Both of these things are obviously important so that when they grow up, the child’s right brain develops for things in the field of art. So what exactly is montage? Is it just children’s art that uses the paste technique? How does this montage art influence the development of fine motor skills in children? Well, for Reader to understand these things, let’s read the following comments!

    Meaning of Montage

    The term “montage” comes from the English language, namely ” montage ” which means sticking . If you look at KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), the term “montase” has a definition as ‘a composition of images produced by mixing elements from several sources ‘ or ‘a group of images that are selected, arranged, and linked from various elements to produce a form with new ideas. ‘. Meanwhile, according to Sumanto (2005), he thinks that montage is a creation of applied art that is made from the pasting of photo cutouts or photo cutouts on the image-based field.

    Almost the same as that, Ayu (2017) also expressed the definition of montage which is a combination of pictures produced from mixing elements of several works. Usually, these montage artworks are combined according to existing themes, such as rural themes, mountains, rivers, houses. Well, from the themes or picture patterns that already exist, we have to cut paper or photos with random shapes and then paste them on the picture pattern. Then, according to Susanto (2012) he also thinks that montage is a work made by cutting picture objects from various sources, then pasted on a field so that it becomes a unity of work and theme.

    Well, from some experts’ opinions about what montage is, it can be concluded that this montage is a work of art whose activity is in the form of cutting paper pictures or photos from various sources, then the pieces are pasted on a field that has been organized as a theme, so that it will produce a unity works and themes.

    This montage making activity is usually done by students in Kindergarten to develop their fine motor skills as well as train creativity. In carrying out this montage making activity, of course they should be taught and supervised by their teacher. Not infrequently, the basic materials used for this montage activity will use materials available in the surrounding environment. Let’s just say there is photo paper, used magazines, newspapers, gift paper, poster paper, and many more. Therefore, the implementation of this montage activity also teaches children to use the materials around them as a recycling of a work of art.

    If this montage work is developed, then of course it can become a greater work of art, even often collaborated with painting, decorative art, artwork, relief, even sculpture. In its development, this montage was indeed just a two-dimensional work of art, but now it has become a three-dimensional work of art.

    This montage making activity, if applied to Kindergarten children, can be used as a game. Yes, the children will be invited to have fun while cutting the prepared papers into pieces according to their creativity. After that, the children were taught to stick it neatly on a picture pattern that had been prepared beforehand.

    Tools and Materials Used for Montage

    Actually, the tools and materials used to make this montage artwork are quite simple and even easy to obtain. If this montage-making activity is applied to children’s learning in Kindergarten, then the teacher needs to guide and supervise because the tools used are scissors. Indeed, there are now special scissors for children that are designed not to be too sharp at the end, but still their use requires teacher supervision. Well, here are some tools and materials that can be used to create a two-dimensional montage artwork.

    1. Cutting Tool

    The cutting tools in question can be scissors, cutters, and knives. As this montage-making activity is done by children in a Kindergarten, then just use special scissors that are designed for children. In addition, the use of scissors is considered to make the cut more neat. But still remember to always be careful when using any cutting tool 

    2. Glue

    The glue used to make this montage art is paper glue  so that the pieces of paper can stick easily to the pattern that has been made before.

    3. Photo Paper

    In fact, the size selection on this photo paper is adapted to the size of the montage theme to be made. If the montage is simple, alias to be done by kindergarten children, then just use picture paper the size of a notebook. However, if you are a professional, then you can use the A3 size which is wide enough for a variety of themes.

    4. Printer

    Usually, the shape of the picture pattern that suits a particular theme is often difficult to reproduce. Therefore, printing it through a printer is a precise way that can be done to make it easier. Kindergarten teachers can also use it by searching for a simple picture pattern first on the internet, then printing it through this printer.

    5. Color Paper

    Colored paper can be used as an option to be cut into pieces using scissors and then combined with the existing picture pattern. There are various types of colored paper, it can be in the form of crepe paper, folding paper, gift paper, gold paper, art paper, and so on. If it is used as learning for kindergarten children, then they will usually choose crepe paper, folding paper, or gift paper that is easy to obtain.

    6. Used Newspapers and Magazines

    Used newspapers and magazines can also be used as another option to cut into pieces and then combine them with existing picture patterns. Usually, kindergarten teachers will ask their students to use these old newspapers and magazines because they don’t need to spend money to get them.

    Montage Making Techniques

    In making a montage artwork in a simple way, it can be done with basic techniques such as:

    1. Cut some pictures from magazines, posters, used newspapers, and any paper that is used into small pieces.
    2. Stick the pieces on the prepared base.
    3. Arrange the pieces to form a picture arrangement that fits the picture pattern or theme.

    Functions and Benefits of Montage

    Montage function

    The basic function of creating montage art is indeed to improve the cognitive aspects of children, where children can match and collaborate with existing pictures. But it turns out, there are other functions of this art of montage, among others:

    1. Practical Functions

    That is, the function of everyday objects, which this montage artwork can be used as decoration material.

    2. Educative Function

    That is, it can help to develop thinking, emotional absorption, aesthetics, and creativity in children.

    3. Expression Functions

    That is, by using various materials and textures, of course it can stimulate expression in children.

    4. Psychological Functions

    That is, by pouring ideas and emotions on children, so that they will feel satisfied as well as happy. This can also make children feel reduced in their psychological burden.

    5. Social Functions

    That is to be able to provide employment for people who are really skilled in the art of montage. From the many works that are owned, it is hoped to be able to create employment, especially with the capital of creativity.

    Montage benefits

    Based on the function of montage on the perpetrator, it is clear that the existence of the art of montage can provide various benefits. For children, this montage-making activity can train their thinking, emotional, and creativity skills. This, if continuously trained, will of course affect the ability of the right brain. Meanwhile for adults, montage making activities can also be used as a source of employment because it turns out that it can be developed into a 3-dimensional work of art. If this 3-dimensional montage artwork is sold, of course it will not be cheap.

    Purpose of Montage

    The montage-making activity done by the children, is not immediately without purpose. The main purpose of teaching children about this montage is to improve fine motor skills in children, especially those related to the movement of their fingers. Sumantri (2005) also stated that the purpose of fine motor development in children is in the form of:

    1. So that children can develop fine motor skills, especially those related to the movement skills of both hands.
    2. So that children are able to move their body parts, especially those related to the movement of the fingers.
    3. So that the child is able to coordinate eye senses and hand activities.
    4. So that children are able to control their emotions, especially when doing fine motor activities.

    Why Art Learning Is Necessary For Children?

    Art learning for children which can be taught in Kindergarten is of course important. The main purpose of learning art in a formal education is not to train children to become an artist, but rather so that they get useful experiences for their personality development. In addition, the experience of creating art was found to sharpen children’s sensitivity and make them more appreciative of what is in their surroundings. After all, the existence of art learning will also help children to develop an impression and increase their ability to enjoy and appreciate an existing work of art.

    According to some experts, there are several purposes of the art learning process for children, namely:

    1. Develop sensitivity related to sensory perception through a variety of creative art experiences, especially those that suit their character. Bearing in mind that the level of development of the child’s artistic ability can be taught at every level of formal education.
    2. Stimulating the growth of imaginative ideas and the ability to find various creative ideas. This creative idea can be useful in solving narcissistic or aesthetic problems, which can be done through a process of exploration, creation, and appreciation tailored to the child’s interests and potential.
    3. Develop the ability to appreciate art, especially in the context of history and culture. In addition, learning art can also foster children’s understanding, awareness, and ability to appreciate the diversity of local and global cultures. If this awareness is nurtured from an early age, then it can be a means of forming a mutually tolerant and democratic attitude in this pluralistic society.

    Well, so it can be concluded that the existence of art learning which has been implemented in our education system turns out to provide various benefits for children from an early age, especially to develop creativity.

    The Effect of Montage on Children’s Fine Motor Skills

    As explained earlier, it turns out that this seemingly simple montage activity can have an effect on children’s fine motor skills. By doing these activities, children will indirectly go through the process of thinking and developing their creativity. Not only that, the shearing activity also has a full impact on children’s patience as well as training the fine motor skills of their fingers.

    This is evident from the many studies on increasing fine motor skills through montage activities in early childhood. From these studies, it is concluded that this montage activity makes children skilled in developing fine motor skills, in the form of cutting, arranging, and gluing. Through this montage activity, it can also improve fine motor skills and increase children’s creativity, because children will be given many pictures that must be selected before being cut, arranged and then pasted to make a theme so that it can increase creativity.

    Understanding What Fine Motor Skills Are

    Previously, we always discussed fine motor skills. Really, what is fine motor?

    According to Sumantri (2005), this fine motor is a form of organization based on the use of a group of small muscles such as the fingers on the hand that often require precision and coordination with the hands. This skill certainly includes the use of tools to work on an object. Meanwhile, Sujiono (2010), also thinks that fine motor is a movement that only involves certain parts of the body, especially by small muscles. Well, based on some of the experts’ opinions, it can be concluded that this fine motor is a movement performed by small human muscles, which usually involves certain parts of the body such as the fingers when performing an activity.

    This motoric development will certainly be influenced by the organs and functions of the central nervous system in the brain. This central nervous system will play an important role in coordinating every child’s fine motor movement. Therefore, these fine motor movements should be taught from an early age so that they can develop until they become adults later.

    Well, that’s a review of what montage is and its benefits for children’s fine motor development. Does Reader still remember the experience of making this montage while in Kindergarten?

     

  • Understanding Montage, Functions, How to Make, and Differences with Collage

    Montage – Almost everyone loves artistic creations. It’s just that one individual does not always like the same artistic creation. Introducing artistic creations to children is very good because it can increase the creativity and imagination of a child.

    One of the right art creations to introduce to children is montage. When hearing the montage name alone, it may seem strange to some people. If you are one of the people who don’t know what montage is, don’t worry because this article will discuss more about montage. So, read this review to the end, Reader.

    Meaning of Montage

    Montage is an application art creation made from the pasting of photo cutouts or foot cutouts on the base of the image. Definition of montage according to the Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) montage is a composition of images produced from the mixing of elements from several sources. Another definition in KBBI also explains that montage is a sequential image produced in a film to depict related ideas.

    According to the book ” Coloring Picture Reference, Collage, Montage, Mosaic and Application “. Montase’s work itself is made by pasting various ready-made pictures which are already in magazines, newspapers, calendars, online media and so on.

    Then, the picture is cut and can be rearranged to become a new picture in a book or something like that. In its development, montage was limited to two-dimensional works, but now it has added to three-dimensional works. Montage itself comes from the English language (montage) which means sticking.

    Montage Techniques

    Quoted from the book “Montase and Learning” by Nurul Aini S.Pd. and friends, montage techniques are divided into two, namely montage of photo techniques and montage of manual paste techniques. Here are the techniques from montage, namely:

    1. Photo Montage Technique

    A photo montage is a photo made from pasting or a compilation of several other photos. Usually, the montage is relatively simple, for example it starts by pasting a photo of a human on a photo of a scene.

    2. Manual Paste Technique Montage

    In this manual paste technique, which is a technique by pasting pieces of images from various sources on a field to display a specific message or theme.

    In this technique, not only emphasizing the theme to be conveyed, but the type of image pasted must also be observed in order to produce harmony and compatibility.

    Montage function

    Montage can not only be a romantic work of art that can be given to a couple. As for the function of montage is to channel your love for the beauty of photos or creative art. In addition, another montage function is to be a vehicle to express or express ideas, ideas, imagination and aesthetic experience in the form of a very personal symbolic expression.

    You can certainly express love through montage art. Not only that, another benefit of montage is as a conduit for various psychological problems experienced by a person. In fact, montage can be a means to obtain emotional balance, so as to achieve peace, comfort and personal satisfaction.

    Here are the various functions of montage, namely:

    1. Practical Functions

    In addition to being individual as a medium of expression, montage also has a practical function to channel people’s love for beauty in creating various beautiful things such as handicraft products, aesthetic furniture, comfortable dwellings as well as communication and entertainment media.

    2. Educative Function

    Montage indirectly helps a child’s self-development which includes physical, thinking, absorption, emotions, taste for beauty and creativity. A person will learn about something more easily through a pleasant activity such as playing.

    3. Expression Functions

    The elements of art in montage works such as lines, colors, shapes and textures are a visual language used to express or express ideas, ideas, imagination and aesthetic experiences which are then expressed in the form of very personal symbolic expressions.

    4. Psychological Functions

    In addition to being a medium of expression, montage is also beneficial as a therapeutic function. This function is a means of sublimation, relaxation, that is, channeling various psychological problems experienced by a person.

    After undergoing self-therapy through this art, a person will gain emotional balance, thus achieving peace, comfort and inner satisfaction. Therapy through art such as this montage is not concerned with the value of the level of beauty of the work produced, but is more concerned with the implementation of the traumatic healing process in a person.

    How to Make a Montage

    A romantic scrapbook that contains a series of photos and decorations reminding of someone’s love journey, that’s what montage art is like. For Reader who is still confused, montage is a group of pictures that are selected, arranged and linked from various elements to produce a form with new ideas. Then to make it visible, also add pieces of map pictures, embossed writing, paper with stories, stamps with dates, and even scrabble that becomes a decoration inside.

    The group of pictures and decorations includes a montage that can become a creative memory book full of meaning. In fact, not only through scrapbooking, you can also create a montage in a container to create your own story. In fact, montage art has become a modern business in both 2D and 3D forms. Here are some tips on making your own montage that Reader can try, among others.

    1. Prepare the Theme

    Of course you should prepare the theme first. You can also give a scrapbook using the montage technique to remember your love journey in a unique and certainly romantic way or you may want to give photo stickers and pictures combined into a frame as a wall decoration.

    Choose what montage concept you want by sticking a lot of colors, making it classic or just black and white? Of course, this is also very important in preparing the theme first so that the desired montage result is not messy.

    2. Prepare Materials and Equipment

    After knowing that the montage theme is suitable for your lover’s liking, immediately prepare the materials and equipment! Of course you need to print the photos you want to create into one. Then, look for photo decorations that will support the montage theme of your choice.

    The tools and materials needed are as follows:

    • Scissors Scissors
      all fit the size and needs of the montage creation itself.
    • Adhesive glue Glue
      is useful as a basic tool for making montages.
    • Photo book or HVS paper to paste pictures
    • Crayons, markers or colored pencils
    • All images are from various sources that will be combined

    3. Cut Pictures from Existing Reference Sources

    The next step after you have determined the theme (picture design), use scissors to select and cut interesting and suitable pictures from the various sources you have. Pay attention and concentrate when cutting the picture because it affects the quality of the picture, cut and collect all the picture objects you want to insert.

    4. Paste in order

    When all the materials and equipment are ready, then you can start by pasting the pictures according to the sequence. It is good, if you give a number behind the photo or picture that will be pasted when creating the montage work so that it is easier to complete.

    5. Add Color or Shades

    Of course it is necessary to create the value of beauty by adding color or pattern using crayons. The colors used are recommended to complement each other, so make sure the colors are not too dominant compared to the pictures that are the object of your montage work.

    6. Look at the results of the work

    Finally, your montage artwork will form a new picture and produce a new story according to the theme you created. Basically, the technique of making this montage artwork is not difficult and all we have to do is select, cut and paste pictures to create a new work. Even so, it still requires creativity and innovation for the determination and selection of images so that the results are good and interesting.

    Meaning of Illustration

    Knowing the term illustration is a word that comes from the Dutch language ” illustrazione ” which has the meaning of decoration with pictures. Terminologically, the term illustration is a picture that functions as a means to explain certain events.

    Two experts in this field, Putra and Lakoro (2012:2) explain that illustration has three important points. According to him, illustrations are used to explain stories, writings, poems and other information.

    The Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) explains the types of illustrations in the form of pictures (photos, drawings) to help clarify the content of books, essays and so on. In addition, also as a picture, design or diagram for decorating (cover page and so on).

    Types of Illustrations

    1. Pictures of Naturalist Illustrations

    Naturalist is a type of illustration that has the same color and shape as reality in nature without any additions or subtractions.

    2. Decorative Illustration Pictures

    Decorative is a type of illustration that has the function of decorating something with a simplified or exaggerated form with certain styles.

    3. Cartoon Pictures

    Cartoons are types of illustrations that have a funny shape or have certain special characteristics. In general, the types of cartoon illustrations often decorate comics, illustrated stories and children’s magazines.

    4. Caricature picture

    Caricature is a type of illustrative image in the form of satire or criticism in which there is a deviation of body proportions. These types of caricature illustrations are usually found in newspapers or magazines.

    5. Illustrated Stories

    Picture stories are types of illustrated pictures of a type of picture or comic that are given text. The type of illustration of a picture story using a picture technique made with the basis of a story with an interesting point of view.

    6. Textbook Illustrations

    A textbook is a type of illustrated picture with the function of explaining a text or event, either scientific or in the form of part pictures. Types of illustrations in textbooks have the form of natural pictures, charts, photos.

    7. Imaginary Illustration

    Illusion is a type of illustrative picture from the result of creative processing in an imaginative or imaginary way. Types of imaginary illustration pictures are generally found in story illustrations, comics, novels, and novels.

    8. Table

    Tables are types of illustrations that are used to present an activity, data and analyze the data into column and business form.

    9. Pie Chart

    A pie chart is a type of illustration that has a circle shape or pieces with a total of 3600 components.

    10. Organization Chart

    An organization chart is a type of illustration with a data presentation method in the form of an organizational structure based on levels and hierarchies.

    11. Bar Chart

    A bar chart is a type of illustration that can be used to see data trends based on observations over time.

    12. Graph Chart

    A graph chart is a type of illustration that is used to present quantitative data by using a coordinate system.

    13. Combination Chart

    Combination charts are types of illustrations from the combination of bar charts and graph charts .

    14. Flowcharts Flowcharts
    are types of illustrative pictures that show the order and relationship between processes and their instructions.

    15. Maps

    A map is a type of illustration in the form of a picture or drawing of the whole or part of the earth’s surface, both land and sea. Knowing the term illustration is a word that comes from the Dutch language ” illustrazione ” which has the meaning of decoration with pictures. Terminologically, the term illustration is a picture that functions as a means to explain certain events.

    Various Illustration Functions

    Here are some types of illustrative functions, among others:

    Descriptive Functions

    The descriptive function of illustration is used to explain the meaning of a long text through a picture.

    Analysis Functions

    The function of an illustration analyst is to express in detail the parts of an object.

    Analytics Functions

    The analytical function of illustration is to express in detail the parts of an object.

    Qualitative Functions

    The qualitative function of illustration is generally used in making tables, graphics, photos, symbols, pictures, etc.

    The Role of Illustration

    Illustration certainly has a role in montage, the following are the roles of illustration, namely:

    1. The role of illustration is to make it easier to understand a piece of writing. The presence of illustrations helps us find the meaning of a text that we read thoroughly.
    2. The role of illustration is a means of expressing ideas or thoughts through a picture. Many of them like to draw to express ideas or thoughts through a picture. Many of them like to draw to express what they feel, channel their hobbies, express their feelings and so on.
    3. The role of illustration is to briefly explain a text or story.
    4. The role of illustration is to increase the aesthetic value of a picture or writing. The presence of illustrations makes it easier for a person to understand a message to be conveyed.
    5. Illustrations can be used to give a complete picture of the content of a work. One of the examples is on magazines or books. An illustration is very good at making readers curious and making them addicted to read more.
    6. The role of illustration is a means to communicate. In general, a picture can describe a piece of writing.
    7. The role of illustration is to explain a concept through pictures.

    The difference between Collage, Montage, and Mosaic

    The difference between collage, montage and mosaic comes from the attached material. For more details will be explained in the discussion below.

    Material

    Collage uses different types of materials on one pattern. For example, ingredients from nature are combined with processed ingredients. Montage uses material from several pictures that have been combined into a new work, while mosaic is an arrangement of pieces with the same type of material to form something according to your wishes.

    Final Result

    Montage consists of one material, but comes from many pictures and the end result is a theme. Mosaic comes from small pieces of material arranged to form a specific theme. Unlike montage and collage, mosaic is a picture made up of small parts. Traditionally, mosaics are small tiles made of terracotta, broken glass, ceramic or marble and are usually attached to floors and walls.

    From the differences above it can be said that this mosaic has a difference from collage and montage. So, mosaic is an artistic technique that uses small parts to create a whole picture or object. According to the Tate Gallery, mosaics have been used as a decorative medium for over five thousand years.

    From a distance, mosaic art sparkles with an impressive array of colors and patterns. Up close, the intricacies that make up this work can be revealed, and you can see how much time and energy must be spent to create a work of art.

     

  • Definition of Monopoly, Features, Causes, and Examples in Indonesia

    Definition of monopoly – Actually, monopoly is very attached and close to everyday life, Reader! Has Reader ever found a business or product, where the product and business are owned by only one company?

    More or less, that’s an example of a monopoly. Then, what is the true meaning of monopoly and what are the effects and examples of monopoly in Indonesia? Check out the following explanation, yes!

    Definition of Monopoly

    The word monopoly itself, comes from Greek which comes from kaya monos ie own and polein which means seller.

    From the root of the word monopoly, the term monopoly can be defined as a condition where there is only one seller who supplies or offers certain goods or services.

    The term monopoly can also be interpreted as a situation where a business is dominated by only one company or market and the company or market has no competitors.

    In general, products and services that come from monopoly companies are products that are one of the needs that are much needed by society in general.

    According to Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia (KBBI), the concept of monopoly is defined as the procurement of certain merchandise either in the local or national market and at least a third of the market is controlled by one person or one group. So, the price of goods can be controlled.

    Monopoly can also be interpreted as a business situation that is fully held by only one company.

    This can happen because only those companies have services that are needed by many people. So, making the company has no other competitors.

    By practicing monopoly, the company can take maximum profit.

    The monopoly market itself is one of the forms of interaction between demand and supply that is characterized by only one producer or single producer facing many consumers or many buyers.

    According to Law Number 5 of 1999 on the Prohibition of Monopoly Practices and Unhealthy Business Competition, this monopoly activity is the control over the production and or marketing of goods or over the use of certain services by only one group of business actors and has no other competitors.

    So it can be concluded, that the company that does this monopolistic act can obtain maximum profit at the same time and enable the company to become a market operator as well as a price operator.

    In monopoly activities, there is a monopoly market. Monopoly market is a form where there is a single seller who dominates the market, the seller has the power to determine the price and does not have similar goods.

    In the monopoly market, there are no other similar goods and there are no competitors. A seller in a monopoly market is called a monopolist. As monopolists, they have the power to set prices.

    Because of their power, the monopolist is also called a price setter or price maker. A monopolist can reduce and increase prices by determining the amount of goods that will be produced by the company.

    The fewer goods produced by the company, the more expensive the price of the goods and vice versa.

    Despite that, the seller also has limitations in determining the price. If the pricing is too expensive, then people will delay purchasing the product.

    Consumers will also try to find or make substitute goods or substitutes for the product or even, consumers will look for goods in the black market because they are looking for goods that are available and at a cheap price.

    The terms monopoly, monopolistic and monopsony are terms that have different definitions. Although the three terms may sound the same to Reader’ ears. So, what is the difference?

    As explained earlier, monopoly means that there is one seller present in the market. So monopsony means that there is only one buyer in one market.

    While the term monopolistic, is a condition where there are several companies that offer similar services, but the services are not exactly the same.

    This happens because of differences in the field of technology, field and so on.

    Well, up to now Reader has understood not the meaning of monopoly, monopoly market even to some terms that sound the same as the word monopoly?
    In order to better understand, Reader needs to know the causes of the following monopoly.

    Causes of Monopoly Actions

    Why can monopoly actions occur? There are several reasons why this monopolistic action can happen to the point of causing unhealthy competition between companies or traders. Here is the explanation.

    1. Monopoly by Nature

    The first cause of monopoly is natural. Like when there is a company that is located close to the resources used.

    So the geographical location and climate of the location will also support the company to be the only company that provides its products and services.

    2. Monopoly by Law

    The second cause is due to regulations or laws that apply in a country. It is intended to make a product or service related to the needs of the community, so that the price can be controlled by the government.

    3. Monopoly by license

    The third reason for the existence of monopoly activities is because a company has patent rights on the intellectual property owned by the company, for example such as Microsoft and Google.

    Characteristics of Monopoly

    From the understanding above, there are some general characteristics or features to identify monopoly companies. Here is the explanation.

    1. There is only one supplier or one company

    This first feature, of course, is the most easily identified feature of a monopoly. When a company has a monopoly, then the company will be the only supplier of goods or products needed by the community.

    That is, the company controls the resources completely, so that only the company is able to make the product or item.

    2. No Replacement or Substitution Goods

    Because there is no other supplier or company, then the consumer does not have any alternative goods, when an item is empty. So, there is no substitute or substitution item that can be chosen by the consumer.

    3. Price Maker

    As has been explained before, that companies that carry out monopoly activities get large profits from the results of the authority they have, that is, they can freely determine the price of a product and determine the price freely, so the third characteristic of a monopoly is the price maker.

    4. Prospective newcomers, will have difficulty entering the market

    The fourth feature of monopoly, is that new entrants who will enter the market will encounter many obstacles.

    This is due to the three characteristics of the previous monopoly, namely that the company can freely determine the price of its own products and the consumer has become accustomed to not having a choice, except to buy the product or service sold by the company.

    5. Have a Small Advertising Budget

    Monopoly companies generally have a relatively small marketing and advertising budget.

    6. Causing Injustice

    Monopoly practices that occur can cause injustice and loss for the community.

    Monopolies in Indonesia and Examples

    Because this monopoly activity can cause losses, the Indonesian government also applies special policies so that the practice of monopoly activities is not carried out arbitrarily by irresponsible parties.

    In Indonesia, the agency that has the authority to oversee the practice of monopolistic activities is called the Business Competition Supervision Commission or KPPU.

    Where this KPPU has a task that has been regulated in Law Number 5 of 1999, about the realization of a more efficient national economy and welfare of its people.

    The KPPU itself has a mission which is the prosecution and prevention of the internalization of business competition values ​​as well as institutional strengthening.

    There are several examples of monopoly companies in Indonesia. Some of them are Pertamina, PLN and PDAM, where the three companies are the main and only suppliers of fuel, electricity and clean water for the needs of the community.

    The three companies in Indonesia are companies that have a monopoly because of the law. So, the government has the authority to determine the price of the three products.

    Apart from Indonesia, of course this monopoly market also happens abroad. Examples of foreign companies that have monopolies are Google, Microsoft and Facebook.

    The three companies have competitors, but those competitors generally do not have the same strength as the three companies and find it difficult to compete.

    The three companies have a monopoly, because they have patent rights. So that only those three companies are able to produce services or products needed by consumers.

    As has been explained above, that monopolies can bring losses for the people as well as profits for the companies that do the monopolies.

    Until then, the anti-monopoly movement emerged as well as other policies that discuss monopoly, including monopoly policy in Indonesia.

    Regarding this matter, Asril Sitompul, the author of the book ” Monopoly Practices and Unhealthy Business Competition ” explained that the legal regulations regarding monopoly in Indonesia are still quite new and about business competition and anti-monopoly which is interesting to read. If interested in reading this book, Reader can buy it by clicking on the following book.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Monopoly Markets

    After learning the characteristics and examples of monopolies in Indonesia, Reader certainly knew that monopolies bring a lot of losses for some parties, but also bring good fortune for others.

    Here are the advantages and disadvantages of a monopoly market.

    A. Disadvantages of Monopoly Markets

    1. Harming Consumers

    As explained in the definition of monopoly, due to the practice of monopoly, consumers do not have other product alternatives other than the products and services that have been provided by the company that performs the monopoly.

    As a result, consumers feel reluctant to buy these products and services, because the prices charged by companies sometimes rise to the point where they are considered unreasonable by consumers.

    However, because the company has a monopoly, the company does not feel afraid of losing customers, and the company can provide less than optimal service to the extent that it causes the customer to lose.

    2. Triggering the Presence of the Black Market

    The monopoly market has a second disadvantage, which is that it can trigger the emergence of a black market. Where the black market, will sell products similar to monopoly companies, but sold or obtained illegally.

    The black market makes consumers, get products and services at more affordable prices when compared to the monopoly market, so it is not rare that consumers prefer to buy their necessities in the black market.

    3. Requires a Big Cost

    The last disadvantage caused by monopoly is that it requires large costs. A company that wants to monopolize, then it must have a large enough cost, so that the company continues to be able to monopolize the market by using the latest technologies in accordance with the development of the times.

    B. Advantages of Monopoly Markets

    In addition to the shortcomings caused by the monopoly market, apparently the monopoly market still brings profit for some parties, especially to the perpetrators of the monopoly activities.

    Here are some advantages of a monopoly market.

    1. Low Level of Competition

    Companies that are in the monopoly market, have a fairly low level of competition.

    2. Freely Install Price Tariffs

    As the only supplier, the company will not be afraid of losing customers even if it gives a high price that is considered unreasonable.

    3. Continuous Innovation

    Companies involved in monopoly activities will continue to improve innovation and creativity, so that consumers feel satisfied and loyal to the company.

    4. Efficiency of the Company’s Operational Activities

    Because it does not have competitors, even companies that have a monopoly can run their operations more efficiently, in addition to that, companies will also be more free to develop ideas and innovations that are needed without interference from other competitors.

    Why Are Companies Able To Do Monopolies?

    There are several reasons that make a company able to monopolize, among them are the following.

    1. The company has mastered the raw materials needed by many consumers and has become one of the staples that people always look for.
    2. Monopoly companies have production techniques and production methods that are not owned by other companies or groups. So that it is easy for the company to process and utilize production techniques well in order to produce a specific product.
    3. Companies have special rights granted by the government, for example such as patent rights on certain inventions and licenses. An example is patent rights owned by Facebook or Microsoft.
    4. Companies that will do monopoly, have a large capital cost. For example, such as a combination of several companies, or drug companies that buy other companies or consolidate with other companies to be able to dominate the market.
    5. Companies that are involved in the monopoly market, generally have certain unique performance and skills and these skills are not owned by other companies. An example is business done by startup companies , startup companies generally have advanced technology, such as artificial intelligence that other companies do not have.
    6. Companies involved in the monopoly market are generally companies that have been standing for a long time and are too large. So that the company dominates upstream to downstream and forms an ecosystem that is difficult for new players to enter.
    7. Companies can monopolize, due to market limitations as well as the natural nature of the industry.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of monopoly , the causes of its occurrence, characteristics, and examples.:

  • Understanding Modernization: Characteristics, Impact and Examples

    Understanding Modernization – Does Reader know that modernization can cause an impact on every element present in society? This modernization can be one of the factors that can cause a community environment to experience progress and change in it.

    One of the impacts of modernization that is easily realized and felt is progress in the field of technology. As in the past, mobile phones were not yet available, so the process of exchanging messages with people far away could only be done through letters delivered by couriers and took a long time. The development of technology as well as the discussion of basic concepts to the most complex concepts can also be found by Reader in the book Deep Learning Modernization of Machine Learning for Big Data.

    So what exactly is modernization? And what impact can be caused by modernization other than technological progress? Here is a brief explanation of modernization.

    Meaning of Modernization

    Modernization is a process of change from something that is not yet advanced to something more advanced. Modernization can also be said to be a process of transformation towards progress or improvement in various aspects of life in society which Reader can learn through the book Risk Society Towards New Modernity below.

    Modernization comes from the Latin word ” modernus” . The word ” modernus” also comes from the word ‘ modo’ which is the way and ‘ ermus’ which indicates the time period in the present.

    Some members also expressed their opinions about the meaning of modernization. Like Harold Rosenberg, according to Rosenberg modernization is a new tradition and refers to urbanization or to what extent and how the erosion of the rural nature of a group of people can occur.

    Soerjono Soekanto also expressed his opinion on modernization. According to Soerjono, modernization is a process of change that initially changes from a traditional way to a more advanced way. The process of change is intended to improve the well-being of the community.

    Ogburn and Nimkoff argue that modernization is an effort that is made to be able to direct society to be able to project itself into a more real future and not just wishful thinking.

    According to Abdul Syam, modernization is a process of transformation to more advanced and improved changes in various aspects of social life.

    Different from other experts, Neil Smelser thinks that modernization is an irregularity in the structure of society that performs different functions at the same time, then will be divided into several substructures to be able to carry out those more specific functions. Smelser also thinks that modernization will always involve the concepts of structural differentiation.

    From the understanding according to the expert, it can be concluded that modernization is a process of change that is present in social life and can make social life more advanced or improved.

    Characteristics of Modernization

    Reader needs to know that modernization has the purpose of being able to improve the quality of life of the community, besides this modernization process also seeks to be able to improve the mindset in the community so that it becomes better.

    When viewed from the impact, modernization will certainly provide good impacts for life in the community. Therefore, Reader needs to recognize this modernization change process.

    Modernization can be recognized by the society involved in it through several characteristics present in the modernization. Here are the features of modernization.

    1. Society can behave heterogeneously.
    2. Mobility in society is quite high.
    3. Society has no ties to custom.
    4. Community action in the context of modernization is rational.
    5. Having a high level of organization, especially in self-discipline.
    6. Centralization of authority is in the implementation of social planning.
    7. Have a systematic data collection system.
    8. Scientific thinking that exists in society is institutionalized into the life of the ruler and his society.
    9. The creation of a climate favored by the community through modernization in the use of mass communication tools.

    In addition to the characteristics of modernization, a modern society is also one of the characteristics of the occurrence of a modernization process in the environment. Here are the characteristics of modern society.

    1. Heterogeneous , modernized societies will merge and form unions and associations in the development process. A heterogeneous society is also closely related to a multicultural society, that is, a society consisting of different ethnicities and tribes in a certain region.
    2. Open Stratification System , modern society has a stratification system that is open to the changes of the times that are influenced by globalization and can cause the grouping of social strata to fade.
    3. High Mobility of Society , similar to the modernization characteristics of modern society also has high mobility due to the high population movement from villages to cities.
    4. Possessing Objective Thinking , modern society has a more objective nature in looking at something because it sees the existence of many changes and accepts the differences that exist in society.

    Those are some of the characteristics of modernization and modern society that can be distinguished from other social change processes .

    Well, Reader can also learn more about this modernization phenomenon through books available on Sinaumedia.com such as the following book.

    This book was written by Muhammad Taufan and Ine which also summarizes the modernization material as explained in this article. In addition, this book is also compiled using a student-centered learning paradigm, so it will certainly make it easier for Reader when learning Sociology materials such as modernization.

    Impact of Modernization

    As has been explained in the definition and characteristics of modernization, modernization will generally have an impact as a result of the process of changing an environment in society from one that is still backward to progress and become more sophisticated.

    When viewed only from its meaning, this modernization is seen to have a positive impact on the community in its environment. However, it turns out that there is also a negative impact given by modernization, you know.

    In order to be more clear, Reader needs to listen to the impact of modernization, both positive and negative. Here is the explanation.

    1. Positive Impact of Modernization

    • There is a change in values ​​and attitudes. This change happened because society proved to have a thought pattern that changed from an irrational thought pattern to a rational one.
    • There is development in the field of science and technology. This development can make it easier for the community to be active and can encourage the community to think more advanced.
    • Developments in science can also give form to the modernization process that occurs in society.
    • There is an increase in social life that changes for the better. The use of technology, as well as knowledge that develops can improve the function of community life, so that community life becomes much better over time.
    • Society experiences changes in behavior and way of life with science and technology that continues to grow.
    • Modernization can increase the effectiveness and efficiency of individual jobs in the community.
    • The effectiveness and efficiency caused by this modernization has an impact on the production process, so that it can improve the economy in a country.
    • The community will have an open attitude towards change as well as a desire to always innovate in order to achieve the well-being that the community aspires to.

    2. Negative Impact of Modernization

    1. Resulting in social disparity. The social disparity caused by modernization can be seen through the phenomenon of social groups such as homeless, unemployed, street vendors and others.
    2. Causing the strengthening of the gap between the educated community and the uneducated community and can cause changes in the existing social order in the community.
    3. There is an economic gap that can be seen through the difference between the lives of the rich community and the poor community, thus triggering the emergence of a consumptive culture and a culture of demonstration effect or showing off.
    4. Can cause pollution of the natural environment, as a result of development such as industrial factories that occur continuously.
    5. Modernization can have an impact on the increase in criminality, because everyone has a desire to be able to surpass others and try to achieve that goal in various ways including criminal ways.
    6. There is a shift in values ​​in local culture.
    7. The loss of customs from the community’s local culture that has been handed down from generation to generation and become one of the unique attractions and values ​​of the community.
    8. Causing the occurrence of westernization bias or excessive worship of western culture, both in a person’s lifestyle and way of looking.
    9. There is a technological gap or digital divide in society.

    Symptoms of Modernization

    Before the modernization process occurs in a community environment, this modernization occurs through several symptoms that can be viewed from various fields on aspects of life in the community.

    Here is a further explanation of the symptoms of modernization.

    1. Field of Culture

    The symptoms of modernization that occur in the field of culture can be marked through traditional culture that is displaced by the influence of culture from outside. Symptoms in the cultural field can also be seen through the occurrence of acculturation between two different cultures.

    There is also research carried out related to the level of religiosity of Indonesians in general and the ethnic groups in the regions specifically by Prof. Dr. Bungaran Antonius Simanjuntak which was made into a book titled Tradition, Religion, and Acceptance of Modernization in Society.

     

    2. Political Field

    The next symptoms of modernization can be seen through the political field. In the political field, the symptoms of modernization can be seen through the many countries that have escaped colonialism and the emergence of new countries that have become independent.

    In the political field, the symptoms of modernization can also be seen through the growth of democratic countries and the birth of political institutions. In addition, the recognition of human rights is also one of the symptoms of modernization.

    The symptoms of modernization in this political field are the most easily seen or realized by the public, because the democratic system is usually supported through direct and secret general elections involving the public.

    There is also a view of the modernization model of the study of Family Law through the approach of legal epistemology, epistemology owned by KHI and CLD-KHI which is discussed in the book Modernization of Family Law below.

     

    3. Economic field

    In the economic field, the symptoms of modernization can be seen from the increasing complexity of society’s needs for goods and services, so that the industrial sector is then built on a large scale to produce consumer demand goods.

    4. Social Field

    The formation of many new groups in society is a symptom of modernization in the social field. New groups in the society in question such as labor groups, intellectuals, manager groups to economic groups based on their class, namely low class and high class.

     

    Examples of Modernization 

    In order to more clearly understand the material of this modernization, Reader can see some examples of modernization according to the areas affected by modernization. Here are the examples.

    1. Examples of Modernization in the Field of Culture

    a. Behavior

    In the field of culture, one example of modernization is the changing behavior of society from children to adults. An example is the change in the behavior of children in 2021 who tend to be more comfortable debating or being able to critically answer parents’ questions, because they have been given enough knowledge since childhood.

    In Indonesia itself, in order to defend its human dignity, it faces the inevitable challenges of modernity, which is also discussed in the book Religion, Philosophy, Modernity – Human Dignity by Frans Magnis Suseno.

    b. Language

    The language used by modernized societies has also changed. In the past, like in Java, people had difficulty using Indonesian, because their everyday language was Javanese, so it would be difficult to communicate with people outside the island of Java.

    Now, residents of the island of Java can use fluent Indonesian and even master foreign languages.

    c. Lifestyle

    The lifestyle of modern society will change along with the modernization of the society in which it lives. For example, like before, people don’t care too much about fashion and food.

    In the past, the Indonesian people ate food that could be harvested through the produce of the garden or by slaughtering their livestock and their age, the Indonesian people were not too picky when it came to food.

    But now, people tend to choose food more, because they pay attention to their health conditions. In addition, there are vegetarian and other lifestyles that did not exist before.

    2. Examples of Modernization in the Economic Field

    In the economic field, modernization can be seen through the following examples.

    The development of industries in the community, so as to be able to expand employment. In addition, changes in the nature of society that are increasingly consumptive and require many goods and services, such as online taxi services, reflexology massage services and services to spend on daily needs.

    In addition, developments in the field of technology also affect the economic field, such as industries or factories that produce goods now using machines more than humans. This is considered, because machines are more effective, cheaper and faster than humans, so that the employment field narrows and causes the termination of employment relationships on a large scale.

    3. Examples of Modernization in the Political Field 

    In the political field, examples of modernization can be seen through the influence of relations between countries that grow and develop on an international and global scale. In addition, there are visions and missions that make up international organizations and consist of several countries such as the UN, ASEAN, the EU and so on.

    The establishment of bilateral and multilateral cooperation is also one of the examples of modernization in the political field. This cooperation from various sources is one of the consequences of globalization and is expected to provide benefits for the interests of countries that establish cooperation.

    4. Examples of Modernization in the Social Field 

    It’s easy for people to access information quickly just by using a mobile phone. Now there are many online media that will always provide updates on topics that are attractive to readers.

    The ease of reading news and accessing information is one example of modernization in the social field.

    In addition to the ease of accessing information, growth in the field of transformation and distribution processes is also an example of modernization in the social field. For example, public transportation is available in various regions, even in remote regions, as well as online ojek that can reach wherever Reader wants to go.

    Currently in Indonesia there is also a KRL that has been officially used since July 1, 2013 due to this modernization. Learn about the implementation of e-ticketing at KRL and various other service innovations that are discussed in the book Untold Story E-Ticketing – “Behind the Scenes” Modernization of KRL Jabodetabek .

    Reader, that’s a brief explanation of the material of modernization starting from its meaning according to experts, characteristics, symptoms to examples of modernization.

     

  • Understanding Moderators: Duties, Must Haves and How to Be

    Moderator: Meaning, Duties, and How to Be – Do you know Najwa Shihab? Or maybe, you become one of the millions of viewers who are always mesmerized by the way he drives events? Or even, maybe you have ambitions to be like Najwa Shihab? Conducting interviews and also leading discussion activities between important figures in this country?

    Indeed, it cannot be denied that recently, the popularity of Najwa Shihab and the television show she hosts is increasing, especially among young people who are starting to think critically and are happy to find various kinds of information. Through the events he led, Najwa Shihab often invited various important speakers to then be invited to discuss various issues that are being hotly discussed by the community.

    The ability possessed by Najwa Shihab to guide the course of a discussion is indeed one of the main attractions of the event. His firm and straightforward manner and his ability to ask sharp questions seemed to be able to hypnotize and attract the attention of the event’s connoisseurs.

    Common people often think that a moderator has the same meaning as a master of ceremony (MC) or what is commonly called a host. This is because the two professions have the same task, which is to guide the course of an event. However, in reality, the two professions are different.

    The difference between moderators and event leaders is generally found in their duties and responsibilities. A moderator has the duty and responsibility to guide the exchange of ideas between members in the forums. For example, such as in debates, discussions, deliberations, meetings, speeches, and various other similar activities. While the MC or event driver, has a wider duty and responsibility that is to drive in various events but comprehensively, covering from the opening of the event to the closing.

    Well, in this article, we will discuss various things about moderators. Starting from the understanding of moderators, duties and responsibilities, functions, anything that a moderator should have, and also the steps that should be taken when one day you become a moderator. Here is a summary of moderators from kitabisa.net!

    INTERPRETATION OF MODERATORS

    Actually, what is the meaning of moderator? If traced from the original language, which is English, moderator has the meaning of someone who moderates or becomes an intermediary. While according to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), moderator has several meanings, namely:

    1. People who have duties as mediators (referees, judges, etc.)
    2. The leader of the meeting (discussion, meeting, deliberation) who is the mediator in the event of discussion or discussion of problems
    3. A device in the machine that controls or regulates the flow of energy or fuel

    In this article, the context of the moderator that we will discuss is as an intermediary in the running of an event, so you can focus on the meaning from the first and second points.

    A question arose: “why does a discussion need a moderator as an intermediary?”

    One of the main reasons for needing a moderator as an intermediary for discussion activities is time. A moderator is needed as an intermediary for discussion activities, because discussion activities have a predetermined time limit, especially if the discussion activity is shown on TV, then there is a time limit for advertisements, as well as for subsequent TV events. Just imagine if a discussion activity is not given a time limit, then the discussion will be very long and boring.

    A moderator in the discussion activity gives time limits, as a reminder, when party A starts speaking, when party A should stop speaking, when party B starts speaking, and so on until the discussion activity ends according to the time that has been determined.

    Maybe after reading the explanation earlier, you will feel “wow, it seems like being a moderator is not an easy thing”. Before you conclude that, it would be good if you could learn more about the duties, responsibilities, and functions of a moderator.

    MODERATOR’S DUTIES

    Reported from various sources, a moderator has various duties and responsibilities including:

    1. As a controller as well as a supervisor in discussion activities in a forum.
    2. Ensure that the discussion or discussion in the forum, takes place in accordance with the main topic that has been determined.
    3. Create ideas and create new topics so that the forum becomes dynamic and remains alive.
    4. Provide an opening or brief introduction on the explanation of the topic that will be discussed in the forum.
    5. Give a warning or reminder if in the forum there are members of the forum whose discussion becomes irrelevant or has deviated from the main topic being discussed.
    6. Give a warning or warning if there are members of the forum who start to break the rules or are considered to have the potential to disrupt the forum.

    It turns out that there are a lot of responsibilities as a moderator. However, in any case, all the duties and responsibilities of the moderator are very important to do so that the discussion activities in the forum can run well, smoothly, and in accordance with what is expected.

    THINGS THAT SHOULD BE OWNED BY THE MODERATOR

    A moderator should prepare some important things so that discussion activities in the forum can run smoothly. In addition to things that can be prepared, moderators also need to have certain qualities and attitudes in overcoming problems that will arise. Here are the things that a moderator should have:

    1. Mastering the Topic To Be Discussed

    There are many misconceptions about a moderator. Among them is the assumption that the main ability that a moderator must have is to be fluent in speaking. However, it turns out that being fluent in speaking is still not enough. A moderator must have a broad vision, at least must first master the topic to be discussed in the forum.

    Moderators must master the topics that will be discussed in the forum, because even though the moderator does not have the capacity to deliver the material or express his arguments in the forum, the moderator is still someone who has control over the ongoing discussion. Moderators have the responsibility to ensure that the discussions and arguments presented by forum members are still appropriate or relevant to the topic being discussed.

    2. Be neutral and objective

    Moderators are forbidden to have bad or good prejudices and also to be inclined (bias) to one of the parties in the forum. Moderators are required to be objective in carrying out their duties so that justice is created in the discussion activities in the forum for each member.

    3. Have the ability to observe and listen well

    Moderators are required to be able to pay attention to all types of responses, both verbal responses (verbally) and non-verbal responses (body language). Moderators must observe and listen to ensure that no sentences or words are missed from every conversation delivered by the members in the forum.

    4. Able to understand the position

    Moderators do not have the capacity to deliver material and are also prohibited from expressing their personal arguments in the forum they are leading. The moderator is indeed required to master the main topics discussed in the discussion, but this is done because the moderator must understand the main points of the discussion in the discussion. The moderator’s job is to supervise the course of the discussion and therefore, he is not allowed to take over the duties of other members such as by presenting material, presenting arguments, and or talking too much about the topic being discussed in the discussion.

    5. Have a calm but firm attitude

    Debate that occurs in a discussion forum is a natural thing. Sometimes, in the debate, there will be things that can trigger verbal arguments or even fights. Moderators in this situation are required to have a firm attitude towards all members of the discussion forum. Moderators must dare to dissolve at the same time ensure that the discussion activities will continue without interruption. This attitude to be firm should also be accompanied by a calm attitude and not easy to get caught.

    6. Able to melt the atmosphere

    In some situations in a forum, it will be very helpful if a moderator has the ability to make the atmosphere less tense and more relaxed. This is useful to make it easier for forum members to convey their ideas and arguments because the discussion atmosphere in the forum becomes more relaxed and intimate. However, this should be done as necessary and not excessive because if it is excessive then it will even disrupt the progress of the discussion activities.

    HOW TO BE A GOOD MODERATOR

    After knowing the meaning as well as the duties and responsibilities of a moderator, you also need to know the procedures or steps that must be prepared to become a moderator, which include:

    1. Understand the duties and functions of moderators

    The main task and function of a moderator in a debate or discussion activity in a forum is to control the activity while ensuring that the discussion activity will go according to plan. Try to focus on that matter only, there is no need to try to give an opinion or defend one of the parties because that is not the right of a moderator.

    2. Study thoroughly the material or topic to be discussed.

    Learn the material or topic that will be discussed or discussed in the discussion activity. Try to do research through various sources such as articles, books, the internet, or ask the experts directly. It is very important for you to understand the material that will be discussed in order to ensure that the discussions held in the forum remain appropriate and relevant.

    3. Study the order of events carefully.

    A moderator must study the order of events carefully. In this case, a moderator can work with the MC. Studying the order of events can make it easier for moderators to set time limits for each session in discussion activities in the forum.

    4. Learn information about the resource person.

    For a forum that brings a resource person as a speaker, it is mandatory for the resource person to find or learn basic information about the resource person. This will help the moderator to carry out his duties, for example to know the name of the resource person, why the resource person was invited, how much capacity the resource person has, and what questions are appropriate to ask the resource person.

    5. Make a small note.

    For those of you who have difficulty memorizing, small notes in notes can help you to be smooth when being a moderator. There is no ban for moderators to open posts, so it’s okay to post, especially if you really need it.

    6. Keep practicing

    Moderators do have a task that seems not easy. There is no instant result, everything that happens in this world always requires a process. Therefore, with effort, determination, and a high will to continue practicing and learning, of course you will be able to become a great moderator. In addition, you can also buy books on how to become a moderator as your guide and guide to learn more effectively.

     

    CONCLUSION

    Moderator is a mediator or leader of a discussion, meeting, and deliberation. Moderator and MC are two different things. The difference is that an MC is the event guide who manages the course of the event starting from the opening to the closing, while a moderator has duties and responsibilities only to maintain the continuation of a discussion. In carrying out his duties, a moderator must master the topics to be discussed, be firm and objective, be able to mediate disputes in the discussion, and have good observation skills.

    To be a good moderator, the things that need to be prepared are by understanding the meaning, duties, and functions of moderators; learn the topic to be discussed, and also learn basic info from the resource person (if any). Maybe, being a moderator looks like a difficult job, but you can definitely become a reliable moderator if you keep practicing and want to learn.

     

  • Understanding Capital: History, Types, Sources, and Benefits

    Definition of Capital – “Where to get capital from?” We often hear these questions when dealing with the business world. The existence of capital is very necessary to start a business. Without capital, it is impossible for a business unit to run and grow.

    Both small-scale and large-scale businesses still need capital in order to carry out their business activities. So what is the meaning of capital when viewed from a general perspective? And how important is the existence of capital? Reader, now is the time to talk about capital.

    Definition of Capital

    There are many experts who express their opinions about capital. Let’s discuss one by one, Reader.

    1. Bambang Riyanto

    The professor from the Faculty of Economics and Business explained that capital is the result of production that in the future can be reused for further production . In its development, capital is emphasized on value, and buy, or as a collectivity of capital goods.

    While what is meant by capital goods are all the goods in the company with all their productive functions to generate income. In other words, capital is the power to manage capital goods.

    2. Lawrence J. Gitman

    The author of the book Principles of Managerial Finance states that capital is a specific term loan charged to the company. This can be seen in the financial balance of the company on the right side, in addition to the obligations that must be borne at this time.

    3. Drs. Moekijat

    This country’s administration experts have the view that capital is all the things owned by the company. Starting from cash, credit, manufacturing rights, patents, machines for operations, office inventory, digital assets, property, business facilities and equipment, brands, resources, and all things that are valuable but cannot be divided.

    In practice, capital is often viewed from the total ownership of the company. These rights consist of a certain amount of funds, surplus, valuable resources, and indivisible profits.

    4. Jacob Louis Meij

    Professor of Business Economics Groningen University as well as a business economist in the Netherlands believes that capital is all the goods in a company’s household that can be collected to generate income. This can be seen in the balance on the debit side.

    Meanwhile, wealth is the purchasing power that is in various capitals. Its position is on the credit side of the balance sheet.

    5. Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI)

    According to KBBI, capital is a fund that can be used as a parent or fund to do business, release money, and so on. In other words, capital is property (can be in the form of funds, goods, etc.) that can be used to produce something that can increase wealth and profit.

    Still according to KBBI, capital can also be interpreted as something that a person or company uses as supplies to work, fight, and so on.

    If we conclude, capital is all the things we have in the form of money, goods, other assets that we can use to generate profit in running a business. In practice, capital can be categorized into several types, such as cash and non-cash fund capital, debt – receivables, enthusiasm, knowledge, relationships, skills, confidence, brands, ideas, etc.

    So Reader, can we move on to the next point? If not, Reader can try re-reading in a calm condition and good mood . If so, let’s move on to the next point.

    Capital History

    The capital can be obtained through working by hunting, studying, poetry, farming, mining, working in people’s companies, and so on. Then the capital is sold or bartered with something of equal or higher value, or processed first. From the accumulated capital one can do business activities.

    Sometimes, a person has capital in the form of skills and things that cannot be monetized. On the other hand, there are other people who have capital in the form of money but cannot run a business, either because they are busy or because they are not experts in the business. So the cooperation between one party and another started to run a business together based on the capital they each have.

    If the cooperation spreads to the public, then the capital market appears. It’s called the capital market because the public can be the capital of a company without having to get to know the business owner. Then the capital owned by the investor can be sold to other investors. Now, let’s look at the historical record of the capital market.

    1. The First Revenue Sharing System Practiced by Publicans (Years ±3 BC)

    The first revenue-sharing system recorded by history was a joint business run by the Publicans during the Roman Empire. Publicans are people who do business (capitalist average) as general contractors. They became providers of services required by the Roman government, such as providing military needs, collecting taxes, and building public facilities.

    At one time, the Roman Empire was busy strengthening the military so tax collection was done by the Publicans. The tender system used at that time was won by whoever was able to give the highest bid in giving taxes to the government. The profit is obtained from the difference between the tax they collect and the nominal amount deposited to the government.

    This project is very risky and requires a large amount of capital, so the Publicans joined forces. If the amount of property accumulated is smaller than that deposited to the government, the loss is borne by many people. If it is profitable, then the profit share is adjusted to the amount of capital invested in the beginning.

    2. The First Stock Document in the World

    It was Stora Kopparbergs Bergslag that recorded its name as the first company in the world to issue share documents. Copper mining in Falun, Sweden has been started since the 850s by local residents partially.

    On June 16, 1288, the King of Sweden confirmed a document called the Deed of Exchange. The document is the first written document about the fare. In this document it is stated that A. Peter a bishop gets an eighth of the mining revenue. The existence of the division of mining revenue shows that the share document has existed since that time.

    At that time, the mine was managed and administered by a well-organized organization. No longer run by local residents, but run with an integrated system. The organization is named Stora Kopparberg.

    3. The First Capital Market in the World

    Reader must be familiar with the company name Vereenigde Oost Indische Compagnie (VOC). But Reader may be surprised to learn that VOC is the first company in the world to open the capital market. With large capital, the VOC had the ability to monopolize trade. This is one of the reasons why VOC became a very strong company in the economy.

    How much is his wealth? Launching from Visual Capitalist, if equated with the current USD exchange rate, the wealth of the VOC reached $7.9 trillion or the equivalent of 112 trillion. Fantastic amount isn’t it? To achieve the same wealth, it is necessary to combine 20 large companies such as Microsoft, Apple, Exxonmobil, Alibaba, Amazon, Berkshire Hathaway, Samsung, Tencent, and so on.

    The power of the VOC made trade competition in Europe more intense so that the VOC obtained permission to form its own military and political power. So it can be said that the VOC became a “country within a country”. However, due to massive corruption, the VOC went bankrupt and was closed by the Dutch Government. Because of that, there is an insinuation that the VOC is also referred to as Vergaan Onder Corruptie which means destroyed due to corruption.

    As a company that opens the capital market in the world, the capital market in Indonesia has also been going on since the Dutch Government came to power in the colonial era. In 1912, the Netherlands officially opened a stock exchange branch in Batavia (Jakarta).

    Types of Capital

    1. Types of capital based on sources.

    Based on the source, capital is divided into two, namely internal capital and external capital.

    a. Internal Capital

    Internal capital is capital derived from the wealth of company owners, shareholders’ capital, the sale of securities, or capital obtained from company profits.

    Examples of internal capital are vehicles, inventory, means of production, personal savings, buildings, shares, land, company profits, and so on that do not use external wealth.

    b. External capital

    External capital is capital obtained apart from the company’s wealth. The capital can be obtained from investors or creditors such as banks, cooperatives, personal loans.

    Usually, external capital is required due to limited internal capital resources. Company managers are worried that internal capital will not be sufficient to carry out or develop business activities.

    Examples of external capital are loans from banks/cooperatives, unpaid employee salaries, unpaid production costs to suppliers, investments deposited by investors.

    2. Types of Capital Based on Ownership

    Based on the owner, capital is divided into two, namely individual capital and social capital.

    a. Private Capital

    This type of capital is capital that comes from a person. The advantage of private equity is that it facilitates various business activities and provides optimal profit to the owner. Examples of this type of capital are personal property, deposits, and shares.

    b. Social Capital

    This type of capital is capital owned by the community. This capital provides benefits for the community in general in doing business activities. Examples of social capital are roads, ports, markets, bridges, stations, and others.

    3. Types of Capital Based on Its Existence

    If viewed from its nature, capital is divided into two types, namely active capital and passive capital. Here is an explanation of both.

    a. Concrete Capital (Active)

    Concrete capital or active capital is capital that can be seen with the naked eye and tangible. Examples of concrete capital are money, raw materials, buildings or places of business, vehicles, machines, warehouses, etc.

    b. Abstract Capital (Passive)

    Abstract capital is business capital that cannot be seen with the naked eye. Its value is difficult to measure directly. However, abstract capital is very important for the sustainability of the company.

    Examples of abstract capital are knowledge, skills, copyright, brand, social media, business connections, managerial, and so on. Concrete capital and abstract capital are both needed to develop and expand a company.

    Both should go hand in hand. Because to start business operations, Reader must have knowledge first. Reader also needs funds to start production. To make and market products, Reader needs the right supplier and customer connections. To develop managerial skills, Reader needs to upgrade their knowledge and skills. Thus, both are equally important.

    4. Types of Capital Based on Their Properties

    Based on its nature, capital is divided into two types, namely fixed capital and current capital. Come on Reader, let’s learn what fixed capital and current capital are.

    a. Fixed Capital

    Fixed capital or fixed capital is capital that can be used for production several times in the long term and repeatedly. Examples of fixed capital are buildings, machines, land, computers, vehicles, test equipment, etc.

    b. Liquid Capital

    Current capital or variable capital is capital that is used up in one production process. Examples of current capital are raw materials, fuel, disposable tools, and so on.

    Capital Benefit

    1. Prepare raw materials.

    Before doing the production process, Reader definitely needs raw materials. Procurement of raw materials requires capital.

    2. Doing the production process.

    To carry out the production process, of course we need costs such as water to wash materials, soap, fuel, electricity, gas, and so on.

    3. Manage business permits.

    Having a business license is essential for a business unit. Especially if you want to cooperate with external parties and in large numbers. In managing business permits, Reader needs to prepare capital because it sometimes requires the services of a notary.

    4. Manage patent rights.

    Some of Reader works in business activities may be unique and prone to be recognized as the property of other companies. So Reader needs to manage the patent rights so that the product is registered in your name. Managing patent rights also requires capital.

    5. Paying employee salaries.

    Due to the many activities in running the business, Reader needs the help of others. You need capital to be able to fulfill employee rights with a salary that is in accordance with the agreement between your company and the employee. In addition, allowances, insurance, overtime pay also need to be recorded.

    6. Savings.

    A good company is a company that has a savings account as a reserve fund. This savings can also serve as capital in a desperate situation.

    7. Increase the trust of other parties.

    The existence of capital can increase the trust of your prospective partner. Some prospective partners consider the financial condition of the company they will work with. This is not surprising because to make sure that the company that will work together is not playing around.

    8. Other requirements.

    Other requirements that require capital are to open new branches, expand markets, transportation, pulses, company inventory, and other company needs.

     

  • Understanding Social Mobility: Theory, Form, Influencing Factors

    Definition of Social Mobility – Does Reader realize that in this social life, there is bound to be a shift or change in social strata for each individual? Or even the move or change in social strata has actually happened to you and your family?

    The existence of the transfer or change of the social stratum is a natural thing to be able to happen, whether it is a change towards a higher social stratum or even a lower one from the previous social stratum. This happens because every member of society must want to have a better life than before, so they will actively try to change the social strata.

    So, what is the meaning of social mobility? Reader must already know that mobility means displacement, so what about social mobility?

    Well, so that Reader can understand that, let’s read the following comments!

    Understanding Appropriate Mobility According to Experts

    The discussion about social mobility is included in the discipline of sociology, so the understanding of it is of course expressed by experts who are sociologists.

    Edward Ransford

    According to Ransford, social mobility is a move that leads up or down in a hierarchical social environment.

    Anthony Giddens

    According to Giddens, social mobility is something that refers to the movement of an individual and groups between different socioeconomic positions.

    William Kornblum

    Kornblum believes that social mobility is the movement of individuals, families, and social groups from one social layer to another.

    Michael S. Bassis

    According to Bassis, social mobility is a process of upward and downward movement in the socioeconomic environment that can change a person’s social status in the social order.

    Kimball Young and Raymond W. Mack

    These two sociologists stated that social mobility is a process of mobility in the social structure, namely certain patterns that regulate the organization in a social group.

    Paul B. Horton

    Horton also expressed his opinion related to social mobility, which is a movement of movement from one social class to another, or movement from one stratum to another.

    Well, based on these definitions, it can be concluded that social mobility is a process of movement that occurs in individuals or groups from one social position to another social position . Regarding Indonesian society today, it has an open social layer system, so the level of social mobility can increase compared to the closed social layer system. In a closed social layer system, it actually tends to be low in terms of social mobility, as can be seen in societies that still prioritize the caste system.

    Social mobility will always involve three main things, namely.

    1. Social class changes, both upwards and downwards.
    2. Experienced by humans as individuals and in groups.
    3. Gaining a new social class.

    Theory About Social Mobility

    In the same way as the main subject matter in the sub-discipline of science, this social mobility also has various theories, so it does not come from the thought of “nawur” only. Theories about social mobility have been formulated by sociologists, such as Martin Lipset and Hans Zetterberg, Ralph Turner, and Pitirim Sorokin. Well, here is a review of those theories!

    1. Martin Lipset and Hans Zetterberg

    The theory of social mobility that was initiated by Martin and Hans focuses on the causes and dimensions of the occurrence of social mobility among the community.

    In terms of the causes of social mobility there are two. First, there is supply from unfilled status positions. Second, there is a change in levels. Simply put, whenever there is social mobility with upward movement, there will definitely also be downward movement.

    Meanwhile, in terms of the dimensions of social mobility, there are four dimensions:

    • Occupation Ranking

    In this first dimension, experts argue that a job owned by an individual is believed to be an important factor that differentiates the existence of beliefs, values, norms, habits, and even emotional expression from an individual.

    • Consumption Ranking

    In this consumption ranking dimension, it refers to the lifestyle owned by an individual or a group of people. People who have the same lifestyle and honor ( prestige ) will usually be in the same consumption class. This consumption calculation index is not based on total employment income, but on the total income that has been spent on certain activities.

    • Social Class Ranking

    In this dimension, an individual can be said to be in the same social class as other individuals, when they accept the individual together and have relationships between individuals.

    For example, A is an ordinary student who is in the middle social class. However, he hangs out with a group of students in the upper social class. Well, the people who are in that group, accept A with pleasure to join them. This makes A in the upper social class dimension, even though he comes from a middle social class.

    • Power Rankings

    In this ranking dimension, it refers to role relationships, in the form of power relationships owned by individuals. They believe that the power or position owned by other individuals can be a “vehicle” in this social mobility effort.

    2. Ralph Turner

    The theory proposed by Ralph Turner links the education system with existing social mobility efforts. The assumption behind the thought is that there is an open class system, marked by the opening of public schools, so that there will be opportunities for the community to do vertical social mobility.

    Ralph Turner also stated that there are two types of social mobility, which are based on community norms, namely sponsor mobility and contest mobility.

    In sponsor-type mobility, the determination of community members who can enter the upper social class is through selection and is based on some necessary criteria. The determination also cannot be canceled by any strategy.

    Meanwhile, in the type of contest mobility, there is a system where the upper social status becomes a gift or reward for a person, if he succeeds through the various efforts he does in an open competition. From the “contest” of the competition, a person will use their abilities and strategies to compete with other individuals fairly.

    3. Pitirim Sorokin

    The third theory expressed by Sorokin is related to the opportunity or chance of social mobility for an individual or a group of individuals.

    Sorokin thinks that in a society not everyone will get the same opportunity as others to be able to change their social status.

    Through the theory, Sorokin indirectly divided two types of social mobility, namely horizontal mobility and vertical mobility.

    Forms of Social Mobility

    Basically, every human being, both individually and in groups, will never feel satisfied with what they get in their lives, so they want to continue to move towards a better social status. Social mobility is of course closely related to social stratification, because it refers to the definition of movement from one social layer to another, both downward and upward.

    Well, the following are the forms of mobility that occur in the social order.

    1. Horizontal Social Mobility

    Horizontal social mobility is the change of individuals and groups as social objects towards other social groups of equal status. The meaning of this level is that there is no change in the degree of the person’s position.

    For example, Pak Kuncoro is a Mathematics teacher in high school, but because the high school environment does not suit him, he decided to become a Mathematics teacher in junior high school.

    In horizontal social mobility this can happen in the following cases:

    • Level or Status

    Social mobility is closely related to the level or social status possessed by an individual, even if it is equal or horizontal. For example, Pak Yohan was the principal at SMA Produce, then he was transferred to become the principal at SMA Wei. What happened to Pak Yohan can still be called social mobility but in an equal social status.

    • Territory

    Social mobility can happen in any small matter. Even moving the place or region where you work can also be called horizontal social mobility, because your social status is still the same as before.

    2. Vertical Social Mobility

    Vertical social mobility is a form of movement of individuals or groups as social objects towards unequal social positions. The meaning of unequal is that the social status can go up (up) or down (down). There are several factors that cause vertical social mobility, namely:

    • Wealth

    This factor can certainly change the position or social position of a person, which can make him richer or even poorer.

    • Authority

    Factors of power can also cause vertical social mobility. A person who has a certain power tends to easily rise to a position so that his power increases and his social mobility can increase drastically. And vice versa, when a person does not have enough power to rise to a position, he will also experience downward social mobility.

    • Education

    The main channel so that a person can experience social mobility fairly is through education, especially formal education. A person with a good educational background will certainly experience an increase in position and social status, especially when working.

    The Direction of Upward Vertical Social Mobility

    Previously, it has been written that this vertical social mobility has two directions, namely upwards and downwards. For upward social mobility, it also has two forms, namely:

    • Get into a higher position or social status

    In this upward social mobility, it usually happens that someone who was at the bottom of social status at the time, then something happens that causes him to get an increase in social status. For example, there is an honorary teacher who was accepted by CPNS. That of course made him experience an increase in social status as a result of his promotion.

    • Form a new group

    The formation of this new group is based on the fact that the group did not exist before. However, it should be known that the “figures” who make up this new group must also be of a higher social status.

    The Direction of Social Mobility is Downward

    Similar to the upward (upward) direction of social mobility, downward (downward) social mobility also has the main forms, namely:

    • Drop a position

    This demotion will usually be related to the department in his work environment. For example, a retired civil servant. When he becomes a pensioner, of course he will indirectly lower his social status because his power when holding a certain position has “lost”.

    • The decrease in the degree of individual groups because there is disintegration

    According to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), disintegration is a state of disunity. As a result of this disintegration, a group of individuals can drop their social status simultaneously.

    3. Intergenerational Social Mobility

    This inter-generational mobility is marked by the development of the standard of living in a family’s life, whether it is decreasing or increasing. The main thing in this form of mobility is not the development of the offspring, but the transfer of social status that has an impact on the generation.

    For example, there is a chili trader who only completed his education up to Primary School. However, he managed to send his son to school until he graduated from sailing school. This child managed to change his and his family’s status so that it could be different from the previous status of his parents.

    4. Intragenerational Social Mobility

    Intragenerational horizontal mobility is the transfer of status experienced by a person in the same generation. The meaning of the same generation is that the transfer of the status happens to himself, not to the achievements of his children or family members.

    For example, there is someone who previously worked as a construction porter. Thanks to his perseverance and luck, he managed to become a foreman.

    Another example is that teenagers born in the ’90s have the opportunity to develop science and technology because they are currently in the digital and globalization era.

     

    Inhibiting Factors and Encouraging Factors of Social Mobility

    Factors Inhibiting the Occurrence of Social Mobility

    The occurrence of this social mobility is driven by several factors, namely structural factors and individual factors. Well, here is the description.

    Structural Factors

    1. Job Structure

    Generally, economic activities carried out in the community are divided into two sectors, namely the formal sector and the informal sector. The existence of these differences clearly affects the level of “success” of the social mobility of the people involved.

    Especially in the agricultural sector, the members of the community involved are more likely to have a low status position, so the level of mobility will also be low.

    However, that does not necessarily make them “fail” in their social mobility efforts. Right now there are many members of the community who work in the agricultural sector and have succeeded in social mobility, both horizontally and vertically.

    2. Double Economy

    This dual economy usually occurs in developing countries, causing dualism. First, economic activities are still dominated by traditional elements. Second, its economic activities are dominated by modern elements.

    3. Learning Experience

    Members of the community who come from the middle social class, generally have a more secure learning experience than the learning experience owned by members of the community from the lower social class.

    Moreover, there is a view that degrees, tests, recommendations, even the network of relationships between friends can be a place to exchange information accompanied by recommendations related to job opportunities. This makes it difficult for outsiders to “break through”, so it will cause discrimination.

    Individual Factors

    1. Differences in Ability
    2. Differences in Behavior
    • Education
    • Work Habits
    • Delayed Pleasure Patterns
    • Ability to Play
    • Value Gap Patterns
    • Luck Factor

    Economic Conditions

    The economic situation is the main thing to encourage the occurrence of social mobility, especially in individuals or groups of individuals who live in low economic conditions. When they “dare” to move to another area and manage to raise their status even if it is not too high, it can be called mobility.

    Driving Factors for Social Mobility

    1. Changes in the Political Situation

    Changes in the political situation that occur in a country can basically be a form of people’s support for the new government structure. Well, through those supports, then an individual also has the desire to develop his “business” so that he can do social mobility.

    2. Social and Cultural Changes

    In community life, whether in urban or rural areas, there will always be changes, both in social structure, social interaction, and the prevailing value system. These changes can later encourage individuals to adjust to the demands of the changes, so that they will unconsciously create a desire to do social climbing.

    Remember, social climbing is the transfer of the social status of members of society from a lower social class to a higher social class. Not only that, technological progress and ideological changes also open up the possibility of upward mobility and “create” a new stratification that develops in society.

    3. Economic Changes

    The economic situation that is going on in a society, of course, gives encouragement to individuals or groups of individuals to improve their social status. Especially if the economic situation at that time improved and made them successful in carrying out various types of business.

    1. Poverty Factor
    2. Factors of Class Discrimination
    3. Racial and Religious Difference Factors
    4. Gender Difference Factors
    5. Difference of Interest

    Well, that’s the explanation of the meaning of social mobility and its forms. Reader must have experienced this social mobility, both between generations and intragenerations, because this is very natural to happen, especially to all individuals who live in an open social layer system.

     

  • Understanding MPV Cars: Features, Types, Advantages and Disadvantages

    Understanding MPV Cars: Features, Types, Advantages and Disadvantages

    Definition of MPV Car For users of four-wheeled vehicles, especially those who use the vehicle as a family car, the MPV car type is indeed the right choice. Apart from that, the size of the car is large enough to accommodate up to seven people, this car is also very comfortable to use for traveling and its function is very flexible.

    For Reader friends who are interested in owning a car, of course this MPV type car is very interesting to own. However, for those of you who are still wondering what the heck is an MPV car? In this discussion, we will present related information about the MPV car to make it easier for Reader to consider this type of car to buy.

    For that, let’s find out the meaning of the MPV car, its types, functions, as well as its advantages and disadvantages in this discussion.

    Further information related to the MPV car can be read below!

    What is an MPV car?

    Multi Purpose Vehicle (in Indonesian means: Multipurpose Vehicle, abbreviated as MPV (“MPV”) is a classification of “multipurpose” vehicles that can be used both as passenger and cargo carriers. This type of vehicle is usually classified as a “minibus” (small bus) based on its shape This MPV-type vehicle usually comes in two production versions, namely passenger (with rear passenger seats) and cargo (without windows and rear seats) designed only for cargo transportation.

    The first MPV was made in France in 1987 with the Renault Espace. With the creation of the MPV car, it became a great advance in its time because it could transport more passengers without having to carry a lot of cargo.

    Now the MPV also appears in a new category that is mentioned as a mini MPV with a passenger capacity of 5 passengers but in terms of cargo it can carry more goods than a sedan.

    In the 1990s the MPV movement was quite large in Indonesia, the most popular among the community in the early 90s was Toyota Kijang which offered 1.8 (82 hp) and 1.5 (66 hp) engines which are known to be repulsive and suitable for road conditions in Indonesia. Furthermore, Isuzu introduced a diesel MPV that is in great demand, namely the Isuzu Panther which is known to be very economical with a 2300 cc OHV engine with 63 bhp.

    Then Daihatsu did not want to miss out on other segments, in 1994 it changed the look of the Daihatsu Zebra to the Daihatsu Zebra Espass which offered a 1600 cc engine with 88 hp from other competitors at the time. besides, the 1300 cc (75 hp) engine is said to be more economical.

    Among its competitors, Suzuki Carry is the most suitable for the purchasing power of the public, besides being known for its affordable price, low maintenance costs, and the cheapest fuel consumption in its class. Suzuki Carry will reach the Indonesian community with three engines, namely 1500cc (80hp), 1300cc (72hp) and 1000cc (52hp).

    kijang mpv car

    MPV car features

    As we know that there are many types of cars in the market, one of the most popular is the MPV car. Well, to distinguish the type of MPV car from other types of car, first know the following characteristics of the MPV car.

    1. MPV Passenger Capacity

    It is a vehicle designed for family needs. No wonder if one of its features is a spacious enough cabin that can accommodate up to 7-8 passengers.

    2. Machine Capacity

    As a universal family car, the average MPV engine capacity is less than 1500 cc. Unlike SUVs that are designed to drive on extreme roads and have an engine capacity of 1500 cc or more. MPV is indeed a type of vehicle that is more suitable for driving on flat roads.

    3. Car body

    Because it is used to transport passengers and goods, usually the MPV body is higher and wider, so the interior cabin is wider. These features are also an advantage of the MPV car type, where the slogan “relief makes you happy” This MPV type car is very suitable as a family vehicle.

    4. Operating system

    The operating system has the following functions. Most types of MPV cars use a two-wheel drive system, both front and rear wheel drive.

    5. Clearance

    Other characteristics of MPV cars can be seen in the clearance, which is the distance from the bottom of the car to the ground. This type of MPV has a fairly high ground clearance, an average of more than 200 mm, which makes it possible to drive even on rough roads.

    MPV car type

    MPV cars themselves are divided into several types, namely low, medium and premium types. Here is an explanation of the types of MPV:

    1. Low MPV

    The Low Type MPV is a category of MPV with simpler features and a body that is not too big. But this type can still meet daily transportation needs and save fuel.

    2. Medium MPV

    Being one level above the low MPV, the medium type MPV is a class with a larger body and more complete features than the low MPV. The price of this type of car is slightly more expensive compared to Low MPV.

    3. Premium MPV

    This type is the most advanced type of car in the MPV class. The car body in this category is bigger, with an interior that can be considered VIP class.

    Advantages of MPV cars

    In addition to being a multi-purpose vehicle, MPV cars have several advantages that are a plus compared to other types of cars, among others:

    1. Large capacity

    As a minibus class, this type of MPV is indeed a fairly large type of car. Certainly to fulfill its role as a means of transportation. Its dimensions can accommodate many passengers.

    Like a mini bus, this MPV can accommodate 8 people. The spacious cabin it carries also makes the front row passengers comfortable. The distance between rows of seats is relatively the same regardless of whether it is the second or third row.

    In addition to being a family vehicle, this MPV type car also has a passenger space that is large enough to fit in the trunk of the car. It has enough space for your belongings when traveling with the family.

    2. An environmentally friendly car

    Another advantage of this MPV car is the jar sector in the kitchen. Most types of MPV cars now have environmentally friendly and fuel-efficient engines that are usually more economical.

    3. Relatively Affordable Prices

    This superiority can be one of the strong reasons why MPVs are so popular in Indonesia, namely the price range. The price tag is relatively cheaper than other cars in the same class. Another advantage is that MPVs tend to have a more competitive purchase price. In fact, the price is considered more affordable than other types of cars. In addition, MPV operating and maintenance costs are also relatively cheap, such as fuel consumption, monthly maintenance, service costs, and the purchase of spare parts. The price of the MPV will not drop far from the purchase price. Provided that the condition of the car is still prime and in good condition.

    4. Large Baggage

    After the passenger capacity, the next advantage when buying an MPV car is the large luggage.

    Luggage in the form of bags, suitcases, souvenirs or luggage of any shape can easily fit into the spacious trunk and this certainly makes the MPV a multi-purpose vehicle.

    When driving, let alone a long enough distance, carrying a lot of luggage is certainly annoying when we have to force ourselves into the car.

    Instead of enjoying a comfortable trip, we are bothered with large luggage. Therefore, an MPV car with large luggage is the right solution to make the journey more comfortable.

    5. Comfortable when driven on various terrains

    Despite going through rough roads, MPV passengers still feel comfortable while driving. Because this type of car usually has a spacious cabin. Passengers can sit comfortably and stretch their legs. No wonder, MPV can be relied upon to travel long distances.

    In addition, MPV now also has several features that increase the comfort of the driver and passengers in various road conditions. For example, it has a plateau feature. This feature can help vehicles move more smoothly on different terrains, such as uneven roads, potholes and puddles or floods.

    Thus, passengers can feel more comfortable during the trip. In fact, some brands of MPV cars also have advanced features that allow them to drive on uphill, narrow, and winding roads.

    6. Complete Security Features

    In addition to comfort, driving safety is an important factor in choosing a vehicle. The latest MPV is equipped with various safety features, including Electronic Stability Program (ECS), Tire Pressure Monitoring System and Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) and dual SRS airbags. These features can minimize the risk of accidents and ensure the safety of the driver and passengers during the journey.

    Lack of MPV cars

    It can also be said that MPV type cars have some shortcomings, or rather the other side, which is less suitable for certain needs or users. The following are some of the disadvantages of MPV type cars:

    1. The capacity of the machine is relatively small

    The first disadvantage is that most of the machines use standard equipment and are relatively small. In the Indonesian low-end MPV category, the average only carries a 1.5-1.8L engine.

    But on the other hand, it cannot be called a deficit. Considering this type of car is designed for everyday use in the city where the contour of the road is smooth. Unlike SUVs that are functionally used on extreme roads.

    2. Not suitable for young people

    You can’t even call it a deficiency. Because the target market is family cars, MPV cars are not intended for young people. This type of car does not have a flashy grill, a stylish body, or other “young” elements.

    Well, that’s the comment about MPV type cars not being suitable for young people to use. Basically, this very popular vehicle is designed as a multipurpose minibus, suitable for transportation and family use.

    3. All features remain standard

    Another highlight of the MPV is its features. Potential consumers pay attention to this area.

    In terms of features, most MPVs only have standard features that are limited to ensure driving comfort and safety.

    However, many premium MPVs have advanced features but the price tag is much higher.

    4. Designed only to be driven on smooth roads

    Not as powerful as a jeep, the first MPV’s shortcoming was that it couldn’t drive on bad roads.

    Basically, most MPVs are designed to be driven only on flat roads such as toll roads, toll roads, or paved roads.

    So if you drive an MPV down a hill, on a rocky road, on a muddy road, in water, this car is not suitable.

    5. Less strong uphill

    Another weakness of MPV is that it is not strong going uphill. The reason is that, in addition to only being able to drive on flat roads, this car is also less reliable when going uphill.

    Different from SUV type cars which are very reliable to explore various types of roads such as ramps, rocky roads and worse road conditions.

    6. Low car height

    For a family car with seven seats, the range of MPV cars is relatively low. It’s different with an SUV type car that can only accommodate four people, this is quite high.

    This happens because MPVs use less than 16 inch wheels. If you want to make it higher, the wheel can only be raised 2 inches from the factory default. Therefore, it is not recommended to change 17-19 inch tires to the MPV.

    Tips before buying an MPV car

    Variations in the MPV car segment are of course very many and it is not uncommon for us to be a little confused with what suits the needs of the family, including the availability of pockets.

    Here are some considerations that can be your reference before you decide to buy for family needs and of course your supplies:

    1. Security Features

    Of course, safety is the most important thing you can offer your family, right? Especially when it comes to choosing a vehicle for your beloved family.

    Security is one of the most important factors and should be a priority for families.

    Because the MPV can accommodate a minimum of 5 passengers, the safety requirements must of course be optimal.

    One of the safety systems that you should pay attention to is the ABS EBD BA braking system which is touted as the best braking system. .

    In addition, the ABS braking function is also very useful when drivers use it on winding and slippery roads after rain.

    Another safety feature that your MPV of choice should have is a seat belt and make sure you have a three-point seat belt. In general, this seat belt was developed by Volvo car designer, Nils Bohlin.

    Because of the level of safety and comfort that is the main focus of this seat belt, it is not uncommon for European and Asian car manufacturers to use this type of seat belt.

    These seat belts are designed to prevent the driver and passengers from being thrown and reduce the risk of personal injury.

    Don’t forget the airbag function or what is commonly called airbag, is one of the safety components of your MPV vehicle of choice.

    This airbag is very helpful to you and often saves the life of the driver and passenger in the event of a collision or traffic accident.

    2. Engine and Fuel Performance

    Machine performance is one of the main considerations in choosing an MPV for your beloved family.

    Choose an MPV that has good engine performance and good gear shifting acceleration and of course is fuel efficient so it remains economical in the pocket.

    In general, the average new car has good fuel efficiency because the various supporting features are still good and make the car fuel efficient.

    Of course, Reader friends, you don’t want your pockets to be flat because the car wastes fuel due to poor engine performance, right?

    3. Seat comfort

    The seat is an important part of driving, especially when traveling long distances with the family or in traffic jams.

    When choosing an MPV for a family, the comfort of the seats should be considered.

    Choose a seat that provides comfort for you and other passengers. Make sure each seat is also equipped with a seat belt or safety belt to ensure the safety of both the driver and the passenger.

    Conclusion

    So much for a brief discussion about what an MPV car is: Features, Types, as well as its advantages and disadvantages. Not only knowing what an MPV car is, but also discussing the advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying it and knowing the types of cars on the market.

    Knowing what an MPV car is for automotive lovers is very beneficial to know the right type of four-wheeled vehicle to be a family car with a cheap and environmentally friendly price that is suitable to own as a family vehicle.

  • The Understanding of LCGC Cars and Any Advantages and Disadvantages

    Understanding of LCGC Cars – Currently there are more and more modes of transportation in the market and of course the automotive industry is competing to create good quality and certainly cheap cars in order to enter the middle class market. One type of car that is cheap but has good enough quality is the LCGC (Low Cost Green Car).

    LCGC cars are present as a solution from the government for people who want to have a car but at a cheap price to switch from motorcycles. In addition to its cheap price, the LCGC car, as its name suggests, is also an environmentally friendly car.

    However, for all you Reader friends who want to know more about LCGC cars and may be interested in owning one, you can listen to the information we will provide in this article to find out what advantages this LCGC car presents.

    Further information related to LCGC cars and any advantages we have presented and can be read below!

    What Is LCGC Car?

    LCGC cars or the abbreviation of Low Cost Green Car (Indonesian Environmental Friendly Cars, official name: Energy-Efficient and Affordable Four-Wheel Motorized Vehicle (KBH2) is a car variant that appeared after Indonesia issued a new car law that eliminated cheap cars to set aside cheap and fuel-efficient cars from PPnBM, so the selling price can be sold as low as possible, so basically this car is made domestically to reach the middle class market that considers some specific components in its assembly.

    The launch of this car version is expected to encourage more people to own cars, reduce fuel subsidies and compete with imported cars from Thailand, as well as increase employment in the country. This version is similar to the kei car category in Japan and the Eco Car program in Thailand which also promises tax relief for small and economical cars. Car

    LCGC is a car produced specifically by the government to reduce exhaust gas emissions. That is why this car is the choice of the community because it is said to be environmentally friendly and does not pollute the rural air too much.

    With low gas emissions, it is hoped that the environment can be spared from air pollution due to pollution and the community can live a healthy life. In addition to low gas emissions, this car is also produced with a very small cc, namely 1000cc and 1200cc.

    A car with a small or low cc can minimize fuel consumption, making it much more durable and cost-effective. Because the bigger the cc of the car, the more fuel is consumed.

    It should be known that the LCGC car is intended for the middle class because of its relatively small cc. For that, don’t expect to be able to drive this type of car at high speed.

    In addition, if Reader friends are interested in buying this LCGC car, there are several advantages that can be obtained in addition to the cheap price, this car also has a cheap annual tax so that it can save purchase costs, tax costs, and fuel costs because this LCGC car is also fuel efficient.

    Advantages of LCGC Cars

    LCGC cars are designed to reduce emissions. This type of car is the choice of the community because it is said to be environmentally friendly and does not pollute the air too much. In addition, this type of car has several advantages for the driver. Starting from durability, dimensions, and fuel efficiency.

    This car is really designed to be a real vehicle for gramed friends who want to own a car, especially for those who are just learning to drive. LCGC cars are indeed intended for the middle segment because the cc is quite small. For that, don’t expect to be able to drive this type of car at high speed.

    Some of the advantages that can be obtained by buying this car, among others:

    1. Suitable for those who are just learning to drive

    The advantage of this LCGC car is that it is friendly for beginner drivers. This car is very suitable to be chosen for beginners, both in terms of price because it is quite cheap and has no less diverse variations. In terms of the variation of this car, it is also no less diverse, it just needs to be adapted to the needs of friends of Reader.

    2. The size of the vehicle is more space-saving

    Another advantage of LCGC cars is the smaller vehicle dimensions. With the given dimensions, this type of car is nimble enough to be used on a daily basis, especially on city streets that are usually dense and congested.

    3. Save Fuel

    Low Cost Green Car or LCGC is an environmentally friendly car in accordance with the main purpose of creating this car. Therefore, LCGC cars are designed to consume only one liter of fuel for a minimum distance of 20 kilometers. Fulfilling one of the most important conditions for a vehicle product to enter the environmentally friendly segment (green car). Therefore, the use of fuel components should be as efficient as possible so as not to cause excessive pollution.

    4. Endurance

    LCGC cars are designed to be durable and tested for quality. As a result, LCGC vehicles have a longer service life, supported by easy maintenance and the availability of spare parts. If you want a cheap and environmentally friendly vehicle, this type of car can be the right choice. LCGC is usually not only sold at an affordable price but also comes with reliable features so that users can feel other benefits.

    5. Cheaper vehicle lease prices

    It should be known that friends pay car tax which is much cheaper than other types of cars. The reason is that LCGC cars have entered the PPnBM exemption list, effective from 2021 onwards.

    6. Affordable Maintenance

    In addition to being affordable, LCGC care is also cheap. The cost of processing LCGC itself is approximately Rp. 1.7 million. This fee applies if you service at an official workshop.

    7. Suitable for modification

    For those who like to modify cars, LCGC is very suitable. This car is relatively easy to modify. Both mild and extreme changes.

    This car has been successfully modified by many parties. For example Datsun Go Panca. There are also many workshops that offer specific modifications to the LCGC. So it is not difficult if you want to customize this car.

    8. The resale value is not too low

    The resale value of LCGC is not too low in the market. The average selling value of this car is between Rp 120 million to Rp 150 million. The price depends on the condition of the car and the type of LCGC car itself. The resale value is not too low, so you don’t have to worry if you want to sell this car.

    Lack of LCGC Cars

    All products must have disadvantages behind their advantages. This also applies to LCGC cars. Knowing the shortcomings of the LCGC is as important as knowing the advantages of the car.

    This is because it can be a separate consideration when buying this type of car.

    The disadvantages of the LCGC car itself are:

    1. Too light

    One of the characteristics of the LCGC is its small frame. This makes the weight of the car lighter. Its light weight makes this car a little wobbly, especially at high speeds.

    2. Baggage size is not too big

    Thanks to the small frame, the luggage compartment of the LCGC is also not too wide. Therefore, you can’t even load a lot of stuff into this type of car. In addition to the luggage that is not too wide, the interior of this car is also quite narrow.

    3. The speed is low

    As a car, LCGC is included in the low speed vehicle because it only has a capacity of around 1000-2000 cc. Therefore the energy produced by this car is quite low. So many comments on the advantages and disadvantages of LCGC cars

    So the first thing to know if you want to buy LCGC. Knowing these two facts will make it easier for you to decide whether to buy a car or not.

    Type and price list of LCGC cars

    Thanks to the economical use of fuel, LCGC cars are suitable for everyday use. In Indonesia itself, this type of car is quite a lot and the price is quite affordable.

    The average price of this type of car is less than 200 million rupiah. Some LCGC car registers and market prices that you need to know are:

    1. Honda Brio Satya

    One of the examples of LCGC cars that sell well in 2020 is the Honda Brio Satya. This car was released in 2018 with a more modern design and much wider dimensions. Honda Brio Satya is equipped with i-VTEC cylinder technology engine with a capacity of 1,200 cc. Brio Satya is the most fuel efficient car in its segment with a fuel consumption of 16.6 km/l in urban areas and 22.6 km/l on toll roads.

    For its own price, the Honda Brio Satya car varies according to the brand or model. Type Honda Brio SM/T priced at Rp 151,400,000, Honda Brio EM/T priced at Rp 160,400,000 and Honda Brio E CVT priced at Rp 175,400,000.

    2. Toyota Calya

    Another type of LCGC car is the Toyota Calya. Since this LCGC 7-seater was first released in 2016, it immediately entered the automotive world and sold well in the Indonesian market.

    New Toyota Calya car type 1.2 E STD M/T Price range Rp 146,190,000. While other types such as Toyota Calya 1.2 EM/T are priced at IDR 148,990,000, Toyota Calya 1.2 GM/T IDR 155,290,000, and Toyota Calya 1.2 GA/T IDR 167,490,000.

    3. Daihatsu Sigra

    If Toyota has the Calya, Daihatsu’s LCGC version is the Sigra. This car uses a design similar to Calya because it was built by the same company and platform.

    But Daihatsu Sigra has the advantage of many automatic options that make the price more flexible. Some types are also equipped with safety features such as dual SRS airbags, ABS, parking sensors and side beams. At the beginning of the price, Daihatsu Sigra is the highest at Rp 160 million and the lowest at Rp 140 million. If you want to buy a used car, Daihatsu Sigra is offered for 84-104 million rupiah.

    4. Toyota Agya

    Toyota Agya is the only 5-seater LCGC car that is relatively expensive compared to similar cars. The reason is that this LCGC car is decorated with a more sporty design with 998 and 1197 cc capacity engines.

    This car has different prices depending on the type. The cheapest Toyota Agya price is Rp. 144,900.00 and the most expensive is Rp. 170,390,000.

    5. Daihatsu Ayla

    In terms of price and comfort, Daihatsu Ayla is one of the most economical LCGCs in its class. On average, this type of car can drive 14-15 km/l on city streets and 18-20 km/l on toll roads. Daihatsu Ayla is available with manual and automatic transmission which also affects the price of this car. The price of a new Daihatsu Ayla car is Rp 100 million, used cars can be even cheaper up to half of the new price.

    The price difference for various types of cars depends on the design and features. However, environmentally friendly concept cars may be the best choice for fuel-efficient vehicles, but the quality is still prime.

    Tips for choosing a LCGC car

    There are several things to consider before buying an LCGC car. It is important to pay special attention to this so as not to regret it later. LCGC cars are affordable and relatively young. The average new model of this type of car has been covered since 2013. So, first pay attention to the car parts that suit your needs.

    Here are some tips that can be considered before buying an LCGC car:

    1. Optimal Body Construction

    The appearance of LCGC cars should be adapted to your taste. LCGC cars are intended for sports car lovers as well as city car lovers. There is also this type of car with a minimalist design. Everything you can adjust to your budget and daily needs.

    2. Cabin area

    From the outside, also pay attention to the cabin space. Make sure the size of the LCGC car you choose suits your needs. Starting from passenger capacity to luggage, enough to support your daily operations.

    3. Machine performance

    Also, make sure you choose an LCGC car with the right engine specifications. Observe and compare the information first about the displacement and engine cylinder energy of several types of cars. This is because some car brands may have a more or less similar appearance, but are clearly different in terms of the energy they produce. You can also choose the car that offers the most energy and the best handling for your daily activities.

    4. Features

    Some LCGC cars are now also equipped with various interesting features. These include automatic mirrors, four-way electric windows, a pair of airbags, ABS and EDB brakes, a touchscreen head unit with USB and iPhone connections. These interesting features are included in certain car brand units, which may not have other interesting features offered by other brands as well.

    5. Price

    Starting from the engine specifications to the advanced features offered, LCGC cars usually have quite affordable prices. Reader friends can directly bring home an LCGC car for only Rp 110-180 million.

    Conclusion

    This is a short discussion about what LCGC cars are and to find out what their advantages and disadvantages are.. Not only knowing what LCGC cars are but also discussing their advantages, disadvantages, tips for buying them and knowing the types of cars in the market.

    Knowing what an LCGC car is for automotive lovers is very beneficial to know the capacity of this cheap and environmentally friendly vehicle to be owned as a suitable personal vehicle to buy.

  • Meaning of Social Science: Types and Examples

    Understanding of Social Science – Learning is the right and duty of every human being, regardless of age, children, teenagers, and the elderly, all have the same opportunity. The state even guarantees every individual to be able to study or obtain an education as stated in the 1945 Constitution article 31 paragraph 1 where the state guarantees every citizen the right to education.

    With education, individuals can develop their country. There is a lot of knowledge that can be learned according to each individual’s interests. One of the sciences that can be learned is social science. The definition of social science is the science that studies the relationship between humans and their environment or the interaction of humans with other individuals, humans with their groups, or groups with other groups.

    Human interaction with others will be interwoven with communication so that people can get to know each other. In addition, humans can also help each other thanks to the interaction so that a harmonious relationship is formed.

    However, sometimes conflicts also arise due to the incompatibility of his relationship with others. If the conflict cannot be overcome, it will disrupt the harmony. Basically, humans are social creatures who cannot live individually, they need the presence of others.

    Meaning of Social Science

    Social science tries to understand the difference as a valuable lesson to be able to unite the inequality.

    In everyday life, many differences are sure to be found. But back to human nature, that they will need the presence of other people in their daily lives. Living alone is impossible. In social science, the differences between individuals have solutions that can overcome them.

    With a solution, then individuals can live side by side with others even though conflict is sometimes unavoidable. Social science, if understood more deeply, contains a study of social problems that often occur in everyday life. The purpose of social science is to help increase insight or broader knowledge about social life.

     

     

    Types of Social Sciences

    After we know the meaning of social science, then what are the types of social science? Social science is actually the parent of several sciences that are taught both in schools and universities. Here are the types of social science.

    1. Anthropology

    One type of social science is anthropology. As for what is meant by anthropology is the science that studies humans and their culture.

    In general, anthropology studies humans in five subs, namely the biological evolution of humans, the diversity of human physical characteristics, the development and spread of human culture, the development and spread of language, and the fundamentals of humans and their cultures that exist throughout the world.

    Anthropology as a science tries to explain the cultural processes of existing societies and which develop from time to time. Without this knowledge, society will not know the various cultures that exist and are spread around the world.

    Studying anthropology includes the preservation of culture because we can know what culture exists and needs to be developed in human life today.

    2. Sociology

    The definition of sociology is a science that studies various phenomena of community life or population. In the beginning, sociology developed in Europe because scientists realized that there must be science that can explain and study the social changes that occur in society.

    The first scientist to create sociology was a French scientist named August Comte. By sociologists, August Comte is called the Father of Sociology. Sociology is a type of social science because it does not study certain (exact) knowledge because what is studied is the symptoms of society and the social changes that occur in its life.

    In looking at the symptoms of society, sociology does not stand as a speculative science, but is objective in looking at the symptoms. In addition, the symptoms of society are obtained from the results of observation, so sociology is a logical science. The knowledge learned in it is also extensive.

    Based on the changes in social life that have occurred since the first humans existed until modern humans (homo sapiens) as they are today. As a scientific discipline, sociology does not look at problems normatively but must be neutral in looking at the problems that exist in society.

    3. Communication Science

    The interaction of individuals with each other is inseparable from communication. Humans need communication so that the desired message and meaning can be delivered well. Scientists have long studied how good communication can be communicated between individuals.

    The research carried out by these scientists gave birth to the science of communication. The definition of communication science is the science that studies individual communication processes, be it between individuals with individuals, individuals with groups, and groups with groups.

    Communication in everyday life is a fundamental social process. Social interaction in communication plays an important role. With the knowledge of communication, people understand how to convey good information so that it can be understood by the recipient of the information.

    In the process, communication continues to evolve. In the past, people used letters as a means of communication, but it required a long process.

    Now the media is more advanced by using technological sophistication so that it is faster and more efficient compared to letters such as using mobile phones, email, and so on. Human behavior in communicating is the main object studied in communication science.

    4. Economy

    In social life, humans cannot escape from what is called economy. Why is economics grouped into the social sciences? This is because in the economic world, human behavior is the main subject of study.

    Economics explains how people behave in using available economic resources to fulfill their needs or desires in their lives. In the economic world, there are three economic actors, namely households, business actors, and the government. the three economic actors in carrying out their activities are not separated from their decisions and carrying out their respective roles.

    The decisions taken by all three affect how they behave. In the economic wheel, all three interact with each other. Households are consumers who try to fulfill their needs in consuming goods or services.

    Businesses run by individuals or groups will produce goods or services to earn a profit. While the government’s role in the economy is as a public policy maker. Decisions taken by the government should pay attention to the well-being of households and businesses.

    5. Knowledge of Education

    In the world of education, the interaction between educators and students is important and should be studied. For those who work in the world of education, social science is important to have.

    An educator must understand the characteristics and behavior of his students so that he is able to apply appropriate learning methods in order to channel the knowledge he possesses. Good communication skills are required as an educator.

    In addition, with education, people can change their lives both for themselves and for others. Therefore, education actually boils down to social life. For example, people who pursue education at a higher level such as a university will later have the opportunity to become an agent of change for the problems that occur in society.

    It is hoped that they will be able to solve existing problems so that people will have a more independent and prosperous life. That is the importance of education so that it is able to change the lives around it for the better.

    6. Geography

    Geography is the science that studies the earth and its contents. In it, geography also studies a variety of natural phenomena that occur around it. At first glance geography seems to have nothing to do with social science, but make no mistake.

    Geography is related to social science. In geography, humans and their environment are the center of study. This science also learns about humans which is called human geography. In its discussion, human geography studies how individuals adapt to their environment, with fellow humans, and how their role in the world is.

    In addition, in general, geography studies the wealth of nature available. So that by knowing the wealth of nature that is owned, later humans can manage and utilize it for the prosperity and benefit of other people. Certainly fairly and evenly.

    7. History

    The development of events that have happened to humans since they first existed until now continues to be studied. The science that studies these events is called the science of history. Chronologically, the science of history tries to string together various events that happened in the past so that they become what they are today.

    The science of history also studies the chronology of how the process of human behavior occurs sequentially based on existing facts so that history is not a superstitious science. The truth in history is an important thing, because people can learn it and anticipate bad history so that it does not happen again in their lives now.

    History as a science does not only study what, when, where, and how events happened. The science of history is more than that, in it learning the facts, the pattern of events, the elements of the formation of events, and so on that happen to humans historically. Therefore, history and social science cannot be separated because they are interlinked with each other.

    8. Political Science

    Politics is a science that cannot be separated from social science. The main focus in the study of political science is learning how power works in the life of the community in the state. The power exercised can be between citizens of one country and another, citizens with their country, and countries with other countries.

    The main study is how the country can obtain, defend, and use its power in accordance with the norms that apply in the country. Indirectly, social science also plays a role in it.

    The power exercised in politics must not conflict with the social life of the community so as not to disturb peace and order in the community. Without social science, political science is difficult to accommodate the interests of the general public.

    9. Law

    In the world of law, the social life of the community cannot be ignored. For those studying law, the social process is one of the topics studied. Humans are social creatures and every behavior and action must be regulated and directed.

    The existence of laws, regulations, and policies taken by competent institutions is one way to control human social behavior. There are clear laws that can regulate human life and provide clarity on what humans can and cannot do.

    Imagine if there is no law in life, people can act as they please without thinking about the consequences of what they do. The absence of punishment makes bad behavior that humans may do uncontrollable.

    In addition, in the world of law policy making and rules should use a social approach to society. There needs to be a fair and equal application of rules for each individual to behave in accordance with existing norms and culture. In fact, law is actually born from various existing social conditions.

    10. Social Psychology

    Psychology and social are two close things that cannot be separated from each other. Psychology tries to explain the process of manifestation from the mental or human soul that gives birth to behavior. Humans are the main study material of psychology.

    As social creatures, humans have many behaviors and behaviors that differ from one to another. On this side, psychology examines the mental, mind, and behavior. How individuals relate to others is explained in psychology.

    In general, what is studied in psychology is very broad. Therefore, it is necessary to deepen one field that is studied comprehensively. One of them is social psychology. As a field, social psychology explains various phenomena that occur in humans as social beings.

    In it, this field also highlights a variety of social events that are negative or referred to as social pathology. Examples of social pathology in everyday life are drug abuse, bullying, hoax news, prostitution, and so on.

    The benefits that can be obtained by studying social psychology is that people understand and anticipate social problems that may occur, are able to organize alternative solutions and turn them into a situation that is beneficial for everyone.

    Examples of Social Science in Everyday Life

    After understanding the meaning of social science and its types, then what are the examples of social science that we can find in everyday life? First, in the basic law of 1945, article 33 explains about the economy. It is mentioned that the economic wheel in Indonesia is based on the principles of economic democracy.

    This means that the economy is structured with attention to the well-being of the people, not just to benefit a few parties. In addition, natural resources are only entitled to be managed by the government with the aim of no private exploitation that will later enrich only one group. The second example of social science is in the field of psychology.

    Social phenomena such as crime, prostitution, and bullying in society often appear because of the conditions that trigger them to do so. General problems that are commonly encountered are caused by economic factors. Poverty triggers society to commit social pathology.

    Demands to meet economic needs with a quick time and a large amount make some people unable to think long term. The shortcut taken for some cases is to commit crimes such as stealing, being thugs, and opening prostitution services. This phenomenon is actually still found in the field, but this problem seems to have no end and continues to grow day by day.

    Also read the related article “Understanding Social Science”  :

    • Understanding Social Change
    • Meaning of Social Integration
    • Examples of Social Problems in Indonesia
    • Understanding Social Interaction
    • Meaning of Social Board
    • Understanding Social Structure
    • List of Tribes in Indonesia
    • Understanding Social Differentiation

    Conclusion

    That is the meaning of social science, types, and examples in everyday life. Studying various social sciences is something of important value considering that we also need it to understand human behavior socially.

    Moreover, the development of life is more and more advanced. The rapid flow of information that continues to occur makes us have to understand various phenomena with a social science perspective. Knowing the meaning of social science alone is not enough, by understanding and deepening it will make us able to adapt to various kinds of social changes that occur in everyday life.

  • Definition of Mitosis, Stages of Mitotic Division, and Characteristics

    Definition of Mitosis, Stages of Mitotic Division, and Characteristics

    Definition of Mitosis – Does anyone feel that her face looks like her mother? Or look like your father? Or even not similar to both but more like grandfather or grandmother? How can there be similarities? Yes, there are still family blood ties. Yes, but what is the story of the similarity process?

    Every child or individual must have characteristics or traits that are similar, even the same as their parents. This is because of the inheritance of characteristics or traits from parents to their children.

    The inheritance of traits from parents to their descendants is called heredity.

    Have you ever imagined how many cells there are in our body? Millions? or even trillions? How is it possible that we have trillions of cells when we used to come from only two cells, namely the mother’s ovum cell and the father’s sperm cell?

    Turns out, cells have the ability to clone! Yes, the cells in our body are capable of doubling themselves so that we can develop, grow, even heal wounds on ourselves!

    So if you have a broken heart, just calm down, your body will heal the wound by itself

    It is DNA that is the gateway to heredity. The daughter cells resulting from mitosis and meiosis will have DNA in which there is genetic material from the parent cell, it may be exactly the same or a combination of both characteristics of the parent cell.

    If a dividing cell is stained and examined under a microscope, dark colored chromosomes will be seen in the nucleus. Each consists of a central thread, the chromonema, which contains small swelling chromomeres that are dark in color like beads.

    Some argue that the chromomeres contain genes, because early experiments clearly proved that the unit of heredity is located in the chromosomes in a linear arrangement. But the relationship between chromomeres and genes is irregular, some chromomeres have several genes and some genes are found between chromomeres.

    Each chromosome, at a certain place along its body, has a clear round circular zone called a kinetochore that regulates the movement of chromosomes during cell division. Because before cell division occurs, the chromosomes thicken and become shorter, so the kinetochores become clearer and look like constrictions.

    The process of inheritance of traits cannot be separated from the role of two types of cell division events, namely mitosis and meiosis.

    A. Definition of Mitosis

    Mitotic Division is a cell division event that produces two daughter cells with the same number of chromosomes as the parent cell. The term mitosis in a narrow sense concerns the division of the nucleus into 2 daughter nuclei and the term cytokinesis is used for the division of the cytoplasm that produces daughter cells that each contain a daughter nucleus.

    You know, all cell activity is organized from the nucleus, more specifically by DNA. Therefore, the event of cell division also occurs in the nucleus. The process of cell division does not mean that it duplicates all parts of itself. However, what actually happens is that only DNA is duplicated.

    Nuclear fission and cytoplasmic fission although almost always well integrated, are 2 separate and distinct processes. Mitotic division only occurs in eukaryotic cells, while prokaryotic cells cannot do it.

    Why? The reason is that prokaryotic cells do not have a nucleus (cell core), cell core membrane, and mitochondria. Whereas in mitosis the organelles are involved.
    In other words, the maker’s kitchen is not complete.

    Where does mitosis occur? In animals and humans, the process of mitosis occurs in all body cells (somatic), except for sex cells (gametes). In animals, an aster is formed and a groove is formed at the equator on the cell membrane at the time of telophase until the two daughter cells become separated.

    While in plants, mitosis occurs in the meristem network, such as the tip of the root and the tip of the stem bud. Mitotic division functions for the growth of body cells, replacing damaged body cells (regeneration), and maintaining the number of chromosomes. Mitotic division consists of nuclear division and cytoplasmic division.

    Mitotic division begins with the division of the nucleus. Therefore, when we see a group of cells that are dividing, we may find one or several cells that have two nuclei. This means that the cell has finished dividing the nucleus but not yet dividing the cytoplasm.

    In studying this cell division, we must know that each cell in the body has a different function. In the Cell Membrane Structure and Function Biochemistry Textbook by Andrew Johan you will better understand the function of each cell in the body.

     

    B. Mitotic process

    This process of mitosis produces two identical daughter cells, which have almost the same distribution of organelles and cell components. Mitosis and cytokinesis is the mitosis phase (M phase) in the cell cycle, where the initial cell is divided into two daughter cells that have the same genetics as the initial cell.

    The main result of mitosis is the division of the genome of the initial cell into two daughter cells. The genome is made up of a number of chromosomes, which are closely coiled DNA complexes that contain vital genetic information for the proper functioning of the cell.

    Because each daughter cell must be genetically identical to the original cell, the original cell must duplicate each chromosome before mitosis. So he formed himself into 2 first.

    The process of DNA duplication occurs in the middle of interphase, which is the phase before the mitosis phase of the cell cycle. After duplication, each chromosome has an identical copy called a sister chromatid, which is attached to a region of the chromosome called the centromere. Sister chromatids themselves are not considered chromosomes.

    C. The difference between Mitosis and Meiosis

    Basically, cell division that occurs in every living being has two types, namely mitosis and meiosis. If viewed in general, the difference between mitosis and meiosis can be seen in the daughter cells produced. Mitotic cell division will form daughter cells that can divide again. Meanwhile, meiosis will form daughter cells that cannot divide again, even until fertilization. Some of the differences between mitosis and meiosis are as follows:

    1. Mitotic offspring cells will be the same as the parent cells, while meiosis offspring cells will produce offspring that are different from the parent.

    2. Mitosis can occur in every existing organism, but it is different with meiosis which can only occur in animals, fungi, humans, and animals.

    3. The number of chromosomes of mitosis offspring is the same as its parent, while the number of chromosomes of meiosis offspring and its parent is half different.

    In order to better understand the process of DNA duplication, DNA cloning, and various basic analyzes of DNA technology in biotechnology that are currently popular, Reader can read the book Fundamentals of Genetic Science by Zairin Thomy.

     

    D. Examples of Mitosis

    A type of cell division capable of producing 2 genetically identical daughter cells. That is, the two offspring cells formed have the same genetic makeup as the parent.

    Almost all living things undergo the same process of mitosis, except for prokaryotes (living things that do not have a true nucleus) such as bacteria, viruses and blue algae.

    Mitotic division occurs during embryo development and growth, in the replacement of worn-out cells such as blood cells, skin, intestinal lining and so on, and in wound healing.

    E. Purpose of Mitotic Division

    Mitotic division has three purposes, namely growth, repair, and reproduction. Explanation of the purpose of mitosis as follows.

    1. Growth

    All living things will definitely experience growth caused by the large number of cells that come together. Therefore, when the cells continue to increase, it will affect the living being itself.

    2. Improvements

    Not only is it meant to grow, but mitosis is meant for repair. In this purpose, repair will occur when the network in the living being is experiencing damage to the network.

    3. Reproduction

    Every living thing will definitely multiply or it can be said that it will reproduce. The reproduction process that occurs in living things definitely requires sex cells that meet each other. From that cell meeting, cell division will occur.

    F. Characteristics of Mitotic Division

    2. The number of daughter cells produced from mitosis is two

    3. The number of chromosomes in a child is the same as the number of chromosomes in the parents, namely 2n (diploid)

    4. The properties of daughter cells are the same as parent cells

    5. Occurs in body cells (somatic cells), for example in embryonic tissue, including root tip, stem tip, cambium circle.

    6. The purpose of mitosis is to multiply cells such as growth or to repair damaged cells.

    7. Go through the stages of division, interphase, prophase, metaphase, anaphase, and telophase, but in general these stages will return to form the cell cycle.

    G. Phases/Stages of Mitotic Division

    At this stage of mitosis, it consists of four stages, namely prophase, metaphase, anaphase, and telophase. Before entering the 4 stages of mitosis, the cell will pass through the interphase stage first. The full explanation is below.

    Interphase

    However, every time the fourth phase of this phase begins, there is a preliminary term called the preliminary phase or interphase. This interphase is also often referred to as preparation for cleavage.

    In the interphase, there is a process of preparation and accumulation of energy by the cell to do division. Well, what you need to know is that this process takes a very long time compared to other phases, lol.

    At this stage, the cell core (nucleus) and the cell core child (nucleus) will be clearly visible. However, the chromosomes in the cell are not even visible, why is that? This is because the chromosomes are still in the form of chromatin. Chromatin is a fine thread composed of several molecules, such as RNA, DNA, and Protein.

    Meanwhile, on the outside of the cell nucleus there are centrosomes. Centrosomes are cell organelles that have the function of maintaining the number of chromosomes, the number of chromosomes between the parent cell and daughter cells so that the number remains the same when cell division occurs.

    So, if in animal cells, each centrosome will contain a pair of centrioles shaped like a small cylindrical body

    The interphase stage is grouped into three, namely G1 phase (first gap), S phase (synthesis), and G2 phase (second gap).

    a. G1 phase

    The G1 phase is also called the phase of cell development and growth. This phase is marked by the development of cytoplasm (cell fluid), cell organelles, as well as the synthesis of materials that will be used in the next interphase level, which is the S phase.

    At this stage, the cells grow larger. Some cell growth, including
    Ada

    1. enlargement of nucleus size;
    2. increased cytoplasmic volume;
    3. DNA formation;
    4. formation of enzymes for DNA replication;
    5. the formation of proteins through the process of protein synthesis (transcription and translation) to drive nuclear division;
    6. spindle thread formation.

    Subphase G-1 is the longest process in interphase, which is around 12 – 24 hours.

    b. Phase S

    In the S phase, there is duplication or replication of DNA as genetic material that will be passed down to daughter cells, so that two copies of DNA will be produced later. At the synthesis level, there is DNA replication along with histone proteins whose strands are called chromatin threads.

    The replication process of this chromatin thread forms twins called chromatids. These two twin chromatids are attached to one centromere. The synthesis process at this level takes about 6 to 8 hours

    c. G2 phase

    The third phase, namely the G2 phase, DNA replication is complete. There is an increase in protein synthesis as the final stage of cell preparation to divide.

    In the secondary growth stage, cell organelles and also RNA are formed. This stage takes about 3 to 4 hours and is the last process before the cells are really ready to divide.

    Chromatin in the phases of the cell cycle:

    1. double stranded DNA
    2. Chromatin (single-stranded DNA with histone proteins)
    3. Chromatin at interphase (blue) and centromere (red)
    4. Compact chromatin during prophase
    5. Chromosomes in metaphase

    At the end of interphase, a cell has a nucleus with two nucleoli (nuclei). As explained earlier, inside the nucleus there are chromatids, which are chromatin threads that have been duplicated.

    In the book Encyclopedia of Biology Volume 5: DNA, RNA & Chromoson Genetics by James Bodick Dkk, Reader will learn and deepen everything about the DNA that exists and organizes the human body.

    Meanwhile, outside the nucleus, centrosomes are also duplicated and will later help the process of cell division in the mitosis phase. Further, after all preparations are completed, the cell will enter the mitosis phase which consists of four stages.

    1. Prophase Stage

    Come on, let’s go into the initial stage of cell division, which is the prophase stage. At the beginning of prophase, the centrosomes undergo replication, resulting in two centrosomes. Then, each centrosome will move towards the opposite poles of the cell nucleus.

    At almost the same time, microtubules begin to appear between the two centrosomes. These microtubules are long protein fibers that extend from the centriole in all directions.

    Over time, the microtubules will form similar coils of thread that we can call spindle threads. At this stage as well, the chromatin threads begin to thicken and form chromosomes. Well, this chromosome has two identical chromatids attached to the centromere (head of the chromosome).

    Well, each centromere has two kinetochores which are protein formations and eventually become the attachment point for the spindle threads. At the end of the prophase stage, the nucleus and nuclear membrane of the cell begin to disappear. In addition, the centrosomes have arrived at their respective poles.

    The spindle threads will stretch from one pole to the other. This spindle thread has the role of pulling chromosomes to the middle of the cell nucleus at the next stage.

    The conclusion in this phase is what happened

    1. Chromosomes have doubled alias become 2, then compact
    2. The nuclear membrane begins to break down into small parts (fragments)

    2. Metaphase stage

    At this stage, the nucleus and nuclear membrane of the cell become invisible. Each kinetochore at the centromere is connected to a centrosome by spindle threads. Well, later the chromatid pair moves to the center of the cell nucleus (equatorial plane) and the metaphase plate is formed.

    The position of chromosomes located in the middle of the cell nucleus means that the number of chromosomes can be counted accurately and the shape of chromosomes can also be clearly observed. In this phase, Chromosomes have doubled, then compacted. The nuclear membrane begins to break down into small parts (fragments)

    3. Anaphase stage

    At anaphase, chromatid separation marks this phase. Starting from the centromere which then forms a new chromosome. Each chromosome is pulled by spindle threads moving towards poles in different directions. The number of chromosomes that go to one pole will be exactly the same as the number of chromosomes that go to the other pole.

    So, at the end of anaphase, the chromosomes have almost reached their respective poles. In addition, cytokinesis also begins to occur. What is cytokinesis? Cytokinesis is the phase of division or separation of cytoplasm, organelles, and cellular membranes. This division starts from the edge of the cell (cell membrane) moving towards the center of the cell, so that it will produce two cells called daughter cells.

    So in this phase it is concluded that:

    1. Chromosomes move towards opposite poles.
    2. At the end of anaphase both poles of the cell have the same number of chromosomes

    4. Telophase stage

    Well, the next stage is telophase. At this stage we have entered the final stage of mitosis. At this stage, the chromosomes have arrived at their respective poles.

    The spindle threads begin to disappear and the cell’s nuclear membrane also begins to exist between the two separate sets of chromosomes.

    In this phase:
    Chromosomes gradually thin and change shape into chromatin threads again.

    1. The nuclear membrane begins to rejoin
    2. Two daughter cells are formed which are diploid

    The process of mitosis produces 2 daughter cells from 1 original cell. Because all cells in the body originate from the mitosis of a fertilized egg cell, each cell has the same type and number of chromosomes, and the same number and type of genes.

    The speed and frequency of cell division varies greatly in different tissues and in different animal species.

    At the stage of embryonic development the interval between cell divisions may only be around 30 minutes. In certain adult tissues, especially nerve cells, cell division is very rare.

    In other adult tissues such as the spinal cord which is where red blood cells are produced, cell division must occur frequently to provide the 10,000,000 red blood cells produced every second of the day and night by humans.

     

  • Understanding Mythology: Origins, Types and Benefits of Studying It

    Understanding Mythology: Origins, Types and Benefits of Studying It

    Meaning of Mythology – Reader may have read books or watched movies or series themed on the stories of gods from abroad. Films such as Thor, Percy Jackson and The Olympians, to God of Egypt , are a number of fictional films themed on Gods from various countries

    In these stories, the gods are described as strong figures with super powers. The power they have can be used for good, such as saving the world and helping others, or for evil things such as killing other gods and dominating the world.

    Meaning of Mythology

    The stories about the gods are indeed fictitious, made for the benefit of the entertainment industry. Even so, many of these stories take the background, starting from the names of the characters, their nature, and their strength, from various mythologies.

    The meaning of mythology, if referring to the Indonesian Language Dictionary (KBBI), can be interpreted as ” the science of literary forms that contain conceptions and sacred fables about the lives of gods and ethereal beings in a culture. 

    In addition, another definition that is similar to the previous definition, and can be found in KBBI regarding the meaning of mythology is ” science about the existence of gods and heroes in the past that has an interpretation and meaning about the events of human origin. 

    So, Reader can conclude, that the understanding of mythology is not far from the science that studies stories about figures in the past, be it gods, spirits, or heroes, along with the history they have.

    The Origin of the Word Mythology

    If we have already discussed the meaning of mythology based on terminology or the definition of terms, it feels incomplete if we do not look for the meaning of mythology based on etymology or based on the origin of the word.

    Like a number of other absorption words, the term mythology comes from the Latin language, namely ” mythologia “. The word mythologia itself is a combination of 2 words, namely ” mythos ” and ” logia “.

    The word ” mythos ” or ” myth ” has the meaning of “a story spread from mouth to mouth, from an unknown source”. While the word ” logia ” or ” logy ” can be translated into a number of words such as “theory”, “science”, “understanding”, to “doctrine”.

    Based on a number of historical records, the word mythology was first used by France in the early 15th century, namely ” mythologie “. It was only then that the word was replaced using the commonly used suffix in the English language, namely ” logy “, so that it became the word mythology that we know now, namely ” mythology “.

    The difference between Mythology and Myth

    The word mythology is often equated with the word myth. This is due to the similarity between the two words. In the previous explanation, Reader has also seen that the word mythology actually comes from the word myth.

    If you open the KBBI, the explanation of the meaning of the word myth also has the same definition as the word mythology, namely ” stories about gods and heroes in the past that have interpretations and meanings about the events of human origin. 

    The word myth also has another definition in KBBI that is again similar to the word mythology, namely “the story of a nation about the gods and heroes of the past, containing an interpretation of the origins of the universe, humans, and the nation, containing a deep meaning expressed in a magical way. 

    Although it has a number of similarities in its definition, the word myth is different from the word mythology. The word myth generally refers to a group of stories or fables in the past. While mythology is the science that studies the stories.

    Myths are usually fiction that cannot be proven true, so they tend to be considered a form of entertainment. Mythology as a science, learns the history of the stories, and is generally asked to provide valid evidence related to the truth of these stories.

    So, it can be said that a number of written works and films that have been mentioned in the beginning of the article, are part of the myths whose existence is also studied and researched by mythology.

    Types of Mythology

    There are various mythologies spread in various parts of the world. As already discussed, not all mythology is real, and is only considered a fictional story. However, there are also a number of myths whose truth can be proven by researchers.

    Broadly speaking, researchers divide the types of mythology into 3. These three types of mythology are pure myth , heroic saga , and folk tale . The following is a brief explanation of the 3 types of mythology.

    • Pure myth : Pure myth is science and religion in the primitive era, which tells about the understanding and understanding of society in ancient civilizations in a number of regions, about the universe, natural disasters, and even God.
    • Heroic saga : True to its name, heroic saga tells the story of the life of a person who does heroic deeds. These figures are known to the local community as heroes and saviors from the misfortunes they had experienced in the past.
    • Folk tale : Folk tale has a similar definition to myth, which is a local folk or ethnic story that is passed on from mouth to mouth. The story generally does not come from a clear source, so its truth cannot be proven.

    Mythology in Various Parts of the World

    Every country in different parts of the world has its own mythology. If we discuss all these mythologies in one article, it will take a lot of time. This is because mythology has a deep history behind its existence.

    Even so, there are some mythologies that have made their name known. Reader may often find a number of names or backgrounds from a story that takes inspiration from a mythology. Here are some mythologies that are widely known by people in various countries.

    1. Greek mythology

    Greek mythology is part of a religion in Greece in the past. This mythology contains stories of gods, monsters, mysterious creatures and animals, heroes, as well as a number of rituals that happened in ancient Greece.

    In his story, there are many figures involved in Greek mythology. Each character has their own background, character, and motive. The many figures in Greek mythology make the stories have branches, each with a different premise and end result.

    However, there are a number of figures who have a significant influence from stories in Greek mythology. Here are some of the characters, along with a little explanation about their characters.

    • Zeus : Zeus is the god of thunder and the sky, who is the strongest god figure and the leader of the Gods in Greek mythology. Zeus is known for his wisdom and power in leadership. However, Zeus also had an affair even though he was married.
    • Hera : Hera is the wife of the god Zeus, as well as the queen and leader of all the goddesses. Hera is known as a beautiful and gentle figure. However, Hera is known to be jealous of Zeus because the god has many mistresses.
    • Prometheus : Prometheus is one of the strongest monsters in Greek mythology, and is Zeus’s most trusted aide. Once upon a time Prometheus had a conflict with Zeus due to his behavior in dealing with ordinary humans, so Prometheus stole fire from Mount Olympus, and gave it to mankind to heal them.
    • Achilles : Achilles is the most prominent warrior figure in Greek mythology. Achilles gained the power of immortality after bathing in the River Styx. Even so, Achilles has a weakness in the heel, which is precisely the reason the immortal warrior died.
    • Medusa : Medusa is a creature in Greek mythology who is depicted as a beautiful woman with snake hair. But, Medusa is a figure that can turn men into stone if they are fascinated by her beauty.

    2. Nordic Mythology

    Originating from the Scandinavian region, Nordic mythology is also religious stories like Greek mythology. The stories found in Nordic mythology come from the Nordic people, or commonly referred to as “Vikings”.

    Nordic mythology also tells stories about gods, goddesses, and other creatures that inhabit 9 different worlds. At the end of the story of Nordic mythology, the world they live in is destroyed due to an event called “Ragnarok”.

    The figures found in Nordic mythology are also not inferior to Greek mythology. Almost all of them also have a role in their own destiny. Here are a number of figures who hold importance in Nordic mythology.

    • Odin : Odin in Nordic mythology is the most respected god figure, and serves as the leader of the gods. Odin is a strong character who likes to go on adventures and find interesting things. Odin is also known for his wisdom, but is also known to be a cunning figure and often belittles other figures.
    • Thor : Thor is the god of thunder, who is also the son of Odin. As his name suggests, Thor has the ability to control lightning, accompanied by his flagship hammer, Mjöllnir. Thor is known as a brave and fearless figure in any situation.
    • Loki : Loki is also the son of Odin, but comes from a different mother than Thor. This makes his status as the half-sister of the thunder god. Loki is a cunning god and often uses various means to get what he wants, just like his father.
    • Fenrir : Fenrir is a creature that has the form of a giant wolf. Fenrir is also known to be the son of Loki who was chained underground.
    • Jormungand : Jormungand is the brother of Fenrir, in the form of a giant snake. Jormungand himself according to the story of Nordic mythology, is the main enemy of Thor. The two have a number of battles, and end with Thor and Jormungand finishing each other off at Ragnarok.

    3. Roman mythology

    According to a number of experts, Roman mythology is taken from stories in Greek mythology. There are quite a lot of similarities that can be found by researchers, between Roman mythology and Greek mythology, especially in the background of the story, as well as characterization.

    Even so, there is a reason why Roman mythology seems to “import” from Greek mythology. One of them is the orientation of the Romans towards the family, so the majority of them think that the gods exist only to help the daily life of the Romans.

    Despite that, there are a number of gods in Roman mythology who also have a big role in the lives of the Romans. Here is a little explanation from the gods.

    • Jupiter : Jupiter is the strongest figure in Roman mythology. Jupiter has the ability to control lightning and the sky. Reader can see that the figure of Jupiter is a copy of the god Zeus in Greek mythology
    • Juno : Like Hera, the goddess in Greek mythology, Juno is the leader of the goddesses in Greek mythology. She has the title as the goddess of marriage and childbirth for the Romans at that time.
    • Mars : Mars is the god of war in Roman mythology, who is also a copy of Ares, the god of war in Greek mythology. It is said that the god Mars was more worshiped than Jupiter, because of the nature of the Romans who loved war at the time.
    • Saturn : Saturn is the deity that represents agriculture, freedom, and prosperity. Saturn is also the father of Jupiter. Saturn is a copy of the monster in Greek mythology, Cronus.
    • Janus : In Roman mythology, Janus is described as a figure that represents the beginning and end of everything. Janus is one of the few gods of Roman mythology that does not have a copy from Greek mythology.

    Benefits of Studying Mythology

    Every branch of knowledge exists for a reason. Each branch of science has a number of benefits that can be obtained by researchers if they study the field seriously. And of course there is also something that can be obtained in the field of mythology.

    Reader should have realized that there are many subjects in mythology whose truth is quite doubtful. However, that doesn’t mean Reader can’t get something from there. On the contrary, there are actually many things that can be found from the untruth.

    In western countries, many have applied curricula to study mythology, such as Nordic mythology, Roman mythology, and the most common, Greek mythology. There are several reasons why they teach their students about mythology. Here is the explanation.

    • Mythology as a historical source of the world’s oldest civilization . Long before the existence of writing or language, mythology was a source that could be used to find out about the life of past civilizations. Things like artifacts and paintings in caves, are some of the findings that can explain a little of the civilization of the past.
    • Mythology as the origin of religious beliefs . Some religions depict history from life in this world. Some evidence of related topics can be found in a number of mythologies in a number of locations and become a reference for learning the history of the existence of a religion.
    • Mythology as a source and reference of literature. As already shown, many sources of literature or other types of writing come from ancient mythology. The existence of mythology enriches the writer’s imagination and inspires them when writing.
    • Mythology as the origin of science and philosophy . Questions such as “how can fire be formed”, or “why is there day and night”, arise from human curiosity, and are further strengthened by the existence of myths of the past.

    In Indonesia itself, we have directly learned folk tales when we were still sitting at school. Reader must have had Indonesian lessons about folklore in various regions. This is indirectly our way of getting the benefits that have been mentioned.

    That is the explanation of the meaning of mythology, from us,

  • Definition of Observation Method and Examples

    Definition of Observation Method and Examples

    Definition of Observation Method and Examples – Every researcher certainly devotes his attention to something and observes the facts found in it. This is of course driven by a high sense of curiosity regarding the understanding of observed facts in more depth. In reality, a researcher must raise various questions. Observation of the facts, identification of the problem, and efforts to answer the formulation of the problem are based on theory. This is the essence of a research.

    Research can be referred to as a systematic effort to organize and investigate problems and answer questions that appear and are related to facts and phenomena. Therefore, research is very important because it is in the form of systematic, controlled, empirical and critical research about natural phenomena guided by theories and hypotheses about the relationship that is considered to exist between the phenomena.

    Based on the technique, data processing in a research is divided into two, namely quantitative research and qualitative research. One of the data processing techniques that is often used in research is the observation technique. This observation has an important role in the meaning of research as one of the scientific research methods that can be done in various ways. However, the need for reproducibility requires that observations by different observers can be compared.

    In a research, the observation method will be described as a method used in observing and describing the subject’s behavior. As the name suggests, this observation is a way of gathering relevant information and data by observing, so in this case observation is called a participatory study because the researcher must establish a relationship with the respondents and for this must immerse himself in the same arrangement with them.

    Only then can researchers use the observation method to record the required data. The observation method is used if the researcher wants to avoid mistakes that can be the result of bias during the evaluation and interpretation process. The use of this observation technique is usually used as a support in a research to observe the phenomenon that occurs in the research location.

    There are various techniques used in observation by a researcher according to the needs of the data they want to obtain. About what are the techniques that are often used for observation purposes in a research?

    In this article, we will discuss observation techniques as one example of data processing techniques. With the hope that it can be an additional insight and recommendation for you prospective data practitioners, researchers, and data enthusiasts . Don’t miss the following article, make sure to read carefully, stay tuned and keep scrolling on this article guys!

     

    Meaning of Observation

    Observational methods often complement data obtained from in-depth interviews and surveys. Observation is usually understood as an effort to obtain data in a “natural” way. The simplest definition of the observation method is to see and listen to events or actions performed by the people being observed, then record the results of their observations with notes or other aids.

    Observation also means observing, witnessing, paying attention as a method of collecting research data. This article will discuss the observation method in social research. We have defined simply what observation is in the first paragraph. Next, we will comment in more depth about how to conduct observations and the problems that researchers usually face.

    Not infrequently, the observation method is misunderstood. Observation is observing by looking and listening. However, observation as a research method has certain characteristics and techniques. Perhaps some readers have heard the term participant observation. We will comment on the meaning of observation according to experts and the types of observation before discussing problems in the observation method.

    Quoted from the book Evaluation of Learning: Basic Concepts, Principles, Techniques, and Procedures (2020) by Muhammad Ilyas Ismail, observation is one of the data collection techniques that is more specific than other techniques. Some of the meanings of observation according to experts are as follows:

    1. Gibson RL and Mitchell MH

    Observation is a technique used as a degree selection to determine a decision and conclusion about the person being observed.

    2. Larry Christensen

    Observation is a way to get important information about people, because what is said does not necessarily correspond to what is done.

    3. Creswell

    Observation is the process of obtaining data from the first hand, by observing people and the location of the research.

    4. Patton

    Observation is a method that is accurate and specific to collect data and find information about all activities that are the object of research.

    5. Sutrisno Hadi

    Observation is a very complex process, consisting of various processes, both biological and psychological, which prioritize memory and observation processes.

    6. Eko Putro Widyoko

    Observation is the systematic observation and recording of the elements that appear in a symptom on the object of research.

    7. Sugiyono

    Quoted from the book Quantitative Approach Educational Research Methods (2014), observation is a complex process, a process made up of various biological and psychological processes.

    8. Riyanto

    In his book Education Research Methodology (2010), it is explained that observation is a data collection method that uses direct or indirect observation.

     

    Techniques in Observation

    1. Controlled Observation

    Controlled observation is done in a closed room. Researchers who have the authority to determine the place and time where and when observations will be made. He also decides who his participants are and under what conditions he will use the standard process.

    Participants were randomly selected for the research variable group. The researcher observes and records detailed and descriptive behavioral data and divides it into different categories. Sometimes researchers code actions according to an agreed scale by using a behavior list.

    Coding can include letters or numbers or spans to measure the intensity of behavior and describe its characteristics. The collected data is often transformed into statistics. In the controlled observation method, participants are informed by the researcher about the purpose of the research. This makes them aware that they are being observed. The researcher avoids direct contact during the observation method and generally uses a two-way mirror to observe and record details.

    2. Participatory Observation

    The participatory observation method is often considered a variant of the naturalistic observation method because it has similarities. The difference is that the researcher is no longer a remote observer because he has joined the participants and become part of his group.

    A researcher does this to gain deeper and deeper insight into their lives. The researcher interacts with other members of the group freely, participates in their activities, learns their behavior and acquires a different way of life. Participant observation can be open or hidden.

    • Overt (open), when the researcher asks permission from a group to mingle. He does it by revealing his true purpose and original identity to the group he wants to associate with.
    • Covert , if the researcher does not show the true identity or meaning to the group he wants to follow. He kept the two a secret and assumed a false role and identity to enter and blend into the group. He usually acts as if he is a genuine member of the group

    3. Naturalistic Observation

    Social scientists and psychologists generally use naturalistic observation methods. The process involves observing and learning the spontaneous behavior of the participants in an open or natural environment. The researcher’s role is to find and record anything that can be seen and observed in its original habitat.

    This technique involves observing and learning the spontaneous behavior of participants in their natural environment. Researchers simply record what they see in whatever way they can. In unstructured observation, the researcher records all relevant behaviors without a system. There may be too much to record and the recorded behavior is not necessarily the most important, so this approach is usually used as a pilot study to see what type of behavior will be recorded. Compared to controlled observation, this is like the difference between studying wild animals in a zoo and studying them in their natural habitat.

    4. Structured Observation

    Structured observation consists of a careful definition of categories in which information will be recorded, standardization of observation conditions, and is mostly used in studies designed to provide systematic descriptions or to test causal hypotheses.

    The use of structured observation techniques assumes that the investigator knows what aspects of the situation under study are relevant to the purpose of his research and is therefore in a position to develop a specific plan for making and recording observations before he actually begins data collection.

    Structured observations can be used in natural field settings or laboratory settings. Structured observation, so far used mainly in research that begins with a relatively specific formulation, usually allows much less freedom of choice with regard to the content of the observation than is allowed in unstructured observation.

    Because the situation and the problem are already explicit, the observer is in a position to determine in advance the categories that will be analyzed in the situation. The categories are clearly defined to provide reliable data about the questions to be asked.

    Example of Observation Method

    Basically, there are two types of observation methods in research; participatory and non-participatory. The main motivation behind this distinction is the term called reactivity level. Reactivity greatly determines the quality of research data. We can understand reactivity as how reactive the behavior of the people being studied or being observed. The more reactive, the lower the quality of the data produced from observation. Reactivity can also be seen as a source of error.

    For example, we will observe the green community in Yogyakarta. In a natural context (without research), the facial expressions of some community members look gloomy when carrying out planting activities in the garden. On another day, when a researcher from abroad came to observe, the facial expressions of the members looked very enthusiastic. Facial expression that looks enthusiastic is a form of reactivity because it is done with full awareness that he is under observation. In other words, not “natural”.

    The quality of observation data that is not “natural” can be said to be weak or even an error. The degree to which the data obtained will be reactive should be thought about first by the researcher before going into the field. After assessing the potential for reactivity, the researcher decides whether to choose a participatory or non-participatory observation method.

    1. Participatory Observation Method

    Participatory observation method can be described as an observation method where the researcher positions himself as a participant like other people who are being observed. In positioning oneself as a participant, the researcher still has to keep a distance so that the element of objectivity remains awake.

    2. Non-Participatory Observation Method

    The non-participatory observation method is understood as an observation method where the researcher positions himself as an outsider from the group he is researching. This method often gives a considerable distance between the researcher and the object being studied because the observation is done from the outside. At an extreme level, the non-participatory method can be seen as a method often practiced by spies in observing a case.

    Continuing the issue of reactivity that was mentioned at the beginning, according to sociologist Martyn Hammersley in his writing in The Blackwell Encyclopedia of Sociology (2007) entitled “Observation”, the problem faced by the observation method is not only the issue of reactivity. Some other issues faced by researchers include; the problem of obtaining access, sampling, variation of the data produced, and ethical problems.

     

    How to Get Quality Observational Data

    Here are some other issues that must be considered so that the observational data obtained is of high quality, so that the research results are also high quality.

    • The problem of gaining access can consist of various forms, depending on the role the researcher will play and the results of the research object. When research is conducted openly, meaning the researcher introduces himself and his research, access to observe will depend on the negotiation process. In the negotiation process, an agreement related to the research must be reached in advance so that no party is harmed later. Consent to observe may also depend on the researcher’s personal and social characteristics and qualities.
    • Sampling can also involve observation. For example, researchers observe the situation of the village or community being studied, for example. Preliminary observations for this sampling can help determine who will be the informant, when they can be found or contacted, and so on. There are several strategies that can be applied here, for example, whether the researcher will focus his attention on the place under study or the behavior of the people. How long to observe should also be determined from the beginning.
    • The variation of the data produced depends on whether the observation is done in a structured or unstructured way. Structured observation follows the detailed planning design made before the observation is carried out. In other words, the researcher observes according to the observation guide. Unstructured observation means that observation is done flexibly. The data produced from unstructured observation is usually more diverse because it involves several research instruments that are used as needed, for example, diaries, field notes, voice recorders, photo recorders, video recorders, and so on.
    • Ethical problems should be explained first in the beginning so that the researcher does not stumble upon ethical problems that can lower his reputation as a researcher. Observation can be done in closed or open. Ethical procedures generally require open observation where the identity of the researcher and the research is known to the person being observed. On the other hand, closed observation is often rejected because it is usually shrouded in lies, for example hiding the original identity of the researcher and using a false identity. Research subjects also have the potential to have their privacy disturbed. However, the choice of whether to apply open or closed observation depends on the level. Observations that are too open are also prone to error.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of the Observation Method

    Here is an explanation of the advantages and disadvantages of the observation method:

    1. Gain Observation

    The advantages of direct observation or observation in the data collection process, namely:

    • Observation is very easy to implement.
    • The direct observation method is able to answer or satisfy a person’s curiosity, so that in the end the process that has gone through gives its own meaning or value. With the method of direct observation can be evidence and the absence of manipulation.
    • Observation can make a person more motivated and also have a great sense of curiosity. This method can be used as a research tool.

    2. Lack of Observation

    Some shortcomings of the observation method, namely:

    • Observers need time to wait for certain actions.
    • There are some data that cannot be done with observation, for example someone’s personal secret.
    • The tendency of a person being observed to behave or behave in accordance with what the observer expects.

     

  • Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Animal Examples

    Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Animal Examples

    The Meaning of Perfect Metamorphosis and Examples of Animals – The animals that exist on this planet are very numerous or even reach hundreds, ranging from small animals to large animals. The number of animals in the world is called biodiversity.

    Every animal in this world will surely breed, so the development of animals will continue to happen. Reproduction in each animal greatly affects the survival of the animal. The reproduction of each animal’s life, starting from the embryo, the process of birth, the process of becoming an adult, breeding, and experiencing death.

    Reproduction in animals occurs because of the sexual process between male and female animals. In this process, what is called the fertilization process will occur. Fertilization is the fusion of the nucleus of the sperm cell and the nucleus of the egg cell. Fertilization in animals can be done in two ways, namely internal and external fertilization.

    In addition, animals that undergo reproduction cannot be separated from what is called metamorphosis. Reader already know what metamorphosis is? This article will discuss what metamorphosis is, its types, and examples of metamorphosed animals. So happy reading this article, Reader.

    Meaning of Metamorphosis

    Before discussing further about metamorphosis, it would be good to first know what metamorphosis is. In the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI) metamorphosis is a change in shape or arrangement that undergoes a change in shape (for example from a caterpillar to a butterfly).

    Meanwhile, according to language, metamorphosis comes from the Greek language, namely Greek . While based on the word, metamorphosis is divided into three parts, namely the first, “meta” which means “between, after, and around”. Then secondly, “morphe” which means “form” and thirdly, the word “osis” which means “part of”. In short, metamorphosis is a change in shape that occurs in animals during postembryonic development.

    When animals are undergoing metamorphosis, some animals experience changes in body shape that are almost identical. However, there are some animals that experience very different body shape changes.

    Animals that undergo almost the same shape change, such as cockroaches, cats, goats, and the like. While animals that experience different body shape changes can be seen in butterflies, mosquitoes, frogs, and the like.

    Types of Metamorphosis

    After discussing the meaning of metamorphosis, it is now time to discuss the types of metamorphosis that occur in animals. Metamorphosis is divided into two types, firstly perfect metamorphosis and secondly, imperfect metamorphosis.

    1. Perfect Metamorphosis

    A perfect metamorphosis is a metamorphosis that in its development towards adulthood experiences a change in body shape, appearance and different behavior. This different shape change starts from the egg phase. After the egg phase has been passed, the next phase is the larval phase. After the larval phase will produce the pupa phase. The last phase of complete metamorphosis is the imago or adult phase.

    Below will be explained the stages that occur in perfect metamorphosis.

    a. Egg phase

    The egg phase is the first phase of reproduction in animals. In this phase, the eggs produced by the female come from the results of fertilization that occurs in male animals. Egg cells that meet sperm cells will result in cleavage. In this splitting process, the time required varies depending on the type of animal.

    From the results of this cleavage will produce quite a lot of eggs. The eggs are then laid by the female in her habitat. For example butterflies, these animals will lay their eggs on the surface of leaves. While mosquitoes will lay their eggs on the surface of calm water.

    Animal parents lay their eggs in accordance with their habitat because after experiencing a change in appearance, they can immediately find food. Young animals that easily find food experience very rapid growth.

    b. Larval phase

    After passing through the egg phase, the next stage that occurs in complete metamorphosis is the larval phase. This larval phase is the phase in which young animals have started to be active in search of food. The food that is obtained is very easy because the parent has already prepared if the child grows there is no need to bother to find food

    In other words, the mother of each animal is very kind because she does not want her child to have difficulty finding food. In this larval phase, some animals have an external skeleton (exoskeleton). An animal’s exoskeleton can be interpreted as an insect or other animal that undergoes skin changes or ecdysis.

    The skin changes that occur in the larvae will result in the larvae experiencing a change in size to become larger. This skin change can occur several times depending on the type of animal. In addition, this skin change will stop when the larvae have started to stop eating and prepare themselves to go to the next phase.

    c. Pupa phase

    The pupa phase can be said to be a transitional phase because of the change in form from a larva to a larger animal form. A bigger physical change makes the animal have an outer skeleton that can protect the body and the outer skeleton is called a cocoon. Even though it is protected by a cocoon, the pupa’s body will still carry out the formation of metabolism and carry out the formation of animals into adult animals.

    At the beginning of becoming a pupa, the animal already stores food reserves when it becomes a larva. Although in the larval phase food reserves are stored, but to survive the pupa needs food intake. Therefore, in the pupa phase, almost every animal that is perfectly metamorphosed will begin to be active again in search of food.

    In the pupa phase, the time required varies greatly depending on the type of animal and the length of time in this process. In the pupa process, the animal will prepare itself to go to the adult phase or the imago phase.

    d. Imago phase

    At the specified time, the pupa will come out of its shell. The pupa that comes out of its shell will have a new animal form and indicates that the animal that has undergone complete metamorphosis has grown into an adult. In this phase, the animal has to get used to facing other predators.

    In the imago phase, the animal already has a perfect shape, so that when looking for food and looking for habitat is no longer the same as in the larval phase. In addition, during this phase, animals will perform the reproduction phase or perform mating between male and female animals.

    Thus, the imago phase can be said to be the phase of an animal becoming an adult and needing to marry so that offspring will continue to exist or the perfect metamorphosis cycle will repeat itself.

    2. Imperfect Metamorphosis 

    Imperfect metamorphosis is a metamorphosis that in the development towards adulthood experiences changes in body shape, appearance and behavior that are almost the same or not very different.

    If in perfect metamorphosis there are different stages, it is different with imperfect metamorphosis which only passes through almost the same stages. The stages start from the animal laying eggs, then becoming a nymph, then this nymph will grow into an adult (imago). Incomplete metamorphosis is known as hemimetabola.

    Below will be explained the stages that occur in incomplete metamorphosis.

    a. Egg phase 

    This egg phase is the same phase as animals with perfect metamorphosis. Eggs produced from mating between male and female animals will be placed in their original habitat. Not only are they placed in their original habitat, but the parent will ensure whether the eggs are safe from predatory attacks or not. If it is not safe from predatory attacks, then the parent will look for a new place.

    This egg phase consists of embryos that are protected by the shelled egg structure. The time required for this egg phase is very diverse and depends on the type of animal and the time it takes to change into a nymph.

    b. Nymph phase

    The second phase of incomplete metamorphosis is the nymphal phase. This nymph phase is different from the larval phase which is in complete metamorphosis. The larval phase of a young animal will be different from that of an adult animal. Meanwhile, the nymph phase of the young animal will be the same as the adult animal, only the size is different.

    The size of young animals during incomplete metamorphosis is smaller, then when they reach adult size, the size of the animal will increase. Although the size is different, but its existence does not change. Things that change in incompletely metamorphosed animals are only parts of the body and reproductive organs.

    The change in body size in nymphs during adulthood goes through what is called skin change or ecdysis. Thus, the nymph phase is almost the same as the larval phase (perfect metamorphosis) except that it does not undergo a very different physical change.

    c. Imago phase

    The imago phase indicates that animals with incomplete metamorphosis have passed the nymph phase. If you look carefully, then the body or being (seen from the outside) from the nymph phase to the imago only undergoes a change in body size.

    The imago phase is the adult phase that occurs in animals with complete and incomplete metamorphosis. In the imago phase, all body organs and reproductive organs have matured. Reproductive organs that have matured, animals can reproduce and repeat the cycle of imperfect metamorphosis.

    So, it can be said that animals with perfect metamorphosis will experience a very different physical change (outer appearance) from young age to adulthood. While animals with incomplete metamorphosis, body changes (seen from the outside) from young age to adulthood, the difference is not so visible.

     

    Examples of Animals with Perfect Metamorphosis

    In order to make it easier to understand perfect metamorphosis, examples of animals that undergo perfect metamorphosis will be explained below.

    1. Butterflies

    Who is not familiar with butterflies. We often find these animals on flowers that have nectar. Butterflies often land on flowers because flower nectar is the main food of butterflies.

    Butterflies become animals that belong to perfect metamorphosis because the changes in existence from young animals to adults are very different. For more clarity, let’s look at the picture below.

    Based on the picture above, the metamorphosis of a butterfly starts from the egg that comes from the mating of a male butterfly with a female butterfly. Later, the eggs turn into caterpillars that we usually find on leaves. Then, the caterpillar turns into a cocoon or pupa with a shell to protect the body. After some time, the cocoon will turn into a young butterfly and a few days later will turn into an adult butterfly.

    2. Mosquitoes

    The next example of an animal that undergoes complete metamorphosis is a mosquito. We often find these animals at night and sometimes mosquitoes disturb someone’s sleep, either because of their sound or because of their bite.

    Although mosquitoes love to fly, the mother mosquito will lay her eggs on the surface of calm water. Therefore, we should diligently clean the bathtub so that there are no mosquito eggs.

    Based on the picture above, eggs become the initial phase of complete metamorphosis in mosquitoes. After the egg hatches it will turn into a larva. This larva will adapt to find food so that it can extend its life to the pupa phase. After the larval phase is over, the next is the pupa phase. The last phase of metamorphosis in mosquitoes is the mosquito becoming an adult.

    3. Frog

    The rainy season is a season that frogs like very much. This is because in this season a lot of water comes down to the surface, so the frogs will be free to jump around.

    Frogs belong to the category of animals that undergo complete metamorphosis. This can be seen in the shape of the tadpole which is very different from the shape of the frog when it is an adult. That difference is what causes the frog to become a perfectly metamorphosed animal.

    Based on the picture above, the egg becomes the initial phase of the complete metamorphosis of the frog. Then continue with the egg that turns into a legless tadpole. After developing, tadpoles have two legs. The tadpole’s legs, which are increasing in number, are accompanied by the tadpole’s body which also undergoes changes, until it becomes a young frog. Young frogs develop into adult frogs that then reproduce and produce frog eggs.

     

    Examples of Imperfect Metamorphosis Animals

    After discussing, examples of animals with perfect metamorphosis, then what will be discussed next are examples of animals with imperfect metamorphosis.

    1. Locust

    Grasshoppers become part of the animal that metamorphoses incompletely because the change from nymph to adult grasshopper does not undergo a significant physical change. The difference between young grasshoppers and adult grasshoppers is only limited to body size.

    From the picture above, grasshoppers are incompletely metamorphosed, grasshoppers start from eggs that come from the parent or female grasshopper. After the eggs hatch, they turn into nymphs or young grasshoppers. Each time a young grasshopper develops into an adult, there is no significant physical change except for the size of the grasshopper’s body.

    2. Cockroaches

    Cockroaches belong to the type of animals that like to live in humid places, such as bathrooms. Although this animal is small, it can fly. In fact, for some people, this animal is very scary especially when flying, are you one of them?

    Cockroaches become animals that metamorphose imperfectly because their body shape from youth to adulthood only changes in size. In other words, there is no change from a young cockroach to an adult.

    From the picture above, the cockroach’s incomplete metamorphosis starts from the egg. Then turn into a nymph or a young cockroach. After the young cockroach develops, it will become an adult cockroach that has the same body as the young cockroach.

    • Alternative Energy Sources
    • Glass House Effect
    • Source of Kinetic Energy
    • Heat Energy Source
    • Mineral Natural Resources
    • Acid rain
    • Rainfall Process
    • Mosquito Life Cycle
    • Frog Life Cycle
    • Tropical climate

    Conclusion

    Metamorphosis is part of the process of growth or development of animals. The difference between perfect metamorphosis and imperfect metamorphosis lies in the change in the animal’s appearance. If an animal undergoes a significant physical change, then the animal enters a complete metamorphosis. While animals that do not experience significant changes, then those animals are included in animals with incomplete metamorphosis.

  • Understanding Mercantilism, History, & Economic Theory

    Understanding Mercantilism, History, & Economic Theory

    Mercantilism is an economic theory that believes that the prosperity of a country is only determined by the amount of capital or assets stored in that country and the amount of international trade carried out by that country. Mercantilism also includes national economic policies that aim to accumulate foreign exchange reserves through a positive trade balance, especially in manufactured goods. For those of you who are one of the business people or move in the economic field, understanding the economics of mercantilism is important.

    Well, discussing mercantilism is closely related to the country’s capital or wealth, which is clearly explained by the amount of capital (precious metals, especially gold and other commodities) owned by the country. In addition, the wealth increases exports to obtain a balance of trade with other countries by reducing imports.

    It is always evaluated positively. Mercantilism teaches that in this case the government should achieve its national goals by protecting the economy, encouraging exports and reducing imports (generally by imposing high tariffs). Economic policy in this sense is called mercantilism economic system. Then what is the meaning, history, and impact of mercantilism theory in the economy of a country? Here is the full explanation:

    Meaning of Mercantilism

    The term Mercantilism comes from the English word Merchant which means merchant. This means that in the understanding of the theory of mercantilism, if every country wants to progress, it must trade with other countries. As a result, the source of national wealth can be obtained from foreign trade surplus in the form of gold or silver. With contact with other countries, there will also be a time policy that encourages export activities and also limits imports so that international trade runs healthy.

    Mercantilism is an economic theory that states that the prosperity of a country is determined by the amount of investment or assets it owns and the size of its foreign trade. The concept of mercantilism was explained by prominent thinkers such as the French philosopher Jean Bodin. Jean Bodin discusses the theory of money and prices increase due to import taxes from abroad and the taxes that need to be issued. As one of the big economic systems, many scientists and experts think about the practical theory of mercantilism.

    One of them is Thomas Mann who is a British merchant and discusses the theory of trade surplus that income from trade surplus or higher can make the country economically prosperous. Jean-Baptiste Colbert, a French civil servant and Minister of Economy and Finance, spoke about how important the position of a merchant is and how merchants and rulers or governments can work together to advance the country’s economy. Sir William Petty was an English economist, scientist and philosopher who discussed economic theory and political arithmetic, labor theory and currency theory.

    In addition, David Hume, who was born in Scotland, discusses the theory of prices, which states that prices are affected by the quantity and amount of goods. Mercantilism means that the state plays an active role in the economy and directly intervenes in the functioning of the economy. Before economic thinkers discuss mercantilism, we must first know what mercantilism is. As mentioned earlier, mercantilism is a theory that the well-being of a country is determined by the amount of assets owned by the country or the capital owned by the country, and the amount of foreign trade is also very important.

    According to this merchant’s understanding, all countries want to progress, one of which is doing foreign trade that can increase their income and the money produced will be a trade surplus. Save a lot of money and then keep the money that is used in the production of goods and then exported. In addition, some thinkers, such as the French scientist Jean Bodin (1530-1596), discuss mercantilism which systematically or in detail discusses the theory of money and price.

    Then Thomas Mun (1571-1641) considered that a prosperous merchant from England who discussed his foreign trade experience and the problems that often arise in foreign trade. Jean-Baptiste Colbert (1691-1683), a French civil servant who served as Minister of Economy and Finance, discussed his policy of national strength and success working with entrepreneurs to increase personal wealth.

    Sir William Petty (1623-1687), an English economist, scientist and philosopher also discussed the importance of labor, not land resources, to improve the domestic economy of a country in relation to the practice of mercantilism. Scottish born and Adam Smith’s friend, David Hume (1711-1776), in a book called Trade Balance, explains that prices are partly influenced by the amount of money and commodities in circulation.

    Theory of Mercantilism

    Today, all European economists from 1500 to 1750 are considered mercantilists, but the term mercantilism was not known at that time. The term was first introduced by Victor de Riqueti and Marquis de Mirabeau in 1763 and popularized by Adam Smith in 1776. The term mercantilism was first introduced in 1763 by Victor de Riqueti and in 1776 by Marquis Mirabeau Smith.

    According to history, Adam Smith first mentioned the contribution of mercantilism to the economy in his book The Wealth of Nations. The word mercantilism itself comes from the Latin word Mercari which means barter. This is rooted in the word brand, which means product. The term mercantilism was initially only used by critics such as Mirabeau and Smith, but was later used and adopted by historians.

    The background of the emergence of the theory of mercantilism is often seen in the politics that cause war and also in the background of the expansion of colonial territories. Mercantilist economic theory in its current application varies greatly from writer to writer and has evolved over time. The policies in the mercantilist economic system include:

    • Establishment of colonies abroad
    • High tariffs are imposed on finished products
    • Optimizing the use of domestic resources
    • Export of gold and silver, including payment methods, is prohibited
    • Colonies are prohibited from doing business with other countries
    • Dominating the market in the main ports
    • Limiting wages
    • Issuing export subsidies
    • Prohibition of foreign ship trade
    • Promotion of the manufacturing industry through research and direct subsidies
    • Limiting domestic consumption through non-tariff barriers to trade

    The main purpose of the concept or theory of mercantilism is to build a nation, especially in times of continuous war, where nations must find ways to strengthen their economy and weaken foreign enemies.

    History of Mercantilism

    The theoretical concept of mercantilism first appeared around the 18th century with an economic understanding that shows the well-being of a country. The teachings of mercantilism were dominantly taught in European schools from the early 16th century to the 18th century, the era of the rapid economic growth of mercantilism. At that time, national consciousness was quite high in the community. The emergence of mercantilism as an economic system has made the intervention of a country to organize its economy even bigger.

    The emergence of mercantilism is due to the high national consciousness of the people since the birth of the first independent modern countries in Europe, such as Germany, France, England, Italy, and the Netherlands. In order to be able to defend the sovereignty, independence and well-being of its people, the country must have a stable and strong economic condition in order to survive.

    The policy that emerged during mercantilism was to ignore the agricultural sector which resulted in various criticisms. The basis of the concept of mercantilism is the balance of trade, the flow mechanism of precious metals, the theory of the quantity of money and protection against it. From the three principles of economic thought, it became centered on the doctrine of mercantilism, which is the result of a trade balance that should be profitable.

    Based on the doctrine of mercantilism, the foreign exchange earnings of a country will be determined from the following points:

    • Export goods
    • export services
    • precious metal exports
    • Capital import which is not only in the form of investment from abroad, but also in the form of profit from investment abroad and other forms of loans

    Meanwhile, foreign exchange spending forms such as import of goods, import of services, import of precious metals, and export of capital.

    The beginning of this theoretical thinking concept is to consider that a country that wants to become a developed country needs to establish trade cooperation with other countries. With the concept of foreign trade in mind, create a merchant group that has an important position.

    As a result, the cooperation between merchants and power becomes more massive, so that both support each other and have more privileges such as monopoly, protection, or other forms of privilege. In the 17th century AD to the 18th century AD was the period called commercial capitalism or merchant capitalism in Europe. When the economic era of mercantilism developed, several European countries that adhered to the theory of mercantilism were England, France, Portugal, the Netherlands, and Spain.

    It was during that period that the development of mercantilism’s economic thought developed rapidly, starting from both quality and quantity. This era became a period where each individual became an economist for themselves.

    Characteristics of Mercantilism Economic System

    When entering the renaissance era and the development of mercantilism in Europe, precious metals became a measuring tool for prosperity, wealth, and power for a country. This means that the more precious metals an imperialist country owns, the richer and more powerful that country becomes. Here are the characteristics of a mercantilism economic system:

    1. The state is the only form of ruler of an economy
    2. Get as much precious metal as possible and that becomes the main thing
    3. Focus on a surplus trade balance which is a form of obtaining large profits from foreign trade
    4. There are policies that can support the sustainability of the economic mercantilism system such as:
      • Make colonial countries outside their sovereign countries
      • Prohibiting blood or colonial countries from doing trade with other countries, especially rival or rival countries
      • There is a market monopoly that maximizes the role of the main ports as part of the main activity of the economy
      • Forbids colonial countries to export gold and silver, even as a means of payment
      • Prohibits trade commodities to be carried in foreign ships
      • Making export subsidies, ie subsidies whose cost burden is borne by the government on companies when exporting goods abroad. The purpose of this policy is for the exporting party to be able to sell its goods abroad at a cheaper price, so that economic conditions become competitive
      • Carry out promotions in various manufacturing industries through research or directly subsidized research by the government which is useful to increase production results
      • Limiting the wages of workers whose purpose is to suppress the production of the country and companies so that the acquisition of profits becomes more maximal
      • Maximizing the use of domestic resources that aims to reduce the cost of importing goods because imports can increase a country’s production
      • Limiting domestic consumption through non-tariff trade barriers, where the country tries to prevent the entry of imported goods through various policies where the policy is not an import customs tariff

    Impact of Mercantilism

    This mercantilist theory was widely taught in all European schools in the early modern period (18th and 19th centuries) when national consciousness began to develop. This event first triggered the intervention of the state that regulated the economy, and finally the capitalist system was born in this era. Market needs taught by the theory of mercantilism eventually caused many wars between European countries.

    Finally the era of European imperialism has begun. Mercantilist economic theory began to disappear in the second half of the 18th century with the emergence of a new economic theory by Adam Smith. There are several countries that use this theory. France was one of the most important economies in Europe at the time. Louis XIV of France thought that the country should rule in the economic field, as in the case of diplomacy.

    In addition, the interests of the country are prioritized above the merchants and others, as indicated by the King. The purpose of mercantilist economic policies was to build a canyon, especially during times of intense war, and countries had to find ways to strengthen their economies and weaken foreign enemies.

    Well, that’s the explanation of mercantilism, starting from the meaning, history, purpose, impact, and explanation of the complete economic theory. Learning about economic theory certainly requires a lot of references because of the wide scope of scientific research. To start learning it, Reader can start from basic reference sources, such as an introduction to economics, and the application of economic theory in general. Reader can visit the Sinaumedia book collection at www.Sinaumedia.com or www.ebooksSinaumedia.com , such as the following book recommendations about economic theory: Happy learning. #SahabatTanpabatas.

    This book tries to explain economic theory and concepts in a more practical and simple language and perspective. Therefore, application examples, summaries, and brief explanations are also provided for the reader’s understanding. The author hopes that this book can help readers understand and understand economic principles in a more systematic and practical way.

    This book is divided into nine chapters and provides new teaching methods for the development of Indonesian financial management. This learning system is designed to increase the reader’s interest and make the text easier to read and understand. Each chapter contains several features of this book called educational innovation, such as general learning objectives, specific learning objectives, chapter descriptions, and the previous and next chapters.

    Accompanied by essays in the form of descriptive questions and multiple choice tasks, presented comprehensively as important points to ensure the reader understands the contents of the book. Case studies. Presenting the phenomenon of facts that exist in Indonesia. Readers are expected to be able to solve existing problems related to public sector organizations. Think critically. The text of this book presents many examples and issues related to financial governance to improve critical thinking skills.

    This book is suitable not only for business people but also for policy makers. The content is very informative and inspiring and therefore expands our insight into the previously unknown economic and political dynamics of the Gulf countries. This book is easy to read because it is presented in a fluent and quite complete language and is supported by up-to-date data. This will help the reader to fully understand the development of the Gulf countries.

     

  • Understanding Brands: History, Functions, and Types

    Understanding Brands: History, Functions, and Types

    Meaning of brand – Reader, this time we will discuss the meaning of brand, history, up to the stage of brand development. We need to know first, the meaning of brand is related to a symbol consisting of a name, term, image, logo, icon, design, or a combination of all of them, which is intended to identify, define, or provide a product or service.

    That all serves to distinguish one seller’s identity from another seller.

    Brand Meaning

    According to Law Number 20 of 2016 on Trademarks and Geographical Indications, a trademark is a sign with special characteristics in the form of a picture, name, word, letter, number, color pattern, or a combination of these elements. that there is That is in goods or services used for commercial activities.

    A brand is a distinguishing mark of trading activities with similar goods or services, as well as a guarantee of quality when compared with similar goods or services belonging to other parties.

    Thus, the brand includes the company’s commitment to consistently provide special features, benefits, and services to buyers.

    Brands or trademarks are included in intellectual property rights, because this is what distinguishes a product/service that is unique and different from other products that may be of the same type. These branding elements include expressions, designs, and symbols that can be recognized.

    In order for a brand to be legally protected, the brand must be registered. The purpose is to prevent the parties from using the brand that has been created. It turns out that not all brands can be registered.

    So, for Reader who are developing a brand , it is best to first understand the meaning of brand and avoid the following points when creating and registering a brand.

    1. The brand does not conflict with ideology, standards, and national laws.
    2. Does not contain misleading information about the type, size, origin, type and purpose of registration.
    3. It is not allowed to use the name of protected plant varieties.
    4. Avoid writing information that does not match the quality or benefits of the goods/services produced.
    5. Labels without characters also cannot be registered.
      Avoid using generic names or symbols

    Brand Development History

    Branding has basically been going on for centuries. The word ” brand ” in English comes from the linguistic word ” brand ” which means “to burn” and refers to livestock identification.

    At that time, breeders used a special stamp to mark or mark their livestock and distinguish them from other livestock. With the stamp, it will be easier for consumers to identify quality cows provided by leading livestock companies.

    Some historical evidence also shows that signs/symbols have been used for thousands of years. For example, writing and making pictures on the walls of ancient Egyptian tombs that show pets have existed since 2000 years before Christ.

    In ancient Roman times, shops had pictures, such as shoes or beef to identify their products. Other examples include identity marks on ancient Chinese porcelain and ancient Greek and Greek antiquities.

    In the Middle Ages, some enterprises, such as bread producers, and silversmiths were run by trade unions that provided some kind of quality certification mark.

    The signs were then used as legal entities in several countries, such as England and Germany in the 15th century.

    The growth of new retail enterprises, such as department stores and grocery stores, has triggered an increase in consumer spending. The increase in industrialization and urbanization was accompanied by the increase in the standard of living in America, which then changed the lifestyle from self-producing to consuming most goods. Until the beginning of the 20th century, trademark law appeared .

    The role of the brand is of course to identify a specific designer or manufacturer, for example Mercedes Benz, Singer, Heinze, and Ford. In the late 19th and early 20th centuries manufacturers used brands to identify specific products.

    The Meaning of Brands According to Some Figures

    1. According to Kotler and Armstrong

    A brand is a name, term, sign, symbol or design, or a combination of all of them, which is intended to identify the goods or services of one seller or group of sellers and to distinguish them from competing products.

    2. According to Tjiptono

    A brand is a symbol, legal instrument (property), company, abbreviation, risk mitigation, positioning , personality, value chain, vision, added value, identity, image, relationship, and evolving entity.

    3. According to Simamora

    A brand is a name, sign, symbol, design, or combination of all that is intended to identify the goods or services of one seller among the goods and services of other sellers.

    4. According to Rangkuti

    A brand is a specific name and symbol (such as a logo, stamp, or packaging) intended to identify goods and services from a particular seller or group of sellers.

    5. According to Alma

    A brand is a sign or symbol that gives the identity of a certain item or service, which can be in the form of words, pictures, or a combination of both.

    Brand Parts

    According to Kotler and Keller (2009), a brand usually consists of several parts, namely:

    1. The brand name is part of the brand and is pronounced.
    2. Part of the brand that can be recognized but not pronounced, such as symbols, designs, fonts , or distinctive colors.
    3. A trademark is a part of a brand that is protected by law because of its ability to create something special.
    4. Copyright is a legally protected privilege to produce, publish, and sell written works, musical works, or works of art.

    Brand Functions and Benefits

    A brand serves to provide an identity for goods or services and functions to ensure the quality of articles and combinations for consumers.

    A brand also acts as a recruitment of goods or combined products produced by a person or legal entity with products or services performed by a person or other moral entity.

    Here are some brand functions.

    1. Power Indicator Function

    Signs are used to show that a product is legal from a business unit and also serves to give a sign that this product is done professionally.

    2. Quality Indicator Function

    A brand is a guarantee of quality, especially for products that have a good reputation.

    3. Suggestion Function

    The brand gives the impression that it will become a product collector.

    According to Tjiptono the benefits of a brand are as follows.

    • Identification is intended to facilitate the processing or tracking of products for companies, especially in the organization of inventory and accounting records.
    • A form of legal protection for the unique features or aspects of a product. Trademarks can be protected by registered trademarks, manufacturing processes can be protected by patents, and packaging can be protected by copyright and design. These intellectual property rights ensure that companies can safely invest in the brands they develop to reap the benefits of this valuable research.
    • Signal quality levels for satisfied customers, so they can easily choose and buy again later.
      Brand loyalty translates into the company’s ability to predict and secure demand and create entry barriers that make it difficult for other companies to enter the market.
    • How to create unique associations and meanings that differentiate a product from its competitors.
    • A source of competitive advantage, especially through legal protection, customer loyalty and a unique image formed in the minds of consumers.
    • A source of financial gain, especially for future income.

    Brand Type

    According to Law No. 15 of 2001 regarding brands, in general, brands are divided into three categories, namely:

    1. A brand is a brand used on goods sold by one or more people or legal entities to distinguish them from other similar goods.
    2. A service brand is a brand used for services marketed by one or more people with or by a legal entity to distinguish them from other similar services.
    3. Collective Brands are Brands used on goods and/or services with the same characteristics that are marketed together by more than one person or legal entity to distinguish them from other similar goods and/or services.

    Based on their form, trademarks are divided into several categories, specifically as follows:

    1. Brand Painting. This form is able to distinguish the design form or image of goods or services from other similar goods or services. For example, the Flying Horse brand image, is a drawing or picture of a horse with flying wings.
    2. Kata Brand. This mark is able to distinguish with the sound of words a product or service from other similar products or services. Examples: Pepsodent for toothpaste, Ultraflu for colds, Toyota for cars.
    3. Brand letters or numbers. This form has the power to distinguish in the form of letters or numbers between a good or service with other similar goods or services. For example, ABC for ketchup and syrup, 555 for books.
    4. Brand Name. This form has the power to distinguish the form of a name of goods or services from other similar goods or services. For example: Louis Vuitton for bags, Vinesia for wallets.
    5. Brand Combination of signs. This form is capable of distinguishing in the form of images/pictures and words between goods or services with other goods or services of the same nature. Example: Jamu Bu Meneer is a combination of the image of a woman and the words of Mrs. Meneer.

    According to Harahap (1996), based on its level, brands are divided into three levels, as follows.

    A. Normal Brand

    Normal brands are brands that do not have a high reputation. This casual brand is considered to have no symbolic influence from the art of living, both in terms of use and technology. Companies or consumers consider the brand to be of poor quality.

    Brands are seen as lacking in charisma that is capable of creating a sense of intimacy and mystical power that is suggestive to the public and consumers and is not capable of forming a market and consumer class.

    B. Famous Brands

    This type of brand is very famous because its logo has the power to attract attention. Such a brand has an extraordinary and enchanting power, so that all types of products under this brand immediately create familiarity and a psychological bond with consumers.

    C. Most Popular Brands

    The highest level of branding is the most popular brand. The level of the most popular brands is higher than the common brands, so all kinds of products under this brand immediately create a legendary touch.

    Because of this definition, for those who try it, it is likely to get stuck with the overlapping formulas of popular brands.

    Stages of Brand Development

    According to Rangkuti, a brand usually goes through several stages or stages of development, particularly as follows.

    1. Unbranded Products

    At this stage the product is managed as a commodity so branding is not required. This condition is very beneficial if demand is greater than supply , which often happens in monopoly economic situations. For example, cheap rice, fuel, generic drugs, etc.

    2. Brand As Reference

    At this level, there is some competition, although the level is not too tight. This competition encourages manufacturers to differentiate their products.

    The purpose is that the products produced by the company are different from the products of other companies. For example, sneakers, work shoes, notebooks, sketchbooks, etc.

    3. Brand as Personality

    At this point, distinguishing brands based on functional attributes becomes increasingly difficult, and increasingly difficult to do. Because most companies do the same activities.

    To differentiate manufactured products from competing products, companies add personality value to each brand. For example, health bath soap, baby soap, etc.

    4. Brands as Icons

    At this stage, the brand belongs to the customer. Customers have a deeper knowledge of the brands they use.

    In general, brands that enter this level are already international and customers who use this brand can express themselves or express their identity, for example Marlboro Cigarettes.

    5. Brands as Enterprises

    Advertising at this level has a very complex identity and is more interactive, so customers can easily contact the brand.

    Because the company brand is a representation of the company so the brand is the same as the company. All managers and employees have the same perception of their brand.

    Communication outside the company has been integrated into the entire operational line, so that information flows smoothly from management to customers and vice versa, from customers to management.

    An example is Microsoft software, where customers can communicate directly at any time via the internet with the company, and in turn, the company can inform customers about its products at any time.

    6. Brand as Moral Policy

    Currently, there are only a few companies that are at this stage, namely companies that have run their business transparently, starting from the raw materials used, the production process and transportation, to the products, services, and after-sales.

    Customer service Information is communicated in a transparent, unambiguous manner, and nothing is hidden from a business, social or political moral point of view. The Body Shop and Benetton ads are examples.

    That’s a comment on the meaning of brand and matters related to brand. 

  • Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Meaning of Sublimation, Process, and Examples in Everyday Life

    Reader, do you know what sublimation is ? In our daily life there are many things with various forms and shapes. Starting from liquid, solid or gas. The form of this thing can change into another form. For example, a solid can turn into a liquid or vice versa.

    As we know, there are many kinds of events that change the existence of things. There is freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating. Well, this article will discuss more about sublimation.

    What is sublimation? and what are examples of events that happen everyday? Before we discuss about sublimation, we need to know the explanation about solid, liquid and gas.

    Solids, Liquids and Gases

    Solids are things that have a fixed nature, shape and volume. Examples of solid objects are lilies, tables, mattresses, chairs, stones and others.

    A liquid is a thing whose properties and shape change according to its container, the volume is constant and flows from a higher place to a lower place. Examples of liquids are water and oil

    Gases are things whose nature, shape and volume are always changing. Gases also occupy space. Examples of gaseous substances are air, gas, and wind.

    Meaning of Sublimation

    Sublimation is a form of change in the form of a solid substance into a gaseous substance without going through the liquid process. In the process of sublimation requires heat energy or heat. According to Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia (KBBI) , sublimate comes from the word sublime which has the meaning of changing a solid substance into vapor.

    Sublimation is one form of physical change, because in the process of sublimation it is not accompanied by the formation of new substances. In addition, this sublimation process can be seen or observed with the direct eye or the naked eye from just its physical appearance or external appearance.

    Sublimation Process

    As explained earlier about the meaning of sublimation, sublimation is a change in the form or existence of a substance from a solid to a gas. The process of sublimation is to make molecules that are close to each other become distant and irregular.

    The process of sublimation is the result of the vapor pressure and temperature relationship. Just take an example of camphor, camphor or solid room fragrance. The camphor changes its form from a solid to a gaseous form whose molecules are distant from each other and irregular. Therefore, those things can emit a fragrance that makes the room fragrant.

    Solids are things that have close molecular distances with strong attraction. Meanwhile, gases have a shape like air where the molecular distance is far apart and irregular, the attraction of gases tends to be weak. Gas can be said to be a fairly light substance and its properties are almost the same as air.

    Examples of the Sublimation Process in Everyday Life

    There are many examples of sublimating events in our daily lives. Among them are camphor, dry ice to ice cubes that are kept at room temperature. Solid things that can sublimate include arsenic, water, iodine and solid carbon dioxide (dry ice). To know an example of the sublimation process, the following is a complete explanation.

    1. Kapur Barus or Camphor

    Lime that is placed around the house is usually useful to get rid of odors or even insects. Lime or camphor that if left in the wardrobe that we use will surely shrink and wear out over time.

    This is because camphor or camphor receives heat from the cabinet environment. In addition, because camphor is made from a chemical substance called naphthalene. Naphthalene is a substance that sublimates easily because it is bound by a relatively weak van der waals force.

    2. Dry Ice or Dry Ice

    Dry ice or dry ice if left in the open air will undergo a process of sublimation. The carbon dioxide or CO2 content in dry ice does not melt when heated, but instead directly changes into a gas. Dry ice sublimes at a temperature of -78 degrees Celsius under normal atmospheric pressure of 1 atm.

    3. Iodine

    Solid iodine when heated will sublimate and become gaseous iodine. Iodine gas can turn back into solid iodine after going through the cooling process.

    4. Melting Snow

    Snow is formed from complex crystals with large surface areas. The larger the surface area of ​​the snow exposed to air, the more molecules can sublimate.

    5. Ice Cubes Fresh Out of the Fridge

    Ice cubes are synonymous with the change of existence from a solid to a liquid or called melting. However, not only that, when ice cubes that have just been taken out of the fridge and placed in room temperature will emit a lot of smoke. This can happen because the ice not only melts but experiences a sublimation event.

    6. Sublimation Printer

    Nowadays, inkjet printers have been replaced by sublimation printers. Printing on the print uses heat to unite the ink and fabric into one. The advantage of the print from this printer is that it can be used immediately because the print can dry quickly.

    In addition, the use of printers with sublimation techniques is also used in the process of printing synthetic fabrics such as polyester, making T-shirts, flags and banners. By using this printing machine, the advantage is that the color is more brilliant because the coloring material is bound with synthetic fibers.

    An example of sublimation is when the process is done through this printer that uses a special film, when heated, the pigments in the film will sublimate and be captured again on paper.

    Once the pigment solidifies, it will create an image on paper. Because of the sublimation process, this printer is much more comfortable and less messy to use when compared to other types of printers.

    7. Freeze-drying

    Sublimation techniques are also often used in the culinary world or the food industry, namely freeze drying. This technique can maintain the quality of food because it uses a very low temperature.

    The drying of frozen food involves the sublimation of water from the food in a frozen state when a high-pressure vacuum is applied. In addition, this technique is also often used to preserve food brought by astronauts into outer space in order to maintain the quality of the food.

    8. Room freshener

    Room fresheners not only have a liquid form that is sprayed but there are also room fresheners that have a solid form. Air freshener is a solid that is placed at room temperature, which over time will undergo a sublimation process or turn into a gas alias into a fragrant aroma while its size will shrink or shrink.

    9. Arsenic Solids

    Arsenic solids if heated can go through the process of sublimation. this heating process will directly change from the solid phase to the gas phase, without melting or experiencing the melting phase.

    Arsenic solids can sublimate at a temperature of 616 degrees Celsius. Arsenic does not melt and directly sublimates because it has a melting point that is at 817 degrees Celsius. Which means arsenic can sublimate first without having time to melt.

    10. Glass On Scouring Tools

    For women, it’s definitely quite often to use this one hairdressing tool, the catok tool has a material made of glass which is a heat transfer material which will erode over time due to heat from electricity and become hot gas.

    11. Coal

    Coal is a black solid used for combustion. Burning coal will become carbon dioxide gas or smoke.

    12. Fireworks

    Fireworks are very identical and many are bought at the turn of the year. Fireworks have materials in the form of solids inside which when burned will produce beautiful shapes and colors. Fireworks that are lit will then explode and become carbon dioxide gas.

    13. Wick on the Candle

    The wick on a candle that burns over time will get shorter and turn into gas as the length of the candle burns.

    The Process of Changing the Form of Other Things

    Not only sublimation, there is a change in the form of other things that you must know, Reader. The following is the process of changing the form of things other than sublimation:

    1. Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in the form of matter from a gas to a solid. The process that causes crystallization is the release of heat energy from an object.

    For example, the process of crystallization turns water vapor in the air into snow. There is also the change of air in the refrigerator into ice flowers.

    2. Freezing

    Freezing is the process of changing from a liquid to a solid. The process that is done to allow the freezing process to occur is to change the form of a liquid object by cooling it to the freezing point and then it will change into a solid object.

    An example of a change in the form of an object by means of freezing is when water is put in the freezer and it will become ice cubes or freeze.

    3. Melting

    Melting is the process of changing from a solid to a liquid. The action or action done to change things into liquid is to heat or raise the temperature of the solid thing.

    For example, when the ice in the freezer is placed in an open area or under the hot sun for a long time, then the ice cubes will turn into liquid. Ice that was initially a solid thing then turned into a liquid thing.

    4. Yawning

    Evaporation is the process of changing the state of matter from liquid to gas. The process that causes evaporation is by heating or raising the temperature of the liquid.

    For example, water that is heated over time will boil and then evaporate into smoke or gas. That already indicates that there is a change in existence from a liquid to a solid. Another example can also be seen when evaporation in the sea or river during the day will produce clouds.

    5. Condensing

    Condensation is the process of changing from a gas to a liquid. This is due to the display of heat energy experienced by the object.

    An example is when you put ice cubes and water on a glass, then the outside of the glass will become wet. In addition, the grass that is in the field in the morning, becomes wet even though there is no rain in the afternoon.

    Causes of Changes in the Form of Things

    The change that occurs in an object is certainly not without reason, that is why in the change of substance it can be recognized directly as well as using aids. Changes in the form of things can occur due to physical, chemical, and biological changes in the properties of the substances of those things.

    The following is an explanation of the causes of physical changes in solid, liquid, and gas:

    1. Physical Changes

    Physical change is a form of change in substance in an object that can be seen or observed directly with the eyes or with its physical appearance only and its external appearance. Physical changes do not change the chemical composition of a substance.

    This change does not change the material or form a new substance in an object. The special nature of this change is that the change can be observed from the outside or physically and can return to its original state as before the substance changed.

    An example of a chemical change is when iron is heated, then its size will get longer, this is called expansion. Then another example is ice that melts, the change in its form can return to its original state, which is to become a solid object by cooling it.

    2. Chemical Changes

    Chemical change is a form of change in the form of an object that occurs in the shape and size of a substance and produces a new, different substance. This change in form will produce different or new material types and properties from the original substance.

    A chemical reaction will create a substance or composition that changes into a new chemical formula. This change in chemical form is caused by the material reduction of the substance when it changes. Chemical changes can occur from the factors of combustion, cooling, heating, and decomposition.

    An example of this chemical change is wood that is burned then it will produce charcoal and gas or smoke. This change to charcoal and gas cannot be changed back to its original form, which is wood, because the change is chemical.

    3. Biological Changes

    Biological changes are changes that occur due to the influence of the activity of other living beings or decomposing microorganisms such as fungi, bacteria and other trace elements. Similar to chemical changes, biological changes also cause changes in things that cannot return to their original form before they change.

    Examples of biological changes that you can find in everyday life are like wood becoming weathered and disintegrating over time, fruits that start to rot. The time required in this weathering process is very long.

    The World According to Physics

    Closing

    As explained above, the change in the form of things is not only sublimation, but there are several others, such as evaporation, freezing, melting, crystallizing, and condensing. Every change in existence will definitely be around us. For example, water that freezes, until it becomes ice cubes.

     

  • Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Meaning of Condensation, Types, Until the Process Occurs

    Definition of Condensation – The nature of changes in the form of things is divided into two types, namely temporary changes and permanent changes. Temporary changes are said to be physical changes, while permanent changes are called chemical changes. Transient changes are usually shown through the process of freezing, melting, evaporating, condensing, sublimating and dissolving. If an object undergoes one of these processes, its existence will return to its original state.

    Meanwhile, changes in existence still occur if things undergo changes that cannot return to their original form. Permanent changes are usually shown by burning and decaying processes.

    On this occasion, we will discuss more about dew or condensation. Usually, when the night air is very cold, then in the morning dew will appear on the leaves. In fact, not a few people will play with the dew on the leaves. Dew itself is one of the nature of changes in existence.

    Condensation itself has another name, namely condensation. However, not many people know the condensation process. To find out, you can read this article, Reader.

    Meaning of Condensation or Condensation

    Condensation is a process of changing the form of matter into a more dense form, such as gas (or steam) into liquid, a change of substance that releases heat. Condensation is the opposite of evaporation which releases heat.

    In addition, this condensation occurs when the water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is colder than the dew point of the water vapor, then this water vapor will condense into water droplets or dew.

    According to the Big Indonesian Dictionary (KBBI), the meaning of the word condense is to become dew. Another meaning of condense is to become water droplets (about steam). As explained before, dew usually appears at night. This is the same as the definition of dew according to KBBI, which is water droplets that fall from the air (especially at night).

    Meaning of Condensation According to Experts

    In addition to the meaning of condensing or condensation according to KBBI, some experts also expressed the meaning of condensing or condensation. Some experts also say that condensing or condensation is difficult to separate from what is called precipitation. Here is the meaning of condensation according to experts, among others.

    1. Wibowo et al (2016)

    The definition of precipitation according to Wibowo is an event of water falling from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface. The form of the falling liquid can be snow, rain, fog and dew.

    2. Triatmodjo (2008)

    The definition of precipitation according to Triatmodjo is the descent of water from the atmosphere to the earth’s surface which can consist of dew, snow, hail, and rain. Precipitation for tropical regions, rain provides a large role or function. This is seen where it is usually not what is considered precipitation.

    3. Karnaningroem (1990)

    Karnaningroem said that the condensation process is a process of changing the form of gas into a liquid form due to the difference in temperature. The condensation temperature changes in accordance with the vapor pressure that occurs.

    4. According to Research

    According to researchers, the definition of precipitation is any product from the condensation of water in the atmosphere. It occurs when the atmosphere becomes saturated and the water then condenses and comes out of the solution (precipitated).

    5. Quoted in the Natural Science Textbook of Business and Management Expertise

    Condensation is the change of substance from gas to liquid. During the condensation process, the gas releases heat (heat energy), so it turns into a liquid.

    Type of Dew or Condensation

    It turns out that the dew itself has a type. As for the type of condensation which is divided into two types, namely exterior condensation and interior condensation:

    1. Exterior Condensation

    Exterior condensation is a condensation that occurs when moist air touches a cold surface such as glass.

    2. Interior Condensation

    Interior condensation is a condensation that occurs when there is too much air humidity in a closed room, so that when directly compared to the amount of warm air in the room it will cause warm air.

    Process of Condensation

    The process of condensation or condensation occurs when water vapor in the air passes through a surface that is much colder than a water vapor dew point, then this water vapor condenses into water droplets or dew. The process of cloud formation is the result of condensation.

    The rise of water vapor is due to sunlight condensing in the air. This is because the air above the earth’s surface is much lower than a water vapor dew point.

    The process of condensation that occurs is what causes clouds to form. Normally, for condensation to take place, the atmosphere needs to be completely saturated. In other words, a vapor pressure must reach a maximum. In addition to saturated clouds, the nature of water must have a surface on which water can condense.

    Meanwhile, in the atmosphere, condensation often occurs around dusty particles or other particles such as smoke or even microscopic bacteria.

    Impact of Condensation

    In general, condensation is one of the biggest causes of short circuits, because with condensation, it will create water dew inside the unit board which can cause bad contact on a device or worse cause a short circuit.

    For this reason, the recommended temperature for the temperature of the room where the medical equipment is located is 17°C-20°C, even for the control panel room on a large unit such as CT Scan or MRI of course requires special temperature monitoring even if it is equipped with room exhaust or cooler packets in units.

    A temperature change that is too drastic, for example from a very cold temperature of 16°C to a much warmer room temperature such as 23°C, will likely cause condensation. If this is allowed to continue, not only can it cause a short circuit, but it can cause the equipment to be easily damaged.

    Examples of Condensation in Everyday Life

    Here are some examples of condensation in everyday life.

    1. Condensation in the Morning

    Condensation in the morning when we see wet leaves or grass when at night there is no rain or dew drops that appear on the wall of the glass if the glass is filled with cold water. Condensation in the tent occurs due to the presence of water in the form of steam as a result of the breathing process.

    The tighter the conditions of the tent, the more severe the possibility of condensation will occur due to respiratory vapors trapped in the tent walls. The formation of water droplets through condensation from water vapor in the clouds. These water droplets will then fall in the form of rain.

    2. Drop in Temperature at Night

    At night and in the morning, the temperature tends to cool down. Earth’s air contains water vapor in it. The more water vapor content, the more humid the air. This causes water vapor that is trapped in the air to condense or condense, producing dew drops.

    3. Cloud and Rain Formation Process

    According to the US Geological Survey , clouds form in the atmosphere because air containing water vapor rises and cools. Water vapor in the form of gas rises to the atmosphere due to evaporation. Height in the atmosphere causes less pressure, indirectly lowering air temperature.

    As a result, the temperature of the air at the top of the atmosphere is colder than the temperature of the earth’s surface. When the water vapor reaches the top of the atmosphere, the water vapor then cools, turns into water droplets and forms clouds.

    4. Water Drops on Cold Drinks

    Cold drinks have a lower temperature than room temperature. When placed at room temperature, the water vapor in the air around the cold drink will condense and condense. Condensed water vapor turns into liquid water.

    This is the reason why canned drinks or cold drinks in glasses always drip water. Not because the packaging of the cold drink leaked, but because the water vapor around it condensed.

    5. Fog on Glasses

    Misty glasses are the use of glasses when eating warm food and drinks. This is because hot water vapor from food and drink rises towards the face and meets the colder air. So, the water vapor condenses, forming small droplets of water vapor. The water vapor drops then stick to the glasses and make them foggy.

    6. Fog on the Car Window

    A foggy car window is an example of an everyday occurrence that shows condensation. According to Sciencing, the air inside the car is warmer and contains a lot of water vapor from the breath of its passengers.

    While the car glass temperature is colder because it is affected by the open air. The water vapor that is close to the car glass then condenses, becoming a fog that covers the car glass.

    7. Heated Sugarcane Drip Liquid

    8. Dew on Foliage

    Drops of water (dew) on the leaves in the morning. Although there was no rain the night before, in the morning there were water drops on the plants outside. The occurrence of dew in the morning helps the process of distillation (distillation) of certain substances.

    9. Gases that Become Dew

    The vaporized gas is flowed into a cold container, so that the gas turns into dew which then becomes alcohol water.

    10. Drops of Water on the Pot

    There are water droplets on the lid of the pot because the pot is hot.

    11. Dew on Bathroom Glass

    Bathroom glass will be watery if exposed to hot water vapor.

    Changes in Appearance Other than Condensation

    Basically, the changes that happen around us are not only condensation, but there is still much more. For more details, it will be explained in the discussion below.

    Melting

    In addition to condensation, there is also a change in the form of other objects, including melting. Melting is a change in the state of a solid to a liquid due to a hot temperature. Some events around you can show this event (melting). One of them is ice that melts when left at room temperature or warm temperature

    Here is an example of melting namely:

    1. Heated ice cubes or ice cream that is left continuously in an open space will melt over time.
    2. A candle that is lit will eventually melt because it is heated.

    Yawning

    The next change in the form of matter is the change in the form of evaporation. Evaporation is the change of form of a liquid into a gas. This event is easy to find when there is cooking activity. When the water is heated on the stove in a few seconds, the water will boil.

    The boiling event is an example of the occurrence of evaporation or change from a liquid to a gas at the same time, there is a reduction in the volume of water.

    Here are examples of yawning among others

    1. Evaporation on clothes that have been dried in the sun.
    2. Gasoline that is left open will eventually run out because it turns into gas.

    Sublime

    Sublimation is a change in the state of a gas to a solid. The “disappearance” of Barus camphor placed in the cupboard is often used as an example of sublimation. An example of this event occurs when it is cooled to a certain temperature.

    Here is an example of sublimation:

    1. Camphor that is placed in the wardrobe for a long time will run out.
    2. Air fresheners that last for a long time run out of air.

    Freezing

    The change from solid to liquid is called freezing. In this case, the liquid object is cooled to its freezing point, then it will change into a solid object. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of freezing:

    1. Water that is put in the refrigerator, over time will turn into ice.
    2. Gelatin powder that is dissolved in hot water will harden over time if left to cool.

    Crystallize

    Crystallization is a change in form from a gas to a solid. In this event, the substance releases heat energy.

    Here is an example of crystallisation:

    1. The vapor in the air turns into snow.
    2. Ice flowers attached to the wall of the freezer.

    Snow Formation. An example of crystallization events in everyday life is the formation of snow and ice directly from water vapor in saturated clouds without having to turn into liquid water first.

    That is, solid snow is formed directly from water vapor which is a gas. The process of snow formation by crystallization occurs at low temperatures, which is around minus 12 to minus 15°C.

    Frost, during the winter, is often seen ice formed on the roof of the house and plant leaves. The ice is frost formed through a crystallization event. Where the ambient temperature is very cold, so water vapor (gas phase) immediately crystallizes and turns into ice (solid phase) on the surface of things. Water vapor freezes without melting first.

    Black soot on vehicle exhaust. An example of the next crystallizing event is the presence of black soot on the muffler. Not only on exhausts, black soot is also often seen in fireplaces or machines that use fossil fuels such as petroleum, coal and natural gas.

    Black soot is black carbon. According to the Climate and Clean Air Coalition, black carbon or black soot is the result of incomplete combustion of fossil fuels and biomass. Black carbon is formed as a result of combustion gas that crystallizes and turns into black particles and forms soot in the exhaust of motor vehicles.

    Dry ice is often used as a cooling agent, making various foods, also making fog and smoke effects in a show. The formation of dry ice is an example of a crystallization or deposition event. According to Encyclopedia Britannica, dry ice is made from carbon dioxide gas that is compressed and turns solid at a temperature of around minus 57 degrees Celsius.

    Conclusion

    When we see dew, we will certainly be very happy, especially since dew is believed to have many benefits, especially for eye health. Because of this, not a few people have dew in their eyes in the morning, are you one of them? Dew itself has several types, namely interior and exterior condensation.

     

  • The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    The Meaning of Plant Grafting together with the Ways and Benefits

    In the process of obtaining quality fruit, it is necessary to do some efforts that we are familiar with by grafting plants. Plant grafting is a method of artificial vegetative propagation. The breeding method aims to obtain results that are more or less the same as the parent, or even better.

    Meaning of Plant Grafting

    The process of grafting plants is a fairly simple and easy breeding process. The process of grafting plants can even be done by people who don’t understand much about plantations, but on the condition that the person understands the steps involved in grafting.

    Grafting is one of the fastest solutions to grow roots on plant stems. Therefore, most of the grafting process uses twigs that are not too large. Grafting has the main purpose of producing fruit more quickly with the growth of the plant not being too large.

    F. Rahardi in his book entitled In order for plants to bear fruit quickly revealed that grafting can only be applied to dicotyledonous or dicotyledonous types of seed plants. In order to get high-quality results, the branches or twigs that will be used in grafting must not be too old or too young.

    Steps to Plant Grafting

    Well, before doing the grafting process, there are some things that are done and observed.

    1. Choose the parent plant to be grafted.

    This selection is the most important step. The good and bad result of grafting is determined from the selection of the parent plant. Therefore, before grafting it is expected to ensure that the parent plant that will be used in grafting has good quality.

    2. Choose twigs or plant stems that are straight.

    There are several conditions that need to be observed before choosing a stem for grafting, namely that the stem is not too old or too young. In addition, the selected plant stems should be straight and get enough sunlight. The selection of the plant stem here has the purpose so that the photosynthesis process in the plant can run well and can accelerate root growth on the grafted plant stem.

    3. Peel the skin on the plant stem

    The first step to be done in this stage is to peel the bark 5 cm long. The trunk or twig or branch to be used must be peeled off the skin. Make sure the stem of the plant is clean of the attached bark.

    4. Clean the cambium on the plant stem

    The cambium on the stem or twig or branch of the plant should be cleaned around it with a knife first. The easiest technique to clean the cambium content on the plant stem is to feel the part of the plant stem. If the plant stem feels rough, then it can be confirmed that the plant stem is clean from the cambium.

    5. Leave the plant stem for 1 day.

    This step needs to be done so that the stems of the plants that have been peeled can dry and be resistant to diseases and fungi. At this stage, what needs to be ensured is the cambium content on the plant stem, hopefully the plant stem is clean and there is no cambium attached. This step will be beneficial so that the grafting results can grow well in producing high-quality and high-quality seeds.

    6. Covering the plant stem

    The next step is to wrap the plant stem with plastic or use coconut coir. Packaging can be done by first tying the bottom of the plant stem that has been peeled off. After making a rope at the bottom of the plant stem, the next thing is to fill the plant stem with soil. Land use is expected to be fertile land. Finally, wrap the top with plastic or coconut coir until it resembles a capsule.

    7. Watering plants routinely and regularly.

    The process of transplanting plants requires patience and diligence. Things that can be done so that the grafting process can be faster and the graft can immediately produce roots, which is to do routine and regular watering. It is not allowed to let the soil in it experience dryness due to lack of water intake. Besides. The thing that can be done to make the soil more fertile is adding fertilizer.

    8. Wait until the roots grow.

    Well, the signs that the grafting process has been successful is that the plant stem produces brown roots growing out of the wrapper. Once the roots have come out, it can be confirmed that the stem of the grafted plant can be cut and then sown.

    Benefits of grafting plants

    As mentioned above, the process of grafting plants is a quick way to produce beautiful fruits and flowers. Plus, combining two plants into one will make the plant stronger and resistant to various diseases and fungi. But, behind the superiority of grafting plants, grafting also has disadvantages that need to be noted.

    Here are some advantages and disadvantages of the grafting process.

    Advantages:

    Proportionate height

    The grafted plant will have a lower height than its parent. Plants that are tall but can already bear fruit or flower make plants easier to treat and not messy.

    Fruiting or flowering fresh and lush

    Grafted plants will be faster to bear fruit or flower. In addition, because the grafting process comes from a quality parent, the fruit or flower produced will also be better when compared to the parent.

    Quality like parent

    The process of grafting plants will not reduce the quality of the parent, in fact the grafted plant will have the same or even better quality than the parent.

    Disadvantages:

    The parent is broken.

    The grafting process will not actually reduce the quality of the parent, but what needs to be noted is excessive peeling on the stem of the parent plant. As a result of being peeled more than used, it can make the parent damaged and even die.

    Prone to death.

    After the graft takes out the roots and is ready to cut and sow. The thing to pay attention to is maintenance. Grafted plants must be given special care and cannot be neglected. Newly sown grafted plants are not as strong as plants sown from seeds, therefore, special and diligent care must be taken so that the plants can grow optimally.

    Well, knowledge about the advantages and disadvantages of grafting plants is very necessary, considering that there are many things that need to be observed so that plants can grow lushly and develop well. It’s like taking care of a child, plants that are still small and just growing need special attention, which is certainly different from plants that have grown. Therefore, the key to successful grafting is the perseverance of the owner.

    The difference between layering and grafting

    In fact, there are many and varied ways of grafting. The naming of grafting is also different, from layering, grafting, to transplantation.

    Here are the differences in the ways of grafting plants.

    1. Layering

    Layering is a way of grafting plants by planting plant branches that are still connected to the parent plant to be used as roots and grow new plants. After the graft takes root, the stem of the plant is then cut to be sown.

    2. Grafting

    Grafting is a method of grafting that combines two different types of plants into one. Many people do Grafting to produce fruit or flowers that are fresher and more lush.

    3. Transplantation

    Transplantation is a method of grafting by moving plants from one place to another. In the process of transplanting, you will usually need new soil and pots.

    Once again, thoroughness in performing the method of grafting and treating grafted plants is the key to successful grafting. Therefore, the correct knowledge of the basic techniques of grafting is the best step before starting to graft plants

    Artificial Vegetative Reproduction

    Reproduction basically means making again. In the field of plants, reproduction can usually be interpreted as breeding or in other words extending the lineage, It should be noted that reproduction in plants can take place in two ways, namely Sexually (Generative) and Asexually (vegetative).

    • Sexual (Generative): This means that new plants that grow are the result of the Fertilization process. Fertilization itself can be interpreted as the fusion of male gamete cells and female gamete cells. Simply put, this process is common and common as a marriage process.
    • Vegetative means, new plants that are produced without going through the fertilization process. Vegetative itself can be divided into two types, namely natural vegetative and artificial vegetative.

    Natural vegetative can be done with special means or tools. Natural vegetative growth usually occurs in meristem cells. The natural way of vegetative reproduction is by: rhizome rooting, stolons, stem tubers, layered tubers, root tubers, buds and adventitious buds.

    While Artificial Vegetative is a breeding process that is successful due to getting help from outside parties, or humans. Artificial vegetation can also occur due to human engineering. Artificial vegetative reproduction has a specific purpose, such as to obtain superior seeds as desired.

    Interestingly, artificial vegetative reproduction is not only grafting. Here are five methods of artificial vegetative reproduction, namely grafting, sticking (oculation), connecting, cuttings, and bending down.

    The following are the methods of artificial vegetative reproduction:

    1. Grafting

    As discussed above, grafting is one of the fastest processes to multiply plants in artificial vegetative propagation. The end result of grafting is making the trunk or branch of a tree produce roots. Briefly, the grafting step is to peel off a little bark of the tree and then wrap it with coconut coir or plastic and sprinkle it with soil.

    Plants that can be grafted are only dicot plants or dicots. The most commonly grafted plants are oranges, guava, mango, rambutan, or durian.

    2. Steak

    Cuttings are one of the artificial vegetative propagation. Steps to cut the plant can be done by cutting on one part of the plant. Further, the cuttings of the plant can be directly planted on the plant stem that has been opened with a knife.

    Cuttings are one of the fastest and most common ways to propagate plants. Plants that are cut are usually ornamental plants and fruit plants, such as grapes, passion fruit, apples or peppers.

    3. Oculation

    Oculation is one of the methods often used to multiply plant seeds. Oculation can be done by sticking a piece of tree bark that has buds from the upper trunk on a slice of another tree bark. Usually, tree bark is taken from the lower trunk. This is meant for the plant to unite and become a new plant.

    Some people usually use inoculation as one of the techniques to improve plant quality in an artificial vegetative way. Just like other methods, artificial vegetative propagation by means of occulation aims to obtain superior quality plant seeds.

    4. Connecting

    Connecting plants is one way to multiply plants. This process itself can be done by combining the upper stem and lower stem of two similar plants. The purpose of the self-fertilization process is to combine the superior properties of two plants. It is hoped to obtain a plant that has superior properties.

    The joining technique is usually used for vegetable crops such as tomatoes and eggplants. In addition, it is also widely used for fruit crops such as coffee, cassava, or mango.

    5. Bend down

    Bending over is also one of the techniques used to multiply plants. The bending process uses a technique by bending the stem or branch into the ground to be piled with soil. However, the tip of the plant is still removed to the soil surface. In this breeding process, the tree trunks used must be old or mature trunks.

    The process of prostrate reproduction is usually applied to plants that have long and flexible stems or branches. The plants that are commonly used for breeding are bent over, namely betel nut. The way of bending down to make cambium on the plant stem does not need to be removed, because it has been removed by the soil naturally.

  • Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Understanding Memos: Purpose, Types, Features, Sections, and Writing Tips

    Meaning of Memo – Surely Reader is no stranger to what a memo is. If Reader thinks that a memo is usually written on a small note paper or sticky note and then pasted on a book or an item as an important note to be read, that thought is not wrong.

    Broadly speaking, a memo is indeed a reminder or a brief note about a problem that is being discussed. But it turns out, the memo is not just a simple note because the memo has two functions, which are official and unofficial.

    Then, what is the meaning of the memo? What about the official and unofficial functions of a memo?

    Well, for Reader to understand that, let’s read the following review!

    Meaning of Memo

    According to Keraf (1980), the memo stands for memorandum and has various meanings, namely (1) memorandum means an informal note or reminder letter, (2) memorandum means a statement of diplomatic relations, and (3) memorandum means a form of communication aimed at to advice, instructions, or explanations.

    Meanwhile, based on KBBI (Kamus Besar Bahasa Indonesia), this memo or memorandum is a form of communication that contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations in the form of notes. In addition, memos can also be used as a statement in diplomatic relations.

    Not only that, a memo or memorandum can also be used by the leadership of an organization or company in an effort to deliver a short message in the form of a notification or request in an organization or company.

    Well, based on some of the definitions that have been explained, it can be concluded that a memo is a form of communication through short messages that are usually in the form of suggestions, notifications, requests, and written in a note.

    In practice, it is very rare for employees to give a memo to their superiors, especially in an organization or business enterprise.

    Meanwhile, in the legal realm, a memorandum report usually has one to three pages only. If there is more than one page, efforts should be made to summarize it so that the reader does not have to read the entire information.

    Purpose of Memo Writing

    The purpose of writing a memo is to request or provide information to someone to be addressed. For example, Ana wants to write a memo to her father that she is going to college, so the purpose of writing the memo is to notify her father that she is going to college.

    Types of Memos

    Previously, it was explained that the memo was official and unofficial. Official memos are usually written by companies with important contexts or matters. While on informal memos, written personally. Well, here is the description.

    1. Official Memo

    As the name suggests, in an official memo the context is definitely an important matter. Usually this type of memo is used as a statement as an official link between the leader and his subordinates, in a company, institution or agency.

    2. Informal Memo/ Personal Memo

    Next is an unofficial memo or it can also be called a personal memo. It is called so because usually the contents of the notification are unofficial matters, and are addressed to friends, relatives, family, even the closest people.

    Characteristics of a Memo

    Memos are fundamentally different from notice boards. Well the following are the characteristics of a memo.

    • Contains suggestions, instructions, or explanations about something
    • The information presented is clear and relevant
    • In an official memorandum, it has parts like a letter, but simpler
    • In an unofficial memorandum, the identity of the office is not included (name of the office, telephone number, office address)
    • Delivered horizontally (parties with equivalent positions), as well as vertically (from superiors to subordinates, or vice versa)
    • The language used is shorter, more concise, and simpler

    Sections of the Memo

    Previously, it was explained that a memo is a short message. Despite this, memos still have certain parts, especially in official memos. Well here is the description.

    • Head part

    Just like humans, a memo also has a head that is located on top. The head of this memo consists of the memo header, the name of the sender, and the name of the recipient of the memo.

    • Content section

    The next part is the body of the memo which consists of the information to be conveyed by the sender to the recipient.

    • Closing Section

    The last part is the closing part or the foot of the memo. The footer of this memo consists of the date the memo was written, the signature, and the clear name of the memo maker.

    Signing is very necessary, especially on official memos, because it shows that the information contained in the memo is important information in an official context.

    General Structure In A Memorandum

    When talking about the memorandum, the context must be official. Although memos and memorandums are actually the same thing, many people think that memos are related to informal contexts, while memorandums are related to official contexts.

    1. Memo letterhead

    This section later contains a brief explanation related to from and for whom the memo was made. The header of the memo usually contains the name of the maker, the purpose of the memo, the subject of the memo or topic, and the date.

    In the placement of dates should be actual.

    2. Introduction

    Next is the introductory structure located in the first paragraph of a memo. This introduction contains information about the purpose of the memo without being verbose. For example, a sentence such as “I am writing this memo to request approval regarding…”

    It should be known that the memo is to-the-point information, so that the delivery should also be to the point.

    3. Details

    The next structure is detailed. In this structure contains details of the purpose or subject of the memo which can be placed in the paragraph after the introduction. Similar to the introductory structure, the details should also be simple.

    For example: ” Along with the growth of the company and business, we have a new target market as of today … … 2022, so as the main director, I decided to separate the video and promotional content team from the marketing division. Furthermore, this team will move as an independent division effective from today ”

    4. Closing

    In the last structure of a memo, it must contain the contact number of the party that can be contacted in relation to the contents of the memo. For example, a memo containing permission to use the building for a festival event, then the closing part should have the contact of the relevant official clearly when the permission is approved.

    An example sentence: ” When permission is approved, please be willing to contact the Business Manager via the following email address… For his attention, I thank you and have a good job “.

    Tips for Compiling a Memo

    Specifically for an official memo, the compilation should use effective standard language, because the use of this memo is in an official context.

    • When you want to write a memo, it’s best to write it briefly and concisely, straight to the point.
    • Use language that is appropriate for who will receive it. When the receiver is someone with a certain position, use standard and effective language. However, when the recipient is the closest person in an informal context, can use everyday language but must be polite and clear in content.
    • Don’t forget to include the name of the memo maker clearly so that the existence of the memo can be accounted for.
    • Also include the recipient’s name so that the memo is not misdirected.

    Sample Memo

    Sample Official School Memo

    NEO CULTURE ZONE HIGH SCHOOL

    Jl. Citizen No.127 Tanjung Karang Barat

    Tel. (081) 332344 Email: culturezonehighschool@gmail.com

    MEMO

    From: Principal

    To: Head of SMA Neo Culture Zone

    I would like to discuss with you about the implementation of the Annual Festival in the framework of the 23rd School Anniversary which will last for three days. This discussion is to discuss the students so that they can better prepare for the Annual Festival.

    The discussion will be held on October 22, 2019. It is requested that you and all OSIS members prepare data about the Festival’s readiness. God willing, this discussion will be held later in the day after the second break in the OSIS room. That’s it and thank you.

    Bekasi, October 22, 2022

    Principal

    Kuncoro

    Sample Enterprise Memo

    PT Eska Lokal

    Jl. Jendral Sudirman No. 18 Depok

    Tel. 0212121212

    MEMO

    From: Managing Director

    To: Financial Staff

    Please prepare this month’s financial report. The report will be used as evaluation material with the board of directors which will be held at the monthly meeting, on December 19, 2019, at 10.00 WIB, in the office hall.

    The financial report still needs a lot to be prepared, so I really hope that you and all the staff can prepare the report as soon as possible. Don’t forget to send a soft copy of the report to my email. That’s it and thank you.

    Depok, December 13, 2021

    Principal Director

    Chandra Bayuji

    Example of an Organizational Memo

    Central Java Education Office

    State Vocational High School 1 Solo

    MEMO

    May 22, 2021

    From: Principal

    To : The entire Council of Teachers and School Staff

    It is requested for the entire council of teachers and staff to participate in reminding the students of SMK Negeri 1 Solo in the movement of neatness, such as putting on a shirt, wearing uniform black shoes, and neatness of hair, this is done so that the students become trained and accustomed to always appear neat in while in the school environment and outside of school. Thank you.

    Principal

    Kirino Saputra

    Well, that’s a comment on the meaning of memos and examples . If you often write notes on a sticky note and stick it on the fridge or table when you want to leave, that also includes a memo, which is an unofficial memo.

     

  • The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    The Meaning of National Science: Systematics, and the Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences

    Meaning of National Knowledge – Friends of Reader, are there any of you who have a focus of interest in studying the country? Studying the country is a fundamental part of studying the building of national science. By studying the science of the state, we have opened the gates of other state sciences, such as the science of state administration law and the science of state law.

    That is why, many scientists say that national science is a “knowledge gate” to the next national science. It is the same as studying politics which is a basic part of studying the building of political science.

    Similarly, studying law is the main part of studying law. We will know that studying or understanding a country will expand our way to understand a country. Therefore, understanding the concepts of the country first becomes the main prerequisite in learning the science of the country.

    Below will be an explanation of the meaning, systematics, and the connection of national science with other sciences.

    Meaning of National Science

    National science is a science that belongs to the group of social sciences that study the origin, purpose, formation, and disappearance of the state in a general, abstract, and universal way. Further explanation can be presented as follows.

    1. National science “studying the country in general”, meaning discussion using general arguments, that is the general understanding of the country. If it is applied to the countries in the world, the above argument is generally agreed as a valid statement;
    2. National science “studying the country abstractly”, meaning in its description it presents the country as a value. In this case, what is observed is not just a country, but the country in general. Thus, the science of the state is distinguished from the science of state planning or state administration and the science of government. These three sciences study a country in a real situation, for example the constitution of Indonesia, the administration of Indonesia, and the government of Indonesia;
    3. National science “studying the country universally”, meaning the values ​​that exist and apply anywhere.

    From the description above, it can be stated that national science is science. The meaning of science here is the result of human thought that is objective and organized systematically. A science has the following characteristics.

    1. Being objective, it means that science must also be able to pursue the truth that can be generally accepted;
    2. Being systematic, it means that the understandings obtained cannot be separated, but are a close and whole unity.

    National Science Systematics

    A scholar named George Jellinek, in his book entitled Algemeine Staatslehre , revealed that national science has the following systematics.

    1. National science as s taatswissenschaft (science in the narrow sense), which investigates the country in an abstract and general state;
    2. National science as rechtswissenschaft (science in a broad sense), which is divided into two categories, namely individual staaslehre (science that investigates a specific country), for example studying state institutions, the judiciary, and so on; as well as pezielle staaslehre (science whose research is aimed at the country in a general sense, as well as representative institutions that are studied specifically).

    George Jellinek.

    George Jellinek is the figure who first formulated national science as a science that stands on its own. This caused him to be nicknamed “the father of national science.” This then raises a question, namely “Has national science been studied as science before the systematization done by George Jellinek?”

    In this case, the answer to the question still raises speculation because at that time national science has not yet become an independent science and its nature is still descriptive or includes all knowledge related to the state. Questions such as religion, politics, culture, morality, and economy related to the country are included in the discussion of national science.

    This can be known from the works of Plato and Aristotle in Ancient Greece in the book titled Politeia and Politica , which talks about the issues of the state in it. At that time, the object that was observed and studied was the city state (city state) which is known as the police with a territory that is not as large and the number of people is not many.

    It is not surprising if all issues related to the country can be compiled and poured into a work that discusses the country. However, that condition in its development could no longer be maintained due to the emergence of the nation state , with the boundaries of sovereignty expanding and reaching even larger territories and populations.

    As a result of this condition, there is a need for lessons about the country that need to be systematized in independent science.

    Regarding learning in Indonesia, national science was introduced by Universitas Gadjah Mada (UGM) in 1946. When compiling the study material for the law faculty, UGM compared it with the Rechstsschool (law school) located in Jakarta. However, the curriculum structure was found to be incompatible with the reality of independence and then a comparison was sought at the University of Leiden, the Netherlands.

    In relation to that, the initial lecture on national science was named Staatsleer (the term national science which comes from the Dutch language) which covers the main issues about the state and is free from colonial reality. In further development, there are also those who use the term “Theory of the Nation”, especially in the study of political science to systematize the object of research on the country.

     

    The Relation of National Science with Other Sciences

    National science has been taught for a long time, but it was only at the beginning of the 20th century that it was compiled as a systematic science by George Jellinek. With the development of the social situation as taught by Herbert Spencer, there is also a need for branches of science that conduct specific research on certain fields.

    With that statement, national science then has a relationship with other branches of science, among others with the science of constitutional law, the science of state administrative law, political science, and economic science.

    1. The relationship between State Science and State Law

    It has been stated that national science has a general research object regarding the growth, existence, formation, and disappearance of the country or it can also be about a specific country. This is the similarity between the science of the state and the science of constitutional law, that is, they both have the object of research in the form of the state.

    However, the object of research in the science of constitutional law is more concrete because it is bound to time, place, situation, and certain arrangements, for example the constitutional law of Indonesia, the constitutional law of the United States, and so on. Some parties even say emphatically that the science of constitutional law is law about the organization of the state.

    This is what causes the details of discussion in the science of constitutional law to be linked to state organs, relations between state organs, citizenship, the validity of laws, and so on. Thus, the connection between the two branches of knowledge is the same in its object, but the issues discussed are different.

    Of course, in order to learn the science of constitutional law, you must have a sufficient introduction to the subjects related to the joints of the state, all of which are found in the science of the state.

    2. The relationship between State Science and State Administration Law

    In general, administrative law is defined as the law that regulates the relationship between administrative organs and citizens. The areas that are the focus of the discussion are licensing, state officials, taxes, registration that creates rights, and so on.

    Thus, what is learned from the science of national administration law is the same as the science of the state, namely the state. The difference is that political science examines the basic elements of the state in general and abstract terms, while the legal science of state administration actually examines “the state in motion”, that is the relationship between (organs of) the state and society.

    For this reason, the knowledge of the state becomes the basis for learning the law of state administration, because to learn the latter, it also requires basic concepts related to the state.

    3. Relationship between National Science and Political Science

    Political science is a branch of science that studies issues related to the state. The object of his study is grundlagen (conditions for the establishment of the state), wesen (state essence), e rscheinungsformen (formations of the state), and landesentwicklung (state development).

    However, not all things that intersect with the state studied by a branch of science can be categorized as political science, but become a supporting element in the study of politics, for example:

    • History, especially that which concerns people or the country, is not part of the discipline of political science, unless it concerns the history of statecraft or the constitution. The behavior of community life, individual actions, history of literature, science, economic conditions, morality, military, diplomatic struggle, all of these cannot be categorized into a part of political science;
    • Statistics, especially those related to societal social problems, are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Economic politics, especially those related to economic law and applied to individuals, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science;
    • Social studies, especially those related to identity, are not related to the state, so they are not part of the discipline of political science.

    Based on the Greek tradition, political science is called the term politiki . Furthermore, in Germany, studies were developed on s tasrecht (public law) and politics ( politics) as two different branches of science. Later, other differentiations developed, such as political statistics, administration, international relations, and so on.

    In its development, especially in the practice of learning, there is a difference between the object of study of political science in Europe, especially England and France, and in the United States. In learning in Europe, they take the root of the material in Ancient Greece, so the character of the material is conservative and normative. As for the study of political science in the United States, it already has a more specific meaning, which is about certain symptoms related to other countries.

    Meanwhile, political science in Indonesia until the 1960s was still taught by legal scholars, so the nature of the study was analytical and normative. It was only later with Miriam Budiardjo’s initiative and the establishment of an independent faculty that political science began to establish its object of study which has more special characteristics than the object of study of national science in the Faculty of Law.

    Although the method and institutionalization of the idea of ​​study differ from one country to another, in general it can be said that the object of political science study is about the country. This is where his attachment to national science lies. National science in this case provides a basic understanding of the main issues of the country, while the study of certain aspects of the country is empirically done by political science.

    In the subsequent growth, the object of study of political science becomes the provisions that apply in a certain country, so that in its development it will be studied by the science of constitutional law.

     

    4. Relationship between National Science and Economics

    The question of the role of the state or government in the economic field has for a long time given rise to an ideological debate between the four main schools of the world economy, namely laissez faire (let it happen), socialism, modern liberalism, and modern conservatism. However, the fundamental question that is being questioned is what kind of role is played in terms of government ownership and management in the economic field.

    Laissez Faire trend

    Some economists are of the view that laissez faire is the same as capitalism, even though capitalism itself is not a political ideology, but rather an economic system dominated by the private sector, especially in terms of production methods, distribution of production products, and the exchange of goods and services.

    Laissez faire in the Western world is a political ideology that is completely dependent on capitalism, which in its development always strives for capitalism itself to become an economic system.

    Currents of Modern Liberalism

    The understanding of classical capitalism then gets criticism and a sharp spotlight. A group of thinkers began to question the economic system of classical liberalism which is seen as more inclined to emphasize the notion of freedom form (free from) state or government intervention in economic affairs.

    This tendency is later referred to as negative freedom (freedom that is negative) because the emphasis on freedom from actually consumes freedom itself. On the other hand, what is needed is an economic system that emphasizes freedom to (free to) in the context of the role of the state or government in all areas of the economy.

    In further development, freedom to is known as positive freedom , which encourages the government to seriously and realistically provide guarantees of freedom of life for all levels of society.

    Modern Conservative Trend

    The trend of conservatism has a different view. This trend basically deals with efforts to preserve traditional values ​​and institutions. The strange question they face is the various radical changes driven by classical liberals in the 19th century.

    Adherents of conservatism believe that society should continue to run as it is. However, the holders of power are the aristocracy, not the emerging business groups.

    Trend of Socialism

    The view of socialists about freedom and competition is different from other trends. Because freedom and competition are very closely related to the social structure as a whole, freedom and competition
    in an unfair social order will strengthen the injustice itself.

    Therefore, the state or government cannot and should not take a certain role more actively so that the weak parties can be protected from the strong parties because they have power. Morally and politically, government intervention in the economic field can be justified and is absolute so that justice and common prosperity can be created for all members of society.

    Well, that’s the information about the Meaning, Systematics, and Linkage of National Science with Other Sciences . National science is a science that studies the basic concepts and joints of the national system in general. The study covers the same or similar things in the countries that exist or have existed in this world, for example about the emergence of the country, the disappearance of the country, the purpose and function of the country, the development of the country, the form of the country, and so on.

  • Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media, History, Functions, Types, Benefits, and Development

    Meaning of Social Media – In today’s age, it cannot be denied that human life today is very much related to social media. Social media plays an important role in almost all walks of life. Starting from sending messages to friends, sharing information, to finding information that is hot in the community. So, it is not surprising when someone mentions that social media has become one of the important needs of almost everyone.

    The presence of social media in today’s society has provided enormous benefits, especially in the current pandemic era. Social media is quite helpful in erasing the distance between people, so it is very effective in shortening the time in communicating. However, something that has a high positive impact, does not close the possibility of giving a high negative impact as well.

    Well, the following will be explained about the ins and outs of social media, starting from the meaning of social media to all aspects. For those of you who want to learn more about social media, this article will be very suitable to help you understand what social media actually is.

    A. Meaning of Social Media

    Social media can be understood as a digital platform that provides facilities to perform social activities for each user. Some activities that can be done on social media, for example, communication or interaction to provide information or content in the form of writing, photos and videos. Various information in the shared content can be open to all users for a full 24 hours.

    Social media itself is basically part of the development of the internet. The presence of the past few decades has made social media able to develop and grow widely and quickly as it is now. This is what makes all users who are connected to the internet able to disseminate information or content anytime and anywhere.

    B. Meaning of Social Media According to Members

    Social media can actually be said to be one of the popular phenomena that attracts a lot of people’s attention. In some of his works, experts have given various definitions about the technology that society always needs today. The following is the definition of social media according to the opinion of experts, including:

    1. BK Lewis (2010)

    BK Lewis in his work titled Social Media and Strategic Communication Attitudes and Perceptions among College Students published in 2010 states that social media is a label that refers to digital technology that has the potential to make everyone connect and interact, produce and share order.

    2. Chris Brogan (2010)

    Furthermore, in 2010, Chris Brogan in his book entitled Social Media 101: Tactics and Tips to Develop Your Business, mentioned that social media is a communication tool that contains various possibilities for the creation of new forms of interaction.

    3. Dave Kerpen (2011)

    Meanwhile, Dave Kerpen in his book titled Likeable Social Media which was published in 2011 stated that social media has a definition as a place where pictures, videos, writings and interaction relationships in the network, both between individuals and between groups such as organizations.

    C. History of Social Media

    Quoted from the online site maryville.edu, the beginning of the creation of social media itself occurred on May 24, 1844. The beginning of social media was a series of electronic dots and lines typed on a telegraph machine. Also at this time, Samuel Morse sent a telegraphic message to the public for the first time.

    The roots of digital communication, along with the origins of the modern internet and the current understanding of social media, were pioneered by the emergence of the Advanced Research Projects Agency Network (Arpanet) in 1969. This digital network was created by the US Department of Defense to connect scientists from four universities to share with each other. software, hardware, and other data.

    Then, in 1987, the National Science Foundation launched a stronger national digital network called NSFNET. After running for a decade, precisely in 1997, the National Science Foundation launched its first social media platform to the public.

    However, according to The History of Social Networking on the Digital Trends website, the growth and development of the internet around 1980 to 1990 had the potential to introduce online communication services, such as CompuServe, America Online, and Prodigy. This communication service successfully provides users to interact via email, bulletin board messages, and realtime online chat.

    This is one of the driving forces behind the birth of the earliest social media network, namely Six Degrees which launched in 1997. Six Degrees itself is the first social media platform that can make users connect with real world contacts, for example creating a profile in database.

    After the emergence of Six Degrees social media, which turned out to be short-lived. In 2001, the world of communication technology innovated again by presenting a new social media called Friendster. Unlike the fate of its older brother, Friendster managed to attract millions of users by simply registering email addresses and basic online networks.

    Meanwhile, as one of the other early forms of social media communication services, after it was launched in 1999, a weblog or blog called the Livejournal publication site began to attract a lot of interest from many people. gain high popularity. Meanwhile, a few years later, the Blogger publishing platform created by the technology company Pyra Labs was officially bought by Google in 2003.

    Furthermore, in 2002, a social networking service from social media called LinkedIn managed to attract the attention of many users. This social media itself was established for professionals who are developing their careers. After almost two decades, LinkedIn has grown and developed into one of the most famous social media in the world with more than 675 million users worldwide. LinkedIn is currently still a social media site for someone who wants to find a job as well as companies looking for human resources.

    Still in the social network social media, Myspace managed to launch in 2003 and managed to become one of the most visited websites on the planet in 2006. This social media provides facilities for users to share music directly on their profile pages.

    However, precisely in 2008, the power of Myspace was defeated by Facebook. As a giant in the internet world, Google also tried to launch social media in 2012 with the name Google+. It’s just that this social media doesn’t have a long life after it was reported to breach the data security of around 500,000 of its users.

    D. Functions of Social Media

    After knowing and understanding the definition of social media in general and based on experts, in this section you will be explained about the function of social media. As one of the most widely used digital platforms today, social media has managed to connect almost everyone with internet access.

    However, the function of social media is not only limited to that, there are many other functions that you can get from social media. Well, the following are some of the social media functions that Sinaumedia.com can summarize, including:

    1. Communication

    The first function of social media is of course communication. Before growing to this point, social media initially only focused on building a good communication ecosystem for users. However, with the development of the internet and technology, social media is more than just communication, social media has become a second world for people all over the world to gather and interact. Social media has succeeded in developing communication that is not limited by time and geography.

    2. Branding

    The second function of social media is branding. After successfully building a gathering place for all people from various parts of the world, social media is always growing and providing various needs from people, one of which is branding. Branding itself is a person’s way of building an image in the eyes of many people.

    To do branding, users usually have a unique and special way to design social media accounts so that they are attractive to other users. This is what makes social media accounts similar to the real world, because everyone has their own unique characteristics.

    3. Place of Business

    The third function of social media is as a vehicle to do business or business. After successfully providing communication and branding, social media is slowly growing so that every user can build a business in the network or online. As a place that is open for 24 hours, social media is proven to make it very easy for its users to build a virtual business. This is predicted to have a lot of potential to reach more people than businesses that only rely on the real world.

    4. Marketing

    The fourth function of social media is to do marketing or marketing. As a platform that is almost always used by humans, now social media has succeeded in creating services that make it easier for businessmen to introduce and reach more consumers. This method is proven to be effective in increasing profits and making it easier for users to get what they need.

    E. Types of Social Media

    High demand, making many new social media emerging and competing to attract interest and attention from users. The development of social media is also very fast, many social media platforms that used to be very popular, have now slowly disappeared, or been acquired by larger parties. Well, the following are various services and types of social media that are very popular in the community, including:

    1. Blog Services

    Blog services can basically be understood as a personal journal that has internet. One of these types of social media has the function of sharing posts or views of its users about various specific issues. This type of social media user is usually referred to as narablog or blogger. Examples of social media blog services are such as: WordPress, Blogger.

    2. Social Network Services (Social Network)

    Social networking services or commonly referred to as social networks is one of the most widely used social media by people in various parts of the world today. One of these types of social media has a function as a gathering place for many people to socialize with each other. In this service, users usually send each other messages, information, photos, and even videos. Examples of social media services are Facebook and Linkedin.

    3. Micro Blog Services (Microblogging)

    The next type of social media is the service of micro blogs or commonly known as microblogging. Although it has almost the same services and uses as a blog, this type of social media presents a simpler page. This makes the micro blog service have a better speed than the blog service. One example of micro blogging services is Twitter.

    4. Media Sharing Services (Media Sharing)

    The next type of social media that you need to know is media sharing services or commonly referred to as media sharing. When you often spend leisure time or study time through social media platforms YouTube or Soundcloud. So, you have actually gotten used to using this media sharing service. One of these types of social media basically has a main focus to make its users share media content such as photos, audio, or video. Another example of media sharing services is Instagram, Flickr, and so on.

    5. Collaboration Services

    The following types of social media are collaborative services. This collaboration service itself is used to make users mutually invite other users to create a contribution. Not only invite, in this collaboration service, users are usually allowed to create content and make corrections to the content of ‘members’ of the site.

    One example of the most popular contribution service today is Wikipedia. Wikipedia itself is a multilingual encyclopedia project in a network that operates freely and openly. This contribution service is run by the Wikimedia Foundation, which is one of the non-profit organizations located in Florida, United States.

    6. Forum Services

    This last type of social media is known to have a classic form. This type of forum service can be said to be one of the types of social media that has been around for a long time and has been widely known for a long time. The forum service itself can be used by users as a place to discuss various matters or specific topics with other users in a discussion space. Examples of social media forum services are Kaskus, Quora, and so on.

    F. Benefits of Social Media

    After you know and understand various information about the meaning of social media and others, the following will be explained about the benefits you can get from maximizing the use of social media, including:

    1. Means of Learning, Listening, and Delivering

    There are several social media platforms that are now available that you can use to learn, from finding various information, data, to issues that are hot in the community. In addition, you can also use social media as a means to share information with other users, both friends in the real world and friends in the virtual world.

    2. Documentation, Administration, and Integration Tools

    The second benefit you can get from using social media is to create documentation, administration, and integration. Social media applications are basically a place for you to store a variety of content, ranging from profiles, information, reportage, events, recording events, to the results of research studies. Not only that, these are some of the benefits of social media, such as creating an organizational blog, integrating various lines in a company, sharing relevant content according to the target community, and operational effectiveness of the organization.

    3. Means of Planning, Strategy, and Management

    The third benefit of social media is as a means of planning, strategy, and management. In the hands of management and marketing experts, social media can turn into one of the weapons used to launch planning and strategy. For example, to carry out promotions, attract loyal customers, explore the market, educate the public, to gather feedback from consumers or the community.

    4. Means of Control, Evaluation, and Measurement

    Finally, the fourth benefit of social media is as a means of control, evaluation, and measurement. Social media itself can be used to control the organization as well as evaluate, starting from planning and strategy. In addition, social media can also process data related to community and market responses as a measuring tool, calibration and parameters for evaluation.

    This is a discussion about the meaning of social media, starting from the understanding of experts, the history of social media, the function of social media, the types of social media, to the various benefits of social media. Hope it can be useful for you.

     

  • Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Understanding Mass Media and Its Characteristics as a Means of Communication

    Meaning of Mass Media – We must have a little contact with mass media in carrying out our daily life activities. We consume various types of information, whether from the internet, magazines, or television, especially in this all-digital era that makes everyone able to easily get new information.

    Basically, the process of delivering a message to a wide audience is called mass communication, while the tool or media used is mass media. Well, this article will discuss the meaning, characteristics, and functions of mass media.

    Meaning of Mass Media

    According to the Communication Lexicon , mass media are “means to deliver messages that are directly related to the wider community, for example radio, television, and newspapers”. According to Cangara in his book entitled Introduction to Communication Science , media is a tool or means used to deliver messages from the communicator to the audience, while the meaning of mass media itself is a tool used in delivering messages from the source to the audience by using communication tools, such as letters news, film, radio and television (Cangara, 2010: 123–126).

    Media is the plural form of medium, which means “middle” or “intermediate”, while mass comes from the English language, namely mass which means “group” or “group”. Thus, the meaning of mass media is an intermediary or tools used by the masses in establishing relationships with each other.

    1. Law No. 40 of 1999 about Pars

    Law No. 40 of 1999 on the Press mentions that the press is a social institution and mass communication vehicle that carries out journalistic activities, which includes searching, acquiring, owning, storing, processing, and conveying information, both in the form of writing, voice, image, voice and image, and data and graphics as well as in other forms by using print media, electronic media, and all types of available channels.

    2. Eep Saefulloh Fatah

    Fatah stated that the press is the fourth estate of democracy (the fourth pillar of democracy) and has an important role in building trust, credibility, and even the legitimacy of the government. The press that is meant as the fourth pillar of democracy is the press that has a function, namely as a tool of social control in democratic life.

    The control function makes the function of the press in society stronger. The press is expected to be able to cover both sides (seeing the news from two sides) which must be maintained because the press is a tool of social control for the government, so that the press becomes a medium for conveying the aspirations of the people towards the government.

    The press must also have a gate keeper function , that is to filter every report. It is hoped that the function of the press can provide good education for the community, as well as be a good bridge between the government and the community.

    3. Oemar Seno Adji

    Oemar mentions the press in a narrow sense, which is the broadcasting of thoughts, ideas, or news with the written word, while the press in a broad sense, which includes all mass communications (mass media) that emit someone’s thoughts and feelings, both with words – written and oral words.

    4. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    According to Effendy (2003: 65) in the Theory and Philosophy of Communication , mass media is used in communication
    if the communication is numerous and resides far away. The mass media that are widely used in everyday life are generally newspapers, radio, television, and movie theaters, which operate in the fields of information, education and recreation, or in other words information, education, and entertainment.

    Thus, mass media is a tool to do or disseminate information to a wide, numerous, and heterogeneous communicator. Mass media is a very effective tool in mass communication because it can change attitudes, opinions, and communication behavior. The advantage of communication using mass media is that mass media creates synchronicity, that is, a message can be received by a relatively large number of communicators.

    Characteristics of Mass Media

    Mass media is a means of mass communication. The process of delivering messages, ideas, or mass media information to the public is done simultaneously. A media can be called mass media if it has certain characteristics. Characteristics of mass media according to Cangara (2010: 126–127) include:

    • Being institutional, it means that the party that manages the media consists of many people, starting from the collection, management, to the presentation of information.
    • Being one-way, it means that the communication is less likely to allow dialogue between the sender and receiver. Even if there is a reaction or feedback, it usually takes time and is delayed.
    • Extensive and simultaneous, meaning that it can overcome the obstacles of time and distance because it has speed. Moving widely and simultaneously, that is, the information delivered is received by many people at the same time.
    • Being open, means that the message can be received by anyone and anywhere regardless of age, gender, and ethnicity.
    • Using technical or mechanical equipment, such as radio, television, newspapers, and the like.

    According to Cangara (2010: 76) in his book Introduction to Communication Science , mass communication is one of the types of communication that has a significant difference from other forms of communication. The nature of his message is open to a varied audience, both in terms of age, religion, tribe, occupation, and in terms of needs.

    Mass communication has a number of special features or characteristics, among which are the following.

    1. Institutional Communicator

    Mass media communicators move in complex, but institutionalized organizations. Board of mass communication message delivery through mass media, such as television, newspaper, radio, internet.

    2. Messages of a General Nature

    The messages conveyed in the process of mass communication by the communicator are aimed at a wide audience or all people, not just a group of people. Thus, the process of mass communication is open. This is because communicants are spread in various places. The news message also contains factual elements that are important and interesting for all circles of society, not just a group of people.

    3. Communication is Anonymous and Heterogeneous

    The communicator or recipient of information in mass communication is anonymous and heterogeneous. This is because mass communication conveys a general message to all communities who do not know each other without distinguishing tribes, races, religions, and have various psychological characters, ages, genders, places of residence, cultural customs, and different social strata. -different.

    4. Simultaneous Mass Media

    According to Effendy (2003: 53), the simultaneity of mass media is the simultaneity of contact with a large number of people in a distance from the communicator and the people are separated from each other.

    5. One-way Delivered Messages

    Communication between the communicator and the communicant occurs directly, but the communicator and the communicant do not meet each other and the communicant cannot respond directly. The communicator here handles the communication.

    6. Delayed Feedback

    This happens because between the communicator and the communicant who are not face to face directly. The communicator cannot immediately know the audience’s reaction to the message he has delivered.

    Functions of Mass Media

    1. Elvinaro Ardianto

    According to Elvinaro (2007: 14–17) in Mass Communication An Introduction , the functions of mass media can be divided into five, namely:

    a. Surveillance _

    As a tool to help the public to get warnings from the mass media that inform about threats.

    b. Interpretation (Interpretation)

    The interpretive function is almost similar to the supervisory function. Mass media not only supply facts and data, but also provide interpretations or temporary responses to important events. The media organization or industry chooses and decides which events are published or shown.

    c. Linkage _

    Mass media can unite diverse members of society, thus forming linkages based on common interests and interests about something.

    d. Transmission of Values

    The mass media represents the image of society, that is, it is watched, heard, and read. The mass media show us how they act and what they expect. In other words, the media represents us with role models that we observe and hope to emulate.

    e. Entertainment _

    The function of the mass media as an entertainment function is none other than to reduce the tension in the minds of the audience.

    2. Onong Uchjana Effendy

    Effendy (2003: 54) presents the function of mass communication in general, namely:

    a. Information function

    The function of providing information means that the mass media is a disseminator of information for readers, listeners or viewers.

    c. Educational Functions

    The mass media is a means of education for the public because it presents a lot of things that are educational in nature. One of the ways of educating that the mass media does is through teaching values, ethics, and rules that apply to viewers or readers.

    d. Influencing Functions

    The influencing function of the mass media is implicitly found in titles, features, advertisements, articles, and so on.

    Types of Mass Media

    According to Cangara (2010: 74), mass media are divided into three types, namely:

    1. Print Media

    Print media is the first mass media that appeared in the world in the 1920s. At that time, the mass media was initially used by the government to indoctrinate the public, so as to lead the reading public to a specific purpose, such as the needle theory in mass communication theory. However, the mass media is now free, as is the reciprocity of the audience.

    b. Electronic media

    After print media, the first electronic media appeared, namely radio as an audio media that conveys messages through voice. Speed ​​and timeliness in radio message delivery is certainly faster by using live broadcasts. During the dissemination of information about the Proclamation of Independence, the radio mass media played a major role in the dissemination of news. After that, a more sophisticated television appeared and could show pictures as audio visual mass media.

    c. Internet media

    New internet media is popular in the 21st century, for example Google was born in 1997. Internet media can exceed the capabilities of print and electronic media. Both media can enter the internet through a website. There are many advantages of internet mass media compared to other media. However, internet access which is still relatively free can be dangerous for users who do not understand, for example fraud, pornography, identity theft, and so on. Internet media does not have to be managed by a company like print and electronic media, but can also be done by individuals.

    Distortion of Mass Media Freedom

    Distortion of the freedom of the mass media in carrying out its functions include:

    1. Through Mass Media Regulation

    According to Article 28 of the 1945 Constitution and Law No. 11 of 1996 about the Press, the government has actually guaranteed the freedom of the press. The article provides a guarantee that there is no censorship and no prohibition for every citizen who wants to establish a press company. This is an important indicator of freedom of the press. For example, one of the TV stations reported on the Antasari case involving a woman named Rani. The reporting of the case only uses secondary sources, namely Rani’s family and Rani’s neighbors, not from primary sources.

    The violated article is article 3 which reads “Indonesian journalists always test information, report in a balanced manner, do not mix facts and judgmental opinions, and apply the principle of presumption of innocence”.

    2. Bureaucracy or Apparatus of Power

    In addition to the distortion of legal regulations, the control of press freedom by the government can also occur through the behavior of officials. During the time of the New Order (Orba), there were various behaviors of the apparatus that tried to control the freedom of the press, among others it was done by sending reprimands to the editors, physically assaulting journalists, up to the killing of journalists.

    For example, a member of the District House of Representatives (DPRD) of Cirebon City, Udin Saefullah, ran amok in the building of the people’s representative who did not accept after appearing in the local mass media, who said that he did not resign, even though he had registered as one of the prospective legislative candidates from Hanura party. He also threatened to beat journalists if he continued to raise his position as a member of the DPRD.

    3. Act of Judging the Community to the Media

    Freedom of the press guaranteed by UU No. 40 of 1999 was apparently used irresponsibly by some mass media. The freedom is used to unleash sensationalism. A number of individuals or community groups felt harmed by the news. They punish the press by going to the media office and then threatening and terrorizing, persecuting journalists, and vandalizing the media office.

    For example, the polling results reported by TVOne station and other TV stations experienced differences in polling results when the presidential election took place last year in 2014. This is what makes the community experience confusion in the quick calculation. In the end, a number of people protested against the TVOne station by criticizing it.

    4. Behavior of the Press Itself

    In practice, it turns out that not only factors outside the press have the potential to control press violence, such as legislation, the actions of the apparatus, and the control of press freedom turns out to be sourced from the press company itself. The media tends to present the entertainment side rather than providing information, political news tends to be presented that examines the personality of politicians rather than their thoughts and performance, and the news that is presented tends to be poor in meaning and make the reader cynical about the reality of everyday life.

    For example, the electronic media MNCTV always presents the advantages of the owner of the media, namely Harry Tanoesodibjo. This was done by the media because the owner wanted to nominate the president in the next election period. However, Harry Tanoesodibjo’s good image in the community was slightly tarnished after the revelation of the Antasari case that dragged his name. It can be ascertained that the media lacks professionalism when it comes to broadcasting advertisements and always favors its own owner or is not neutral.

     

  • Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Understanding Civil Society: Characteristics, Characteristics, and History

    Meaning of Civil Society – Do you know what civil society means? Civil society is a part of society that has manners in building, interpreting, and living its life. Civil society is often interpreted with different meanings. This is one of the concepts of waiuh face.

    Philosopher Petrus revealed that a civilized society can be interpreted as a civilized society in the meaning of life. The origin of the word civil is from English, which means civilized or cultured.

    While the term civil society is taken from the translation of civil society itself, that is civilized society. The concept of translation was first introduced by Dato Seri Anwar Ibrahim, through his talk at the National Symposium in 1995.

    This concept created by Anwar Ibrahim wants to show that the ideal society has an advanced civilization. More precisely, he mentioned that what is meant by civil society is a fertile social system. Where the system is based on moral principles that can guarantee a balance between the stability of society and individual freedom.

    Meaning of Civil Society

    As explained earlier, civil society is a fertile system that guarantees moral principles. Where individual freedom and community stability are very balanced.

    Another definition of civil society is that they are a group of people who are civilized, humane, possess knowledge, excel in technology.

    The Meaning of Civil Society According to Experts

    Below are some definitions of civil society according to experts. Read the information carefully.

    1. Mun’im (1994)

    Expressing that the term civil society is a unique idea that manifests itself in various social orders. Where the most important thing from the idea is the effort to coordinate various conflicts of interest. Whether it is the interest of the community, individual, or even the country

    2. Hefner

    Hefner revealed that civil society is a society that has special democratic characteristics in interacting with other societies. Moreover, civil society is usually more heterogeneous.

    In these conditions, they are expected to be able to organize themselves and be able to grow awareness to create civilization. That way, they are ultimately able to participate and overcome global conditions that are quite complex and also full of competition.

    3. Mahasin (1995)

    As explained earlier that civil society is a translation of civil society (in English). The word civil society consists of two words from Latin, civitas dei which means city, God and society which means society. From the word form one word namely civilization which means civilization. Therefore, civil society has the meaning as a community or group of urban people who have developed civilization.

    4. Munawir (1997)

    According to him, the civil society comes from the Arabic language. The word Madani comes from the word madana which means to inhabit, build, or live. But changed again to madani which means city people, civilized, and civil people. Thus, we can conclude that the word madani in Arabic has many meanings.

    While the civil concept according to Majid (1997) is often seen as a society that has merited in facing the plans of power and against the arbitrary government in Southern European countries, Latin America, and also Eastern Europe.

    5. Hall (1998)

    Hall says that civil society is usually synonymous with the term civil society. Where it means an idea, a shadow, a dream, and an ideal of a community that can embody social life. In a civil society, its members will stick to humanity and civilization.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    After understanding some of the definitions of civil society from the experts, the following writer will explain some of the characteristics of civil society that you need to know:

    1. Upholding Values

    Civil society is synonymous with its civilized nature. They always uphold the values ​​and norms and laws they support. They hold all that with knowledge, faith, and technology. This means that civil society has a life based on the rules that are in place. Starting from values, laws, norms, and others.

    Their obedience is based on faith, knowledge, and technology that they have learned. Then developed with the strength of their faith and confidence in the Creator.

    2. Have a High Civilization

    As human beings who have strong confidence and faith in God the Creator, civil society has proven that they are a civilized society. Where they have good manners and manners. In addition, they also have manners towards their fellow human beings as well as their God.

    3. Prioritizing Equality and Transparency

    The next characteristic is that civil society judges that their status is all the same. Whether it’s a woman or a man. Openness or transparency means that they will live life with an honest attitude and do not need things to be covered.

    So that it will grow a sense of mutual trust between one member and another. This shows that this society has a democratic nuance. Where their democratization can be created with the existence of Non-Governmental Organizations, political parties, a free press, and tolerance.

    Why can it be like that? Because in social society it is related to the discourse of rational social criticism. Where community members explicitly and clearly create democracy. So, civil society can only be guaranteed by a country that adheres to a democratic system, such as Indonesia.

    Then related to the tolerance that has been mentioned above, it has the meaning of the willingness of each individual to accept various views, attitudes, and also political differences. Such tolerance is an attitude developed in a civilized society. It is a form of mutual respect and mutual respect. Both groups and individuals who have different opinions and attitudes.

    4. Free Public Space

    A free public space is usually also referred to as the free public sphere. This is a region that allows the community to have the rights and obligations of citizens. Where they have full access to various political activities, unite and also cooperate, express different opinions, and also gather and obtain information widely.

    5. Supremacy of Law

    In KBBI, the supremacy of law means the highest authority in the law which means that there is a guarantee of the creation of justice that can be realized. This can happen when a country places the law as the highest authority.

    It should be underlined, that the intended justice can be realized if the existing law is applied neutrally. This means, there is no exception to obtain a permission in the name of the law.

    6. Social Justice

    Social justice or also called social justice is a balance and also a proportional division between the rights and obligations of a citizen and the country itself. Where it covers aspects of life.

    That is, citizens have rights and obligations towards their country. So is the state, they also have rights and obligations over their citizens.

    The rights and obligations have a balanced portion. So that it will produce a balanced output as well. Plurality or diversity will certainly occur in society. Especially in a country that has millions of citizens. Where they come from various different groups.

    So, what is meant by pluralism is an attitude of accepting and acknowledging in writing that the society in a country is plural or diverse. This can be a factor in the creation of a multicultural society. Starting from culture, values, customs, norms, as well as language, religious tribes, ethnicities.

    As a member of civil society, as is the case with Indonesian society. We have various languages, tribes, religions, cultures, ethnicities, and others. Of course, we must have a pluralistic attitude and also believe that a plurality will provide positive values ​​that come from God.

    7. Social Participation

    To establish relationships and cooperation between groups and individuals, we need to participate in the social environment. This aims to achieve and realize certain goals.

    With clean social participation, then that is the beginning of the creation of a civil society. This can happen if there are nuances that can make individual rights and obligations very well protected.

    That means, civil society needs to balance between its rights and obligations. So that social justice will be created as mentioned above.

    Characteristics of Civil Society

    In addition to having special characteristics, civil society also has its own characteristics that are different from society in general. Here are some characteristics of civil society that you need to understand.

    1. Integration between individuals and groups is exclusively woven into society through social alliances and social contracts.
    2. The power that exists in civil society is diffuse. So that the dominant interest can be reduced by the presence of alternative forces.
    3. There are development programs that are dominated by the state or the government and also other development programs that are dominated by the community itself.
    4. Equipped with access to the relationship between the interests of individuals and also the country. Because, members of volunteer organizations can give input to decisions taken by the government.
    5. Progress and development of creativity that was initially hindered by the totalitarian regime.
    6. The creation of loyalty and trust. So that each individual acknowledges their attachment to other individuals and they do not prioritize their own interests.
    7. There is the liberation of society through the activities of social institutions with various perspectives.
    8. Having trust and faith in God. That means they are a society that has a religion and acknowledges the existence of God. In addition, they also place God’s law as the foundation in managing life.
    9. Live peacefully and peacefully. Because, all the people in the civil society, both as a group and as an individual, respect and appreciate the other party.
    10. Help each other without interfering in someone’s internal affairs that could reduce their freedom.
    11. Tolerance, that means they will not interfere in the affairs of others who already have freedom as human beings. They also will not feel disturbed by other parties who have different backgrounds.
    12. Creating a balance between rights and obligations.
    13. Have a high civilization. That means they have a love for science and use and benefit from that knowledge for the future.
    14. Have noble morals.

    History of Civil Society

    Various types of efforts have been made in order to create and create a civil society. Be it for a short term or for a long term. In order to create a civil society in a short period of time, it is necessary to choose a trustworthy leader. Then, the community also needs to place a leader who can be accepted well and who can lead wisely.

    When looking for the historical roots of civilized society, it can be seen that in Ancient Greek society, this already exists. In Raharjo (1997), it is revealed that the term civil society has existed since before AD. The person who first coined the term civil society was Cicero, an orator from Ancient Greece.

    According to Cicero, civil society is a political community that has good manners. This is usually exemplified by people living in the city. Where they have their own legal code. With the existence of citizenship and city culture, the term city is not just a concentration of people.

    But also as a center of culture and civilization. In addition, the term civil society does not only refer to the term civil society. However, it is also based on the concept of the city of Medina built by the Prophet Muhammad SAW. Therefore, civil society also refers to the concept of civilized society or civilization. As well as another concept introduced by the philosopher Al Farabi, namely the concept of Medina as the Main State.

    According to a researcher at the Pesantren Development Board and Islamic Studies, Dr. Ahmad Hatta, the madinah charter is an important document that can prove that civilized society in the past was very advanced. In addition, he also emphasized that the clarity of the law and the constitution in the society.

    Even if we look at the opinion of Hamidullah (1958) in his book First Written Constitutions In The World, the madinah charter is the first written constitution in human history. The constitution surprisingly contained rules about civil rights that are currently being debated a lot.

    These civil rights are now known as HAM or human rights. This appeared long before the Universal Declaration of the United Nations, the French Revolution, and even the Declaration of American Independence was proclaimed.

    Such is the explanation about civil society that the writer can give. From all the explanations above, we can conclude that civil society is actually the concept of society that we need today. Especially in Indonesia which has various differences. Starting from tribe, race, religion, values, morals, and others.

    With the creation of a civil society, of course we will be spared from the conflicts that arise due to differences that are not appreciated and respected. For example, during the election, there will definitely be many conflicts that arise due to political differences. Individuals and groups can hate each other just because they have different choices.

    Well, if we have characteristics and social concepts similar to civil society. So that kind of conflict can definitely be avoided or even eliminated. What do you think? Have you applied the concept of civil society in your daily life?

     

  • The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    The Understanding of Human Beings as Individual Beings and Their Roles

    Understanding Humans as Individual Beings – Physically, humans are the same as other living creatures. Both have supporting elements that are able to help him live. But specifically, humans are different from other creatures. The meaning is that humans as creatures created by God become the most perfect creatures with the intellect they possess.

    The creation of reason that humans have can help them mention or categorize things and make a concept so that they have the ability to think. It can be said that the function of reason is to think.

    Then what about human needs? If classified, human needs are divided into two, namely material needs and spiritual needs. Material needs include two things, namely physical and biological. While spiritual needs include mental and psychological.

    Human Needs according to Abraham Maslow

    A pioneer of humanistic psychology Abraham Maslow argued that human needs are divided into five. Anything? See the following explanation.

    1. Physiological needs

    Some things that are categorized as physiological or basic needs are eating, drinking, clothing, sexual, and some others.

    2. The need for security and protection

    This one need includes several things, such as being free from fear, protected from danger, the threat of disease, war, and several other things.

    3. Social needs

    Being loved, recognized as a community, and counted as a person is a social need that humans need.

    4. The need for appreciation

    As the name suggests, the need for appreciation is certainly needed by humans to be appreciated for their abilities, position, position, etc.

    5. The need for self-actualization

    This one need is needed by humans, namely maximizing self-potential, self-expression, and creativity.

    The Meaning of Human Beings as Individual Beings

    After getting to know and understand the meaning of humans and their needs, Reader can only know the meaning of humans as individual beings.

    Ever heard of humans as individual beings? What is meant by individual? Actually individual comes from the Latin language individuum which means not divided. Whereas in English, individual comes from the words in and divided.

    If interpreted, individual means not divided or become a unity. Why is that? Basically, humans are born as individual beings who are not separated, not divided between their soul and body.

    Human development as an individual being does not only mean the unity of soul and body. Humans as individual beings have a broader meaning than that, namely humans have special characteristics with their own personality patterns.

    Despite having a twin brother, the personality of one individual is very different from another. People who are born with twins will not have exactly the same physical and psychological characteristics.

    In general, it can be seen that humans have the same physical equipment, but if we look further, the differences that each individual has will be clearly visible. The various differences will be seen in shape, size, nature, and so on.

    When Reader are in a group of thousands or even millions of people, you will still be able to recognize someone you already know because that person has recognizable physical characteristics.

    On the other hand, Reader will find it difficult to recognize one animal among thousands or even millions of similar animals. An individual is not only easily recognized through his physical or biological characteristics.

    Reader can recognize him through his nature, character, style, temperament, and taste. But physical characteristics become the main weapon for you to recognize people. Because physically there are people who are fat, thin, slim, straight hair, curly hair, brown skin color, white, and so on.

    Then you can recognize a person through his nature, character, and behavior. Because by nature there are people who are patient, cheerful, chatty, grumpy, etc.

    So, the term individual can be used to express the smallest or limited unit. Individuals can be understood as individual human beings so that they are often used as the term “people” or “individual human beings”.

    An individual can be defined as a human being who not only has a special role in his social environment, but also has a personality and specific behavior patterns about him.

    Then there are several aspects attached to the assessment of each individual, namely the physical organic aspect, the psychological-spiritual aspect, and the social aspect. The unity of the physical and spiritual aspects can be the meaning of the word individual.

    If there is a shock in one aspect, it will have consequences in other aspects. An individual’s spiritual ability can help him relate and think. In addition, the ability of the spiritual aspect of the individual can control and lead the mind to overcome every problem and reality that it experiences.

    These elements or aspects must be united in him so that a person can be said to be a human being as an individual being. If those elements or aspects are not united anymore, then a person cannot be called an individual.

    If a person only has his body, physical body, or body, then he cannot be said to be an individual. The term individual only applies to people who have organic physical integrity, psychological-spiritual, and social aspects.

    Without the existence of a society that is the background of its existence, individual identity will not be clear. In order to form a behavior that is in line with the situation, the individual needs to distance himself and process himself. In addition, individuals also need to form habits that suit their behavior.

    As individual beings, humans are always in the middle of other groups of individuals. Humans as individual beings need an environment that will help mature their personal formation.

    There is a time when the environment becomes an inhibiting factor and a supporting factor in the process of individual formation.

    The community environment is very influential on the formation of individuality. Conversely, individuals are also able to influence the community environment. The ability that each individual has is the main thing in establishing relationships with other human beings.

    Human Growth Process as an Individual Being

    Humans as individual beings are a combination of genotypic and phenotypic factors. What is meant by genotypic factor? Genotype factors are factors carried by individuals since birth and hereditary factors.

    Because physically everyone has similarities and the same characteristics of their parents. The similarities that occur can include the entire physical appearance or only certain parts.

    Physically you can see which part of the body has a resemblance to your parents. The same goes for nature and character. There may be some of your traits or characters that are similar to your father or mother.

    What about phenotypic factors? Phenotypic factors are physical characteristics, characters or traits that are influenced by environmental factors. These factors have a great influence in the formation of the special characteristics of each person.

    The environment in question is the physical environment, such as environmental conditions, living conditions or houses, and geographical conditions and climate. A person who lives in a mountainous area will certainly have different characteristics and habits from people who live in a coastal area.

    People who live in coastal areas may have a habit of speaking that tends to be harsh, unlike people who live in mountainous areas. The living environment will shape a person’s habits and behavior.

    Then there is the social environment that also forms the characteristics of individuals in social interaction. These interactions are usually done with family members, friends, and other large social groups.

    The process of growth accompanied by outward and inward development is considered a natural and normal human development. The meaning is that the human personality or individual has its own special characteristics on the whole soul and body.

    Growth can be interpreted as a human change towards being more advanced or arguably more mature. Then there are various opinions about growth. Basically, the process of association becomes part of growth. It can be said that the process of association is a change that happens to a person gradually and is influenced by the reciprocity of the experience he gets.

    Factors That Affect Human Growth As Individual Beings

    The following are some factors that can affect human growth as an individual being.

    1. The Nativist View

    Experts believe that this one growth factor is determined by other factors that individuals bring from birth. That is, a person’s growth is determined by the individual’s own factors, both similarity to parents, talent, and potential.

    2. Empiricistic view

    This one growth factor is slightly opposite to nativist, that is, the growth factor of an individual is backgrounded by the environment.

    3. Convergence View

    The last growth factor can be said to be a collaboration of the two views above. This individual growth factor is driven by the interaction of the environment and the environment.

    Based on psychology, individual growth levels are divided into four, namely:

    • Vital time (0-2 years)
    • Aesthetic time (2-7 years)
    • Intellectual age (7-14 years)
    • Social time (14-21 years)

    The Role of Humans as Individual Beings

    After discussing how the process of individual formation and growth, this article will take you to know how the role of humans as individual beings.

    Humans as individual beings have various roles to create all the things they want. Humans as individual beings have the role of protecting and defending their dignity.

    Then as individual beings, humans continue to strive to fulfill their basic rights. Realizing one’s full potential, both physically and spiritually, is one of the roles of humans as individual beings.

    In addition, humans as individual beings also play a role in fulfilling their own needs and interests for the well-being of the life they live.

    Human Development as an Individual Being

    Humans as the smallest unit in a group have self-awareness that comes from personal awareness of everything. The self-awareness referred to is reality, self-narcissism, self-respect, personality dignity, egoism, and self-realization.

    Humans as individual beings need behavioral patterns. Known as homo sapiens, humans have a mind that can help them think and act wisely. The intellect can be used by humans to develop the various potentials that exist within themselves.

    The potential is work, creation, and intention. The various development of potential that is done will make him a whole human being as the most perfect creature created by God.

    Human development occurs individually through various stages that take dozens or even decades to become an adult. Humans will grow with the efforts of education.

    The development that occurs will allow a person to have optimal potential. Educational efforts are made to develop human potential as individual beings.

    Education can also help people develop all the ideas in their minds and help apply them in everyday life. That way, human beings as individual beings will improve the quality of their own lives.

    Human Characteristics as Individual Beings

    As explained before, every human being is born with a different personality or becomes himself. That is the uniqueness that humans have.

    With the existence of individuality, each person will have different ambitions, wishes, feelings, enthusiasm, tendencies, and resilience. According to Oxendine, humans as individual beings have different characteristics. The following is the difference in the individuality of each person that appears specifically.

    1. Physical differences

    The physical differences in question are height and weight, age, vision, hearing, and ability to act.

    2. Social differences

    Social differences, including religion, economic status, tribe, and family relationships.

    3. Personality differences

    Personality differences lie in character, interests, motives, and attitudes.

    4. Differences in skill or intelligence

     

  • Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Meaning of Manhaj: Benefits and Advantages of Following Manhaj

    Manhaj is – Some Muslims may not know what is meant by manhaj salaf, although the term salafi may be familiar to some people. To understand it, it is necessary to dissect the meaning of manhaj and salaf first.

    Citing the journal Manhaj Salafiyah by H. Muhammadin (2013: 147), manhaj is ath-thariqah or the path taken by the companions of the Prophet SAW in understanding the religion of God. Meanwhile, salaf in a foreign language means the previous or leading.

    Yazid bin Abdul Qadir Jawas (2006: 18) in the Syarah Aqidah Ahlul Sunnah wal Jamaa’ah said that in terms of time, the word Salaf is used to refer to the period of time that should be emulated and followed, namely the first three generations in Islam.

    There are 3 main components of As-Salaf, namely:

    • The companions (those who lived as Muslims at the time of the Prophet, met him and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of the Companions and died as Muslims).
    • Tabi’ut Tabi’in (those who lived in the time of tabi’in and died as a Muslim)

    It can be understood that the way of the Salaf is the path taken based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Meaning of Manhaj

    Manhaj salah is an expression of two words, “manhaj” and “salaf”. Both have their own meaning. Manhaj is interpreted as a bright path, while salaf means those who have gone before you.

    Salaf can also be interpreted as imams and companions of the Prophet SAW. So, the way of the Salaf can be interpreted as a clear path according to religious rules based on the understanding of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    Mention for Followers of Manhaj Salaf

    The people who follow the way of the Salaf (salafiyyun) are commonly called Ahlus Sunnah wal Jamaah because they hold fast to the Al-Qur’an and As-Sunnah (the teachings of the Prophet) and are united on it. Also referred to as Ahlul Hadist wal Atsar because they hold fast to hadith and atsar when people prioritize reason.

    They are also called al-Firatun Najiyah, that is, the group that God saved from hell as will be mentioned in the hadith of Abdullah bin Amr bin al-‘Ash radhiallahu anhuma.

    In addition, they are also called ath-Taifah al-Manshurah, which is a group that is always helped and won by God as will be mentioned in the hadith Tsuban radhiyallahu anhu,

    Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    Manhaj salaf and salafiyyun are not limited (confined) to certain organizations, certain regions, certain leaders, certain parties and so on. In fact, the manhaj of the salaf teaches us that the bond of brotherhood is built on the Qur’an and the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, with the understanding of righteous salafush.

    Whoever holds fast to him, then he is our brother even though he is in another part of the world. This is the holy bond connected by the manhaj of the Salaf, the manhaj followed by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and his companions.

    The Salaf Manhaj is a manhaj that must be followed and held firmly by every Muslim in understanding his religion. Why is that? Because, this is what Allah explained in the Qur’an and by the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, in his Sunnah. Meanwhile, God has bequeathed to us:

    “O you who believe, obey Allah and obey the Messenger (Prophet Muhammad) and the ululamri (power holders) among you. If you disagree about something, return it to Allah (the Qur’an) and the Messenger (the Sunnah) if you believe in Allah and the Last Day. That is better (for you) and better as a result (in this world and in the hereafter).” (An-Nisa: 59).

     

    Evidence of Al–Qur’an Verses about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    As for the verses of the Qur’an that explain that we should really follow the way of the Salaf as follows:

    1. Surat Al-Fatihah verses 6-7

    “Show us the straight path. The path of those whom You have blessed.” (Al-Fatihah: 6-7).

    Imam Ibnul Qayyim said,

    “They are people who know the truth and strive to follow it. Everyone who knows the truth better and follows it more consistently, is certainly more entitled to be on the straight path. There is no doubt that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, are the people who are more entitled to bear this attribute (title) than the people of Rafidah (Shia).” (Madarijus Salikin. 1/72).

    Imam Ibnu Qayyim’s explanation of the verse above shows that the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, who are the Salafush Salih, are more entitled to the title of “those who have been blessed by God” and “those who are on the straight path”. . Because, their knowledge of the truth is so deep and they are very consistent in following it.

    This title shows that the manhaj they follow in understanding this Islamic religion is the right manhaj and on the straight path. Therefore, those who try to follow their manhaj and footsteps, means that they have followed the right manhaj and are on the straight path.

    2. Surat An-Nisa verse 115

    “And whoever opposes the Messenger after the truth is clear to him and follows other than the path of the believers, We let him wander freely in error and We cast him into Jahannam. And Hell is as bad as the place of return.” (An-Nisa: 115).

    Imam Ibnu Abi Jamrah al-Andalusi said,

    “The scholars have explained the meaning of God’s words above that what is meant by the believers here are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, and the first generation of this ummah. Because, they are people who welcome this Sharia with a clean soul.

    They have asked everything that was not understood from him with the best questions. The Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, also answered it with the best answer. He explained with a perfect explanation. They also listen to the answers and explanations of the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings be upon him, by understanding, practicing as best as possible, memorizing and conveying with full honesty.

    They really have a great priority over us. It is through them that our relationship can be connected with the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as well as with Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala.” (al – Mirqat fi Nahjis Salaf Sabilun Najah p. 36 – 37).

    Shaykhul Islam Ibn Taymiyyah, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Truly, both (opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of believers) are interrelated. Therefore, whoever opposes the Messenger as the truth is clear to him, must have followed other than the path of the believers. Whoever follows other than the path of the believers, he has opposed the Messenger after the truth is clear to him.” (Majmu’ Fatawa, 7/38).

    After we know that the believers in this verse are the companions of the Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him (as- Salaf) and the close connection between opposing the Messenger and following other than the path of the believers, it can be concluded that we must follow the “manhaj” whether we like it or not. salaf” way of friends.

    Because, if we take other than their path in understanding dinul Islam, this means that we have opposed the Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace. The consequences are truly terrible, that is, they will be left free to wallow in error. The end is going into Jahannam, as bad as the place of return. Na’uzu billahi min dzalik.

    3. Surat At-Taubah verse 100

    “And those who were the first to convert to Islam from among the Muhajirin and Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were also pleased with God. Allah SWT prepared for them a paradise with rivers flowing in it. They are eternal in it. That is a great success.” (at- Taubah: 100).

    In this verse, Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala does not specify His pleasure and guarantee of heaven for the companions of the Muhajirin and Ansar (as- Salaf). People who follow them well also get the pleasure of God and the assurance of heaven like them.

    Al-Hafiz Ibnu Katsir, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala informs about His pleasure to the people who preceded them from among the Muhajirin and Ansar as well as those who followed their footsteps well. God also informed about the sincerity of their pleasure to God, as well as what He has prepared for them, which is heaven – heaven full of enjoyment, and eternal enjoyment.” (Tafsir Ibn Katsir, 2/ 367). This shows that following the way of the Salaf will lead to the pleasure of Allah subhanahu wa ta’ala and His heaven.

    Proof of the Prophet’s Hadith about the Obligation to Follow the Manhaj of the Salaf

    1. Hadith about the sunnah of Islam

    The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, said,

    “Indeed, whoever among you lives as long as I do will see many disputes. Therefore, you must stick to my Sunnah and the Sunnah of the Khulafa ar-Rashidin who are guided. Hold it tight and bite it with your molars…” (Sahih, HR. Abu Dawud, at-Tirmidhi, ad-Darimi, Ibu Majah and others from the companion of al-‘Irbad Ibn Sariyah radiallahu anhu. Irwa ‘ul Ghalil , hadith no. 2455).

    In this hadith it is clearly stated that we will witness so many disagreements in understanding the teachings of Islam. The only way that leads to salvation is to follow the Sunnah of the Messenger of Allah, may Allah bless him and grant him peace, and the Sunnah of the Khulafaur-Rashidin (Salafus Salih). In fact, the Messenger of Allah, peace and blessings of Allah be upon him, ordered us to always stick to it.

    Imam ash-Syathibi, may God have mercy on him, said,

    “The Messenger of Allah, may God bless him and grant him peace, as you have witnessed, has linked the Sunnah of al-Khilafa ar-Rashidin with his Sunnah and one of the consequences of following his Sunnah is following their Sunnah.

    Because what they follow as Sunnah is really following the Sunnah of their Prophet, may God bless him and grant him peace. Or follow what they understand from his sunnah, may God bless him and grant him peace, both globally and in detail that is not known to anyone other than them.” (al-I’tishom. 1/118).

    2. Hadith about people who are above the truth

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “Continually there is a small group of my people who always appear above the truth. Those who insult them will not harm them, until God’s judgment comes and they are in such a state.” (Sahih, HR. al-Bukhari and Muslim, the wording of this hadith is the wording of Muslim from the companion of Tsauban, may God be pleased with him, hadith no. 1920).

    Imam Ahmad bin Hanbl, may God have mercy on him, said, “If it’s not halul hadith, I don’t know who they are?!” (Shyaraf Ashhabil Hadist, by al-Khatib al-Baghdadi, p. 36)

    Imam Ibu Mubarak, may God have mercy on him, Imam al-Bukhari, may God have mercy on him, Imam Ahmad bin Sinan al-Muhaddits, may God have mercy on him, and they all said about the meaning of this hadith, “So, everything is about the meaning of this hadith.”

    3. Hadith about 73 groups

    The Messenger of Allah, peace be upon him, said,

    “My people will be divided into 73 groups. All went to hell except for one group. He was asked, “Who are they, O Messenger of Allah?” The youth answered, (The group that is above what I and my companions are.” (Hasan, HR. at-Tirmidhi in his Sunan, “Kitabul Iman”, “Chapter Iftiraqu hadzihik Umah.” From the friend of Abdullah bin Amr bin al – Ash.

    The truth is recognized by Allah SWT

    As Muslims, the way of the Salaf is a rule that must be held tightly. Allah SWT has ordered Muslims to follow the way of the Salaf as His word salam Al-Qur’an.

    “Those who preceded and were the first (to enter Islam) from (among) the emigrants and the Ansar and those who followed them well, God was pleased with them and they were pleased with Him, and God provided for them the heavens in which rivers flow; they remain in it forever. That’s a big win.” (Qs. At Taubah: 100).

    In other words, God also praises the faith of the companions of the Prophet SAW.

    “If they have believed in what you believe, they have indeed been guided. However, if they turn away, they are indeed at enmity (with you). So, Allah will suffice you (with His protection) from their (evil). He is All-Hearing and All-Knowing.” (Qs. Al Baqarah: 137)

    The priority of Manhaj Salaf

    As the only manhaj that must be followed to understand Islam, there are several merits of the Salaf manhaj, namely:

    1. It is a rule that shows the straight path according to the pleasure of Allah SWT.
    2. Manhaj salaf should be held tightly when there is an understanding or opinion in understanding Islamic law.
    3. Following other teachings other than the way of the Salaf means that it is more free to fall into error that is not according to the instructions of Allah SWT.

    Benefits of Manhaj Salaf

    Any Muslim who follows the way of the Salaf, will certainly get a reward from Allah SWT. Here are the benefits of obeying the Salaf method:

    1. Shown the way to safety to avoid going astray.
    2. Apart from the temptation of the cursed devil.
    3. Saved from the torment of hell.
    4. People who are always in the truth and will always get help from Allah SWT.
    5. People who practice the way of the Salaf will be pleased by Allah and attain heaven (Al Jannah).

    Closing

    It turns out that there are many benefits and priorities, yes, Reader. By knowing about its benefits and priorities, it is easy for us to know in depth. Now Reader have a better understanding of the Salaf manhaj, right? May we become obedient people who follow the way of the Salaf and be protected by Allah SWT to walk on the straight path. Hope this article inspires you!